Home

This manual describes the various matters concerning the

1. A 130 47 3 Custom macro call Ne 135 4 7 4 Custom macro function A enee EE ENEE Eet 136 4 7 5 Custom macro function B n ale Pm 141 CHAPTER 5 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE Meere 148 5 1 M codes controlled by PLC EE 149 5 1 1 CCW CW rotation instructions M03 M04 EE EE rT er ere eT reer re Re ee 149 5 1 2 M05 Spindle stop M05 rper rm 149 5 1 3 Cooling ON OFF MO M09 Vua R ee EEE E e E M IC EUER ER TEARS eg 149 5 1 4 A axis release clamping M10 M11 P 149 VIII Contents 5 1 5 Tool control release clamping M16 M17 Vaude eua Ka Rd a ExR Bards Kai M a dap EA AER ERIS KG ee E 150 5 1 6 Spindle orientation M18 M19 Eeer eh tn mel qi nua buda eicit mes pridie irc iode dean QUE 150 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 EE EE EE QUON ace Ohne E Cai ERAI E CLA ees 150 5 1 8 Toolretraction instruction M23 M24 Eed EE ENEE 150 5 1 9 Rigid taping M28 M29 ias Mr oes toa ta nin galas tan ot samen DN Etpe ean ED talc EN ica 150 5 1 10 Helical chip remover ON OFF M35 M36 EE 150 5 1 11 Chip flushing water valve ON OFF M26 M27 ETE 150 5 1 12 Spindle blowing ON OFF M44 M45 jk aai aqoa are wae ace mea Smee Or BOR Ra CK RARIOR CERO Coe eee ae DR DER 150
2. Fig 2 5 1 1 178 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations Explanation Overtravel during auto mode In Auto mode if the tool hits the stroke limit switch during the movement along an axis all the axis movements are decelerated to stop with the overtravel alarm being issued The program execution is stopped at the block where the overtravel occurs Overtravel during Manual mode In MANUAL mode if any axis contacts the stroke limit switch all axes will slow down immediately and stop 2 5 2 Software overtravel protection The software stroke ranges are set by the data parameters P66 P73 with the machine coordinates taken as the reference values Overtravel alarm occurs if the moving axis exceeds the setting software stroke Whether the stroke check is performed after power on and before manual reference point return is determined by bit parameter NO 11 6 0 No 1 Yes Whether the overtravel alarm is issued before or after the overtravel when the software limit overtravel occurs is set by bit parameter NO 1127 0 before 1 after After the overtravel occurs move the axis out of the overtravel range in the reverse direction in Manual mode to release the alarm 2 5 3 Overtravel alarm release ut Method to release the hardware overtravel alarm In manual or MPG mode press key misi on the panel then move the axis in the reverse direction for positive overtravel move negatively for negative overtravel move positi
3. J 4024 fF 0 025 0 0 0 Mo 020 10 10 S J O DEE EG MAY 44028 N 4029 O 4030 P current selected additional workpiece coordinate system Note 1 P code indicates the current selected additional workpiece coordinate system Note 2 When G 4002 code is being executed the value obtained in 4002 is 17 18 or 19 Note 3 The modal message can be read but not written 2 Current position message Table 4 7 1 3 Reading operation Tool offset Relative coordinate system Variable Position message number Block end position of X axis ABSIO during value moving Tool nose ABSIO Workpiece involved 5003 Block end position of Z axis coordinate allowed Position ABSIO system instructed by program Block end position of 4 axis ABSIO Block end position of X axis ABSMT Block end position of Y axis Vashe A BSM coordinate Block end position of Z axis svstem ABSMT Block end position of A axis LA BEME unallowed 5011 Block end position of X axis ABSOT involved ABSOT coordinate Block end position of 4 axis ABSOT Workpiece 5016 Block end position of X axis coordinate abet allowed 5018 Block end position of Z axis El MEM 5019 Block end position of 4 axis Eb MEM po 133 ES ag kel a e yo m ch ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Serie
4. MEASUREMENT MOD LENGTH WRITE MO TOOL NO OFFSET NO MEASURE FEED T SETTING GAUG X REF POINT SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO 4 SAFETY HEIGHT TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION STEP3 PRESS ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD H mm 000 mm 833 SUE 388 108 i Y d nm 78 38 833 ie mal mo COORD SYS SELECT MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF 000 mm 77 833 m lt O SELECTION G54 G59 854 P1 G54 Poa 12 03 54 PATH 1 Fig 3 4 2 2 13 DATA 3 4 5 Backup restoration and transmission for data Press soft key HJDATA to enter SETTING DATA DEAL page The user data such as ladder ladder parameters system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values system macro variables custom macro programs and CNC part programs can be backup saved and restored read and the data input and output via PC or U disk are also available in this system The part programs saved in CNC are not affected during the data backup and restoration See Fig 3 5 6 1 CG g N e T E e FILE NUM CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE DIR LADDER PLC ladder l grp 153118 11 87 18 10 44 LADDERAB GRP 155718 11 87 11 15 26 PARA PLC ladder 1 bak 1531
5. gt Actual tool path X Fig 7 6 1 If an exact stop instruction is inserted the tool is moved along the real line as in the above figure by the program otherwise the bigger the cutting feedrate is or the longer the time constant of the acceleration deceleration is the bigger the arc at the corner is For circular instruction the actual arc radius of the tool path is smaller than the arc radius specified by the program The mechanical system permitting reduce the acceleration deceleration time constant as far as possible to minimize the error at the corner 161 ES Gi x kel a e yo e ch z 3 ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTER 8 TOOL FUNCTION 8 1 Tool function By specifying a numerical value up to 8 digits following address T the tools on the machine can be selected Only one T code can be specified in a block by principle However if no alarm occurs when a block contains two or more instructions of the same group via setting the last T code takes effect Refer to the manual provided by the tool machine builder for the digits after address T and the corresponding machine operation of T code e ag p e e UG ka e z ya When a movement instruction and a T code are specified in the same block the instructions are executed simultaneously When the T code and tool change instruction are in the same b
6. z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Transfer and cycle GOTO statement Cunconditional transfer IF statement conditional transfer IF THEN WHILE statement CWhen loop is performed 2 Unconditional transfer gt GOTO statement Transfer to the block with sequence number n The sequence number can be specified by an expression GOTOn n Sequence number 1 99999 Example GOTO 1 GOTO 10 3 Conditional transfer IF statement conditional expression IF conditional expression gt GOTO n If the specified conditional expression is satisfied the system transfers to the block with sequence number n if the specified conditional expression is not satisfied the next block is executed If the value of a variable is greater than 10 the system transfers to the block with sequence number N2 If the condition is not satisfied IFf1GT 10 GOTO 2 If the condition is WW Program satisfied N2 G00 G91 X10 0 lt IF conditional expression gt THEN If the conditional expression is satisfied a predetermined macro statement is executed Only a single macro statement is executed If the values of 1 and 2 are the same O is assigned to 3 IER EQ 2 THEN 723 0 Explanation gt Conditional expression A conditional expression must include an operator which is inserted between two variables or
7. 204 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting number changes the user can also modify the tool offset number as required 5 Measure feed setting The measured speed is the traverse speed at which the tool moves from start point R of tool setting to the tool setting gauge When it is input in metric the default is 40 mm min range 10 100mm min when it is input in inch the default is 2 0 inch min Range 0 4 4 0inch min 6 Whether the tool setting gauge installation is fixed 0 unfixed 1 fixed When the unfixed mode is set the tool setting gauge position on each axis cannot be modified when the fixed mode is set the tool setting gauge position on each axis can only be modified with debugging level authority or above 7 Tool setting gauge position X on X axis X coordinate of the tool setting gauge in the machine coordinate system 8 Tool setting gauge position Y on Y axis Y coordinate of the tool setting gauge in the machine coordinate system 9 Start point R on Z axis The distance a positive value from the tool nose to the tool setting gauge when the tool is moved at the measured speed 10 Tool length estimation L The distance a positive value metric mm min inch inch min from the tool nose to the spindle end face 11 Safety height of the tool setting gauge on Z axis The safe position from the spindle end face to the tool setting gauge plane 12 Select lt AUTO gt mode press soft key A
8. 0 Low level effective of Y axis driver alarm ALMZ 1 High level effective of Z axis driver alarm 0 Low level effective of Z axis driver alarm ALMA 1 High level effective of the 4 axis driver alarm 0 Low level effective of the 4 axis driver alarm ALM5 1 High level effective of the 5 axis driver alarm 0 Low level effective of the 5 axis driver alarm ALMS 1 High level effective of spindle driver alarm 0 Low level effective of spindle driver alarm lOV 1 High level effective of override signal 0 Low level effective of override signal Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number ERR ITL ITL 1 Allaxes interlock signal effective 0 All axes interlock signal ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 284 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List oystem parameter number 0 2 14 DCHC DCHC 1 Control function of two paths effective 0 Control function of two paths ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 2 2 DAL DAL 1 Add tool length compensation in absolute position display 0 Not add tool length compensation in absolute position display Standard setting 0000 OOO oystem parameter number 02 3 POSM POSM 1 Mode displayed on program monitoring page 0 Mode not displayed on program monitoring page Standard setting 0100 0000
9. 11 44 89 PATH 1 JPAUTONEAS MEASURE ST MEAS RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 1 Tool setting function The tool setting function consists of two parts including automatic tool length measurement and Z axis workpiece origin setting A Automatic tool length measurement Automatic tool length measurement is used to measure the tool lengths of different tools by the tool setting gauge fixed on the worktable and set the length difference between each tool and reference tool to the reference offset or tool offset thus ensuring correct machining even if tools with different lengths are used in a program CG e ag N e x t E e The basic principle is shown in fig 3 4 2 2 2 Reference tool The tool with its length firstly measured after power on is defined as the reference tool The reference tool is usually a fixed one which is not used for cutting it can also be defined by users Reference tool length Lb the displacement that the reference tool moves from the machine origin to the tool setting gauge The length of the reference tool measured is saved in the macro variables till the system power off Lb cannot be modified and deleted it is only for operation Current tool length Lc The displacement that the current tool moves from the machine origin to the tool setting gauge Tool length difference AL The tool length difference between current tool and reference tool AL Lc Lb After the reference
10. Example M3 S500 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G87 X300 Y 250 Z 120 R 150 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 orient at the initial level then shift by 5mm and dwell at point Z for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 XO YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4820 is set to 1 and G87 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G87 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 17 Boring cycle G88 Format G88 X Y ZR PF Function This cycle is use for boring a hole 88 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Dwell time at the bottom of the hole with its absolute valu
11. Fig 4 4 14 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R and boring is performed from point R to point Z As the tool reaches the hole bottom cutting feed is performed to return to point R level Use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle before specifying G85 If G85 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the drilling axis is changed Boring Boring is not performed in a block which does not contain X Y Z or other axes Example M3 S100 The spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G85 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120
12. 0 15 PIIS PPCK ASL PLAC STL STL 1 To select prereading working type 0 To select non prereading working type PLAC 1 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation exponential 0 Acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation linear ASL 1 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting speed difference control 0 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting angular control PPCK 1 To perform in position check by forecasting 0 Not perform in position check by forecasting 1 Overlapping interpolation effective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting 0 Overlapping interpolation ineffective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting Standard setting 0000 0001 PIIS System parameter setting 0 1 6 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL FBOL 1 Rapid traverse type post acceleration deceleration 0 Rapid traverse type pre acceleration deceleration FBLS 1 Pre acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse S 0 Pre acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear FLLS 1 Post acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse exponential 0 Post acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear ALS 1 Auto corner feed effective 0 Auto corner feed ineffective Standard setting 0000 0010 oystem parameter setting 0 1 7 CPCT CALT WLOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL CBOL 1 Cutting feed typ
13. 0004 oystem interpolation period 1ms 2ms 4ms 8ms Setting range 1 8 0005 Axes controlled by CNC Setting range 3 5 0006 CNC language selection Setting range 0 3 0 Chinese 1 English 2 Russian 3 Spanish 0008 Allowed value between encoder and machine 20 0000 coordinate system Setting range 0 0010 100 0000 0009 Max retransmission times of Ethernet bus 30 Setting range 0 255 0010 External workpiece origin offset amount along X axis 0 0000 94 NO Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0011 External workpiece origin offset amount along Y axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0012 External workpiece origin offset amount along Z axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0013 External workpiece origin offset amount along 4th axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0015 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0016 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0017 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0018 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 1 G54 4th Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0020 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0021 Or
14. 5 1 2 MO5 Spindle stop M05 Instruction M05 When MO5 is executed in auto mode the spindle is stopped but the speed specified by S instruction is retained The deceleration at spindle stop is set by the machine builder It is usually done by energy consumption brake 5 1 3 Cooling ON OFF M08 M09 Instruction M8 M9 It is used to control the ON OFF operation of the cooling pump If the miscellaneous functions are locked in auto mode this instruction is not executed 5 1 4 A axis release clamping M10 M11 Instruction M10 M11 It is used for A axis release and clamping 149 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 5 1 5 Tool control release clamping M16 M17 Instruction M16 M17 _ It is used for tool release and clamping 5 1 6 Spindle orientation M18 M19 Instruction M18 for cancelling the spindle orientation M19 orients the spindle which is used for the positioning of tool change 5 1 7 Tool search instruction M21 M22 Instruction M21 the instruction used to search a tool in retraction M22 the instruction used to search a tool when catching a new one 5 1 8 Tool retraction instruction M23 M24 Instruction M23 the instruction to move the magazine to the spindle M24 the instruction to move the magazine back to its normal position 5 1 9 Rigid taping M28 M29 Instruction M28 for c
15. CMD Setting range 1 65536 0170 X axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range 0 30000 0171 Y axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range 0 30000 0172 Z axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range O0 30000 0173 4TH axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range 0 30000 Go 04 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 0175 Program name of the 1 axis Setting range 0 8 0 X 1 Y Z Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0176 Program name of the 2nd axis Setting range 0 8 0 X 1 Y Z Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0177 Program name of the 3rd axis Setting range 0 8 0 X 1 Y Z Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0178 Program name of the 4th axis Setting range 0 8 0 X 1 Y Z Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0179 Program name of the 5th axis Setting range 0 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0180 The 1 axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0181 The 2nd axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0182 The 3rd axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0183 The 4th axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0184 The 5th axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0189 X0 0001 Reverse precision by backlash 0 0100 compensation setting range 0 0001 1 0000 mm Set a p 189 x 0 0001 in reverse feeding if the feeding of single servo pe
16. Communicator iNew Gren gySave Paste EpPrint About System GSK 218M ei oa GSN us Communi c FPES File 1 Receive File erh Set Port Pot COM 4 Raud Receive File File List File Name Partition State Receive Get List Fig 11 1 3 1 3 Click button in Receive File dialog to obtain the CNC file list as is shown in fig 11 1 3 2 e e zn N e t E e Eeceive File File List O00001 Rec OOOO Hot Rec Qno Hot Rec Qua Hot Rec Qna Hot Rec ogoi i Hot Rec OO00S5 Hot Rec oggi az Hot Rec Qn0214 Hot Rec Quas Hot Rec 000333 Hot Rec Quen Hot Rec Receive Cancel Fig 11 1 3 2 4 Select the file or multiple files to be received then press button Receive to start the file receiving as is shown is fig 11 1 3 3 265 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Receiving File Hame Save Path Receive Packs Error Fig 11 1 3 3 o After the file receiving the status bar of the dialog displays Received as is shown in fig 11 1 3 4 Receive File File List OOOO01 txt user Received ODDO txt user Hot Ree QOOOOS tat user Hot Rec 000004 txt user Hot Rec OOOO08 txt user Hot Rec 000011 txt user Hot Rec OOOOSS txt user Hot Ree Dn132 txt user Hot Ree nn214 txt user Hot Rec OO02Z51 txt user Hot Rec 000333 txt user Hot Rec QOOOBOO tat user Hot Rec
17. Dwell End point Fig 4 2 6 1 Function For accurate positioning without machine backlash G60 can be used for accurate positioning in a single direction Explanation G60 is a non modal G instruction it can be set to a modal value by bit parameter NO 48 0 which is only effective in a specified block Parameters X Y and Z represent the coordinates of the end point in absolute programming and the moving distance of the tool in incremental programming In tool offset mode the path of single direction positioning is the one after tool compensation when G60 is used The overrun marked in above figure can be set by system parameters P335 P336 P337 and P338 and the dwell time can be set by parameter P334 The positioning direction can be determined by setting positive or negative overrun Refer to system parameter for details Example 1 G90 GOO X 10 Y10 G60 X20 Y25 1 If the system parameter P334 1 P335 8 P336 5 for statement 1 the tool path is AB dwell for 15 5 BC 34 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code System parameter Table 4 2 6 1 P334 Dwell time of single direction positioning unit s P335 Overrun and single direction positioning direction in X axis Cunit mm Overrun and single direction positioning direction in Y axis Cunit mm Overrun and single direction positioning direction in Z axis Cunit mm Overrun and single direction positioning direction in 4 axis unit mm N
18. F If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit of the cutting federate the upper limit is used S If the speed exceeds the maximum speed for a specified gear its upper limit is used The speed gear is set by data parameters P294 296 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48770 is set to 1 and G74 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G74 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning Program restart It is invalid during the rigid taping 4 4 20 Right hand rigid taping G84 Format G84 X_Y_Z R_P_F_K Function In rigid taping the spindle motor is controlled as if it were a servo motor which is used for high speed and high precision taping It keeps the start positions of the taping unchanged if point R is not changed Even if taping is performed repeatedly in a position the threads will not be broken Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Dwell time at the bottom of the hole with its absolute value used if it is negative F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Number of
19. Feedrate override and spindle override are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the retraction operation is finished Before specifying G74 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CW rotation is not specified the system will adjust itself to CW rotation in R level automatically by the current specified spindle speed lf G74 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the first hole It is not executed for the other holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 MO6 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by number parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with canned cycle the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R l
20. File path File Name Par State C Documents and Setti 000889 txt user sent C Documents and Setti 000890 txt user sent Only send the edited file 2 file Add File Cancel Fig 11 1 3 8 Note 1 Make sure the baudrate is correctly set and the serial line is reliably connected before data transmission Note 2 It is forbidden to switch operation modes or pages during data transmission or critical errors will occur 267 Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note 3 File LADCHI TXT is ineffective when transferred to the system unless the power is turned off 11 1 4 Serial port on line machining Operation steps 1 Setting for CNC side SETTING 1 Press key to enter setting page and set IO channel to O or 1 2 Select lt DNC gt mode then the system prompts DNC state ready press key INPUT after sent by PC 2 Setting for serial communication software 1 Click menu Series Port set the baudrate to 38400 in Serial Port Setting Dialog 2 When the system I O channel is set to 0 select Xon Xoff in the pull down menu DNC Protocol of Menu Operation When the system I O channel is set to 1 select XModem in the pull down menu DNC Protocol of Menu Operation 3 Open CNC program files Open the program files by pressing button Open in menu File or y button Iz P n in the toolbar as is shown in fig 11 1 4 1 bel
21. G86 C98 G86 G99 Li Spindle CCW JC Q Initial level o PET Spindle CCW Point Z e Point R level Spindle stops i Point Z Fig 4 4 15 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R And boring is performed from point R to point Z When the spindle stops at the bottom of the hole the tool is retracted in rapid traverse Before specifying G86 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G86 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the drilling axis is changed 86 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Boring Boring is not performed in a block which does not cont
22. H1e parameters related to tool compensation bit par 8839 8841 num par 8265 8257 o 8813 parameters related to fixed canned cycle bit par 8842 8843 num par 0270 0280 P 1 3 DATA b E A EE PATH 1 IEEE NENNEN SYS INFO OPRT ALARM soo MM Fig 3 9 6 The parameter setting for each function is described in the page If you are not familiar with the setting you can find corresponding information here 6 Macro page In HELP page press soft key MACRO to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 10 7 224 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting 865 H M PG alJ RK M 81 883 operation instruction XI operation result var seq alarm J operand 1 variable s invariable K operand 2 variable invariable Ha1 1 J Hag 1 U K Haa 1 J K H 4 1 elt ak H 5 1 J K H11 1 J or K H12 I el and K H13 I J xor K E Gm S EE AN D ig 3 10 The formats and a variety of operation codes of the macro instructions are described in this page and the setting ranges for local variable common variable and system variable are also given If you are unfamiliar with the macro instruction operations you can get corresponding information here 7 PLC AD page In HELP page press soft key PLC AD to enter this page There are four subpages including F ADDR G ADDR Te ADDR and Y ADDR as is sho
23. K G65 H12 PZI Q J RZK e g G65 H12 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 AND 103 137 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual e ag p e e UG ka e z ya 138 8 Exclusive OR 124 J XOR ZK G65 H13 PH Q J R K e g G65 H13 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 XOR 103 9 Square root 1 Jm G65 H21 P I Q J e g G65 H21 P 101 Q 102 101 102 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 P I Q J e g G65 H22 P 101 Q 102 101 102 D 11 Complement J TRUNC J K x K TRUNC Removing decimal part G65 H23 P I Q J R K e g G65 H23 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TRUNC 102 103 x 103 12 Compound multiplication and division operation 1 1x J K G65 H26 PZI Q J R k e g G65 H26 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 101x 102 103 13 Compound square root 1 Jain G65 H27 P I Q J R K e g G65 H27 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 J 102 1037 14 Sine I J eSIN G KO Unit G65 H31 Pi Q J Rik Ce g G65 H31 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 SIN 103 15 Cosine 1 JeCOS K Unit G65 H32 PO Q J R K e g G65 H32 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 COS 103 16 Tangent 1 J TAN K Unit G65 H33 PZI Q J R K Ce g G65 H33 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TAN 103 17 Arc tangent 1 ATAN J K Unit G65 H34 Pi Q J R K Ce g G65 H34 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101
24. Or JJJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual LCD display area Edit keyboard area Or Iniz Ki P cl LI m Hol HUBS Boo 8202 HE HHH GoogG Hp DROE FEIER DER DEES L LI LL LL 3j b e ED we Lee oe i Sch ntn 9 i agita zph SEL ch 4 EE Lir oe 99 929 CH Es khet e z ag N e m t e Machine control area Soft key function area Fig 1 1 2 Panel of GSK218MC H 166 Chapter 1 Operation Panel LCD display area E2ENHENER HERES ENEAESESESERERES Edit keyboard area Soft key function area MPS TPF 1 2 Sore ll rr e ag N e m T E e PARE RA Machine control area GE ener ek EE en Lon Dine ita x oT SEET Ge kel 2 Tu Fig 1 1 3 Panel of GSK218MC V 1 2 Explanation for panel functions 1 2 1 LCD display area GSK 218MC and GSK 218MC V systems are employed with 10 4 inch color displays with resolution of 800x600 and GSK 218MC H system is employed with an 8 4 inch color display with resolution of 800x600 1 2 2 Editing keyboard area 167 Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual g OU x z p 9 ERY glate O M TI O m g T aR 1 ect 1 EI Nz cn rm a SHIFT CANCEL VS 9 AE In 1i D
25. PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 17 00 49 PATH 1 BACKUP RESTORE OUTPUT INPUT RETURN gt Fig 3 4 3 3 Press P to enter the next page E OTB Ghost Onekey Output Onekey Input Return The functions of the operations are shown in the table below table 3 4 3 4 Table 3 4 3 4 Operation item Explanation It is available to backup the data saved in the system disk such as ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values and system macro variables separately After the backup the system will create a backup file with file extension bak Data backup 209 e e zn N e t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual It is available to restore the data saved in the system disk such as ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values or system macro variables separately The operation reads the backup file saved in the system firstly and then recovers the data This operation can output the data saved in the system disk to the Data output external storage devices Data restoration devices to the system disk One key It can backup a variety of data items to the system disk One key restoration It can restore the backup files of multiple data items simultaneously Ghost One key It can copy multiple
26. The workpiece coordinate system set can be changed by moving its origin There are two methods to set the workpiece coordinate system 1 Using G92 see 4 2 11 for details 2 Using G54 G59 see 4 2 8 for details 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming There are absolute and relative definitions to define the axis moving amount The absolute definition is a method to program by the coordinate of the end point of the axis movement which is called absolute programming Relative definition is method to program directly by the axis moving amount which is call relative programming also called incremental programming 1 Absolute coordinate value It is the target position coordinate in the specified workpiece coordinate system namely the position to which the tool is moved A 15 60 40 18 Chapter 3 Programming Basics Move the tool from point A to point B using the point B coordinate in G54 workpiece coordinate system The instruction is as follows G90 G54X10 Y30 Z20 2 Incremental coordinate It is the target position coordinate relative to the current position with the current position set as the origin e ag p a e yo m e z ya Fig 3 3 4 2 The tool traverses rapidly to point B from point A The instruction is as follows GO G91 X 40 Y 30 Z 10 3 4 Modal and non modal The modal means that the set address value keeps effective until it is reset The other meaning
27. Whether the spindle is frequency conversion control or gear control is set by bit parameter No 1 2 If parameter No 1 2 1 the spindle auto gear shift is controlled by PLC Three gears gear 1 to gear 3 are available in this system and the maximum speed of each gear is set by parameters P246 P247and P248 respectively The corresponding gear can be output by modifying the ladder In MANUAL or Auto mode the increase or decrease for the corresponding spindle gear can be adjusted for the spindle CCW or CW rotation by pressing positive negative override keys In MDI mode the system will automatically select the corresponding gear after the specified speed is input 232 Chapter A Manual Operation Spindle motor speed Max speed 10V Spindle motor max clamp speed Spindle motor min clamp speed Spindle rotation instruction S instruction Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Max speed Max speed Max speed Fig 4 2 4 1 Note When the spindle auto gear shift is effective the spindle gear is detected by gear in position signal and S instruction is executed 4 3 Other manual operations 4 3 1 Coolant control om e ag N Gi e t p c P e A compound key used to switch between coolant ON and OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out 4 3 2 Lubricant control e 3 ae A compound key used to switch between lubricant ON and OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out 4
28. e x t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 7 11 Background edit in auto run The background edit function during processing is supported in this system During the program execution in Auto mode press key PROGRAM to enter the program page then press soft key 4 PRG to enter the background edit page as is shown in Fig 7 11 1 G92 X0 YO Z0 N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N108 22 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X795 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X795 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 DATA b 27 28 47 BG EDT BG END CHECK SAVE RETURN S gt Fig 7 11 1 Press soft key BG EDT to enter the program background edit page The program editing operation is the same as that in Edit mode Refer to Chapter 10 PROGRAM EDIT in this manual Press soft key BG END to save the edited program and exit this page Note It is suggested that the file size in background edit be not more than 3000 lines otherwise the processing effect will be affected 246 Chapter 8 MDI Operation CHAPTER8 MDI OPERATION Besides the input and modification for parameters and offsets the MDI operation function is also p
29. function These functions keep effective until they are cancelled by the other M functions in the same group Monamodali These functions are only effective in the block specifying them They are cancelled at the end of the function Non modal block Non modal M These functions are only effective in the block function containing them e g p e e UG ka e z z ya 3 5 Decimal point programming Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point A decimal point can be used when a distance time or speed is input Therefore it can be specified for the following addresses X Y Z A B C I J K R P Q and F Explanation 1 The least moving unit is set by bit parameter NO 57H 2 The decimal part that is less than the least input incremental unit is rounded off Example For X9 87654 if the least input incremental unit is 0 001mm it is processed as X 9 877 If the least input incremental unit is 0 0001mm it is processed as X 9 8765 20 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code CHAPTER4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION G CODE 4 1 Types of G codes Preparatory function represented by a G code with a number behind it defines the meaning of the block where it is located G codes are divided into the following two types Table 4 1 1 Type Meaning Non modal G mE Only effective in the block in which it is specified code Modal G code Keep effective until another G code in the same group i
30. to enter the next page e 9m mem Press key al to return to the previous page Note The CHECK function can only be performed in Auto mode BG EDIT and BG END are used only in AUTO and DNC mode background edit function Functions of BG EDIT are the same as the program edited in EDIT mode See CHAPTER 10 Program Edit Save the editing by BG END or exit the background EDIT page by RETURN after editing 188 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting 2 MDI display Press soft key MDI to enter MDI page In this mode multiple blocks can be edited and executed The program format is the same as that of the editing program MDI mode is applicable to simple program testing operation see Fig 3 2 3 GOO G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 1 727 mm 1 727 mm G54 47 897 mn 47 897 mn 9 480 mm 9 480 mm 080020 09 09 30 DATA 0000 PATH 1 j za oss al Fig 3 2 3 3 Program CUR MOD display Press soft key CUR MOD to enter current mode page It displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the current modal values MDI data input and execution are available in MDI mode See Fig 3 2 4 e g N e m t E GOO E 5 M 30 G94 d 0000 H D xk KN ve ze I co c 0000 0000 R G98 X eh ere a E F G15 E 47 897 mm J M G50 K E G69 z 9 48
31. ws Xesswram wm voae Op Za amp Wwraam wm BxHekdwedam ow Saddam rose Suedwrdam 0500 Software overtravel X release it manually or MPG moves in X direction to release it 0501 Software overtravel X release it manually or MPG moves in X direction to release it Software overtravel Y release it manually or MPG moves in Y direction to a7 release it Software overtravel Y release it manually or MPG moves in Y direction to i release it 0504 Software overtravel Z release it manually or MPG moves in Z direction to release it Software overtravel Z release it manually or MPG moves in Z direction to Ko release it Software overtravel ATH release it manually or MPG moves in 4TH NEN direction to release it Software overtravel 4TH release it manually or MPG moves in 4TH MEM direction to release it 0508 Software overtravel 5Th release it manually or MPG moves in 5Th direction to release it p we ee ee direction to release it Hardware overtravel X release it manually or MPG moves in X direction to mM release it Hardware overtravel X release it manually or MPG moves in X direction to NEN release it Hardware overtravel Y release it manually or MPG moves in Y direction to EE release it 325 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0513 Hardware overtravel Y release it manual
32. 1 58 PATH 1 E d LL LL sve INFO OPRT ALARM Ig PARA Fig 3 9 5 The formats functions explanations and restrictions of instructions are introduced in this page You can find the corresponding information here if you are unfamiliar with these instructions 5 Parameter page In HELP page press soft key PARA to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 10 5 NO MEANING BBBB parameters related to SETTING bit par 8BBB BBB2 num par 0888 8884 Baal parameters related to axis control bit par 683 6008 num par 0005 0008 BB parameters related to coordinate system bit par 8889 8818 num par 2010 8855 CG e ag N e t E e A parameters related to travel detection bit par 8811 num par 66 885 AAAA parameters related to feedrate bit par 8812 88014 num par 8885 8184 605 parameters related to acc dec control bit par 615 17 num par 8185 8157 BBBB5 parameters related to servo bit par 0018 num par 8158 8186 Bana parameters related to backlash bit par 8818 num par 0190 0200 DD parameters related to DI DO bit par 8819 BB28 num par 0200 0206 G9 parameters related to MDI display and edit bit par 821 029 num par 0210 0214 B818 parameters related to pitch error comp bit par 8837 num par 8215 8235 0011 parameters related to spindle control bit par 038 num par 0240 0260
33. 2 and the helical feed radius should be smaller than 1 2 tool radius J Rectangular groove width in Y axis which should be greater than The setting value of data parameter P269 tool radius tool radius 2 and helical feed radius should be smaller than J 2 tool radius L Cutting width increment within a specified plane which should be less than the tool diameter but greater than O Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one W First cut depth in Z axis which is a downward distance from R level and is greater than O if 68 D K Cycle process 8 9 Corner arc radius No corner arc transition if it is omitted The range of U is U which is Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code the first cut exceeds the groove bottom it will cut at the bottom position Its absolute value is used if itis a negative one Cut depth of each cutting feed Distance to the end surface to be machined in rapid feed which is greater than O Its absolute value is used if it is negative greater than or equal to D 2 and smaller than 1 2 or J 2 whichever is smaller Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is O by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number Number of repeats Rapid positioning to the start point of helical feed within XY plane Rapid down to R level The diameter helical feed W width is obtained by radius compensation value multiplying the parameter N
34. 6 4 Electronic MPG drive function VARRRRRRARAWARRARRARAHARRRRRIRANRRARARRAARRARRRRRRANARSARRRARARRSARERSARASAASRRRRRARRRARRRRARA 240 Contents CHPATER 7 AUTO OPERATION 7eH emen nnn nnn nnne nnne nnne 241 T 1 Selection of the auto run O10 62 n E 241 7 2 Auto run start HH 241 7 3 Autorun stop sesssssshsysesesecssseussnsssssesessessesesssessssssenshssusseseasessesenssesssssesensseesesessossensossessesesesessss 242 7 4 Auto running from any block e HHHHHHMHHMMMMMHHMRRRRRMMMMMHHHHHHMHMIHMMMMMMMMSMSMSMM MM MM 243 Zb Dry UD EE 243 7 6 Single block execution iene eee ee 244 ZZ Machine lock HMM M HemHIM MHHeHMeHHMMMMHHMMMMM MMe 244 7 8 MSTlIock e MM MMeekeeeMHHHeHeHHHeHeHemeeeese 244 7 9 Feedrate and rapid speed override in Auto run HMMHMeeSeeee 244 7 10 Spindle speed override in auto run n HM MMMMMHHHHMMHMHMM MMMMHMMPeMPyel 245 T 11 Background edit in auto run m HMM 246 CHAPTER 8 MDI OPERATION 79emnrnrnn nnne nnn nnn nnne nnn 247 8 1 MDI instruction input easssesesessesssssssessususisessesesssssssssusshsssesssaessssusshssseneseseesascossesssusesenseceosnsns 247 8 2 MDI instruction execution and stop E E A A A E 248 8 3 Word value modification and deletion of MDI instruction 66666668 248 8 4 Operation modes conversion 7 MH 248 CHAPTER9 ZERO RETURN ORBERATIONeseseeeeee ee EREREREN REN REN REN REE REENEN REENEN 249 9 1 Concept of mechanical zero machine Zero assssssaseessesesssesssossessssesessessossesssssueseseceesesoossees 249 9 2 Steps
35. 999 999 mm 999 999mm mm Offset value H input in inch 99 9998 inch 99 9998 inch The offset value assigned to offset number 00 HOO is 0 which cannot be set in the system Note When the offset value is changed due to the change of the offset number the new offset value replaces the old one directly rather than being added to the old compensation value For example FAO MN cacaceea ated Offset value 20 HOZ e Offset value 30 G90 G43 Z100 H01 Z moves to 120 G90 G43 2100 H02 Z moves to 130 3 Sequence of the offset number Once the length offset mode is set up the current offset number takes effect at once if the offset number is changed the old offset value will be immediately replaced by the new one For example Oxxxxx H01 G43 Z10 1 Offset number H01 takes effect G44 Z20 H02 2 Offset number H02 takes effect H03 3 Offset number HO3 takes effect G49 4 Offset is cancelled at the end of the block M30 4 Tool length compensation cancel Specify G49 or HOO to cancel tool length compensation The tool length compensation is cancelled immediately after they are specified Note 1 After B mode of tool length offset is executed along two or more axes all the axis offsets are cancelled by specifying G49 however only the axis offset perpendicular to a specified plane is cancelled by specifying HOO 2 It is suggested that a moving instruction of Z axis be added for the set up and can
36. ATAN 102 103 Note 1 The unit of angular variable is degree Note 2 If the required Q and R are not specified in operations above their values are 0 by default Note 3 trunc rounding operation the decimal portion is abandoned 3 Transfer instruction 1 Unconditional transfer Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code G65 H80 Pn n Sequence number e g G65 H80 P120 Go to block N120 2 Conditional transfer 1 J EQ K G65 H81 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H81 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 102 the program is executed in sequence 3 Conditional transfer 2 J NE K G65 H82 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H82 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 102 the program is executed in sequence ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 4 Conditional transfer 3 J GT K gt G65 H83 Pn Q J RZK n Sequence number e g G65 H83 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 gt 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 lt 102 the program is executed in sequence 5 Conditional transfer 4 J LT K lt G65 H84 Pn Q J RZK n Sequence number e g G65 H84 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 lt 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 2 102 the program is executed in sequence 6 Conditional transfer 5 J GE K G65 H85 Pn Q J RZK n Sequence number e g G65 H85 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When
37. E g when a tool is placed in ATC number 01 you can select this tool using code T01 This function is called the tool function 1 6 Tool geometry and tool movement controlled by programs 1 6 1 Tool length compensation Usually several tools are used for machining one workpiece If instructions such as GOZO are executed in the same coordinate system because tool lengths of the tools are different the distances from tool end face to workpiece are different as well Therefore it is very inconvenient if the program needs to be changed frequently Fig 1 6 1 1 Therefore the length of each tool used should be measured in advance and then set the length difference between the standard tool usually 1st tool and other tools in the CNC When the length compensation program is executed machining can be performed without altering the program even if the tool is changed making the distance from tool end face to workpiece the same after the Z axis positioning instruction eg GOZO is executed This is called the length compensation function Chapter 1 Overview 1 6 2 Tool radius compensation Because a tool has a radius if the tool performs machining according to the program written in terms with the actual machining contour a part equal to the radius width will be overcut on the workpiece To simplify the programming the program can be run around the workpiece with the tool radius deviated while the transient path at the intersection betw
38. Enter any page that displays the relative coordinates Fig 3 1 2 1 CANCEL 2 Clearing operation Press and hold key X till X in the page flickers then press key I to clear the relative coordinate in X axis Fig 3 1 2 2 3 Halving operation Press and hold key x till X in the page flickers then press key to halve the relative coordinate in X axis The relative coordinate of the axis is divided by 2 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting 4 Coordinate setting Press and hold key X till X in the page flickers input the data to be set and press key for confirmation then the data will be input into the coordinate system FEED F Omm min PRG SPEED SS FEED OVRD 100 d mm H 4n G8 128 3168 200 E ND Fa 25 50 100 ee SP S Qrpm o L VCnAA Y Za D GK mm 5 DO 10095 56 66 78 op op 188 118 128 E Et e ago Tool T COMMAND T NO ou OFFSET H 0 DOOO0 GR G17 G90 G94 G21 G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 E G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 0O DATA 09 07 52 P PATH 1 N EH 0 l Fig 3 1 3 1 e A 5 Steps for clearing the relative coordinate positions of axes Y and Z are the same as the above zi 3 2 Program display PROGRAM Press key to enter program display page which consists of 5 subpages HIPRG MDI CUR MOD1 CUR NXT and DIR They can be vie
39. G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G89 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G89 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 19 Left hand rigid taping G74 Format G74 AV ZRPFK Function In the rigid taping the spindle motor is controlled as it were a servo motor This instruction is used for left hand high speed and high precision taping Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the 9 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e g p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Or IS GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Dwell time at the bottom of the hole with its absolute value used if it is negative F_ Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats G74 G98 G74 G99 Spindle stop Q Initial level Operation 6 Spi
40. Get List Cancel Fig 11 1 3 4 CG e ag N e t E e B Data input PC CNC 1 Press system soft key IINPUT then the system prompts input waiting Din File 2 Click button or press Send File in the down menu of OPERATION to pop up Send File Dialog in the GSK com serial communication software as is shown in fig 11 1 3 5 Send File Dialog File list File path File Hane Par State Only send the edited file file sed aa Fite Fig 11 1 3 5 3 Click button Add Fide in the Send File dialog then the Select Part Dialog pops up as in fig 11 1 3 6 266 Chapter 11 System Communication Select Part Dialog e User Part Sys Part Ges Upgrade Fig 11 1 3 6 4 n the Select Part Dialog Select User Part when sending CNC part programs and custom macro programs select System Part when sending files such ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values and system macro variables o After selecting the partition select the file or multiple files to be sent and click button Send to start the file sending as is shown in fig 11 1 3 7 Sending File Hame Partition Sent Fack e e g N e t E e Fig 11 1 3 7 6 After sending the file files Gent is displayed in the dialog as is shown in fig 11 1 3 8 Send File Dialog File list
41. In the figure 2 x0x0ps178 Op is set by data parameter P144 Tool e programmed path 5 inear Circular 1 Linear Linear BE EE 3 Circular Linear 4 Circular Circular Fig 4 6 2 1 128 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 When a corner is determined to be an inner corner the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner The Ls and Le where the feedrate is overridden are distances from points on the tool center path to the corner As shown in Fig 4 6 2 2 Ls Les2mm Programmed path Tool center path A The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 6 2 2 Straight line to straight line ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 5 When a programmed path consists of two arcs the feedrate is overridden if the start and end points are in the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants Fig 4 6 2 3 Programmed path Tool center path b Feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 6 2 3 Arc to arc 6 Regarding a program from straight line to arc or from arc to straight line the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d Fig 4 6 2 4 Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 6 2 4 Straight line to straight line arc to straight line Restrictions 1 Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration deceleration before interpolation 2 Override for inner corners is disabled if th
42. Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press soft key PASTE to complete the paste Note 1 If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program the system will copy the blocks till the word nearest to the cursor location Note 2 If the blocks are copied with method N sequence number the blocks from the cursor to the N sequence number are copied Note 3 10 000 lines of blocks can be copied at most 10 1 6 Cut and paste of blocks Steps for cutting blocks are as follows a Enter the program edit page as Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block to be cut c Key in the last character of the block to be cut d Press soft key CUT to cut the block into clipboard e Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted and press soft key PASTE to finish block pasting om e ag N Gi e t p c Note 1 If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program the system will cut the blocks from the cursor to the word nearest to the cursor Note 2 If the blocks are cut with method N sequence number the blocks from the cursor to the N sequence number are cut 10 1 7 Block Replacement Steps for replacing a block are as follows a Enter the program edit page Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the character to be replaced c Key in the new character d Press soft key REPLACE to replace the character where the cursor is located as well as other identical chara
43. X X Coordinate system Machine tool Machining drawing CNC system Fig 3 3 3 1 In the coordinate system specified by CNC in order to cut the workpiece into the shape on the drawing according to the program of the programming coordinate system on the drawing the relationship between machine tool coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system must be determined The method to determine the relationship between these two coordinate systems is called alignment It can be done by different methods depending on part figure workpiece quantity etc Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Using the part reference point Il Fixing the part directly on the fixture l Reference point Workpiece Workpiece reference point l fixture Fixed distance d 00g Align the tool center to the workpiece reference Because the tool center can not be located at the point and s pecify the workpiece coordinate workpiece reference point the tool is located at a system by CNC instructions at this position Then position can be reference point the distance of the workpiece coordinate system coincides with which to the base point is known Set the the programming Coordinate system workpiece coordinate system using this known distance e g G92 S g ch fa Fig 3 3 3 2 A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system selecting a workpiece coordinate system
44. but also for specifying offset value for tool offset b Changing offset value In general during tool change the offset value must be changed in offset cancel mode If it is changed in offset mode the new offset value is calculated at the end of the block o 2 EM Offset value calculated at block N6 Offset value m calculated at A block N7 A Programmed path Fig 4 5 3 25 c Positive negative offset value and tool center path If the offset value is negative G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the program If the tool center is passing around the outer side of the workpiece it will pass around the inner side instead and vice versa As shown in the example below In general the offset value is programmed to be positive When a tool path is programmed as in figure a if the offset value is made for negative 123 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual the tool center moves as in b and vice versa Therefore the same program permits cutting for male or female shape and the gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset value Tool center path e g p e e UG ka ch z z ya Programmed path a 3 P Fig 4 5 3 26 d Overcutting by tool radius compensation 1 Machining an inner side of the corner at a radius smaller than the tool radius When the radius of
45. by G90 91 instruction 4 When programming please note that no plane selection is allowed when the system is in rotation mode otherwise an alarm occurs 5 n coordinate system rotation mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc cannot be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled if needed 6 After coordinate system rotation perform operations such as the tool radius compensation tool length compensation tool offset and other compensation 7 If the coordinate system rotation is performed in scaling mode G51 the rotation center coordinate values will be scaled rather than the rotation angle When a movement instruction is given the scaling will be executed first then the coordinate system rotation Example 1 Rotation G92 X 50 Y 50 G69 G17 G68 X 50Y 50 R60 G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X100 G02 Y100 R100 G3 X 100 I 50 J 50 G01 Y 100 G69 M30 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Tool path after rotation Originally programmed tool path ES Gi g kel a e yo e ch Z ya 50 50 Rotation center Fig 4 2 15 2 Example 2 Scaling and rotation G51 X300 Y150 P0 5 G68 X200 Y100 R45 G01 G90 X400 Y 100 G91 Y100 X 200 Y 100 X200 G69 G50 M30 Y When only coordinate system When both scaling and rotation function is applied coordinate system d rotation are applied 2
46. ms 0138 Exponential acceleration deceleration FL speed of 10 cutting feed in forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0139 Contour control precision in forecasting control 0 01 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0140 Blocks merged in forecasting control Setting range 0 10 0141 In position precision in forecasting control 0 05 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0142 Length condition of spline formation in forecasting Setting range 0 30 b Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 0143 Angular condition of spline formation in forecasting Setting range 0 30 0144 Critical angle of two blocks during automatic corner deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 2 178 degrees 0145 Minimum federate of automatic corner deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 10 1000 mm min 0146 Axis error allowable for speed difference deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 60 1000 0147 Cutting precision grade in forecasting control Setting range 0 8 0148 External acceleration limit of circular interpolation Setting range 100 5000 mm s 0149 Lower limit of external acceleration clamp for circular interpolation setting range 0 2000 mm min 0150 Acceleration clamp time constant of cutting feed Setting range 0 1000 ms 0151 Maximum clamp speed of handwheel incomplete running setting range 0 3000 mm min 0152 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of hand
47. n we VM MW glat A ome S 1 Je DEZ POSITION PROGRAM B SETTING PM ms X A 9 Q Fig 1 2 2 1 Editing keyboard area of 218MC and 218MC H TT CG g N e t E e e gt CN E BE SES Sp m CJ E BBE Bai sta D S J H V 6 EI Fig 1 2 2 1 Editing keyboard area of GSK218MC V N o 168 Chapter 1 Operation Panel The functions of the keys on the editing keyboard area are divided into 10 small areas which are explained as follows Explanation Reset key For system reset feed and output stop r For inputting addresses in MDI mode p For inputting numerical values in MDI mode For Inputting numerical values addresses or data into the buffer Input key area confirming the operation result Screen By pressing any of the keys the corresponding page is entered operation key See chapter 3 for details Page ke For page switching in the same display mode and page g y down up in the program For moving the cursor in different directions e For moving the cursor to the beginning or the end of a block or a EM Editing key J OC g 9 Search key For searching data and addresses to view and modify For inserting modifying or deleting a program or a block during 10 Editing key programming by using compound keys 1 2 3 Screen operation keys CG e ag N e t e c There ar
48. oystem parameter number 02 4 NPA NPA 1 To switch to alarm page when alarm occurs 0 Not switch to alarm page when alarm occurs Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 25 ALM DGN GRA SET SYS PRG POS POS 1 To switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page 0 Not switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page PRG 1 To switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page 0 Not switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page SYS 1 To switch over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page 0 Not switch over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page SET 1 To switch over page by repressing SET key in set page 0 Not switch over page by repressing SET key in set page GRA 1 To switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page 0 Not switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page DGN 1 To switch over page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page 0 Not switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page ALM 1 To switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page 0 Not switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page Standard setting 1111 1111 oystem parameter number 285 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0 216 HELP PLC SMDT SMDI SPET PETP PETP 1 Io switc
49. yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Rotation angle Rotation center X Fig 4 2 15 1 Function G68 rotates the programmed shape in a plane taking a specified center as its origin G69 is used for cancelling the coordinate system rotation Explanation 48 1 G68 has two positioning parameters both of which are optional ones They are used for specifying the rotation center If the rotation center is not specified the system assumes the current tool position as the rotation center The positioning parameters are relative to the current coordinate plane e g X and Y for G17 X and Z for G18 Y and Z for G19 2 When the current positioning mode is the absolute mode the system assumes the specified point as the rotation center When the positioning mode is the relative mode the system specifies the current point as the rotation center G68 can also use an instruction parameter R of which the value is the rotation angle with degree as its unit A positive value of R indicates the counterclock rotation When there is no rotation angle instruction in the coordinate rotation the rotation angle to be used is set by data parameter P329 3 In G91 mode the system takes the current tool position as the rotation center the rotation angle by increment is set by bit parameter NO 47320 rotation angle of coordinate system 0 by absolute instruction 1
50. 0000 0413 Roundness smooth control coefficient n1 3 0000 Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 0414 Roundness smooth control coefficient n2 0 0000 Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 316 Appendix l Alarm List APPENDIX II ALARM LIST Loo FPaanwerrommgofpmeraxei modes O Lum Festa Lum ro Lum Eesen There is no address but figure or character at the beginning of the block 0004 Modify the program There is no appropriate data but another address or EOB code behind the 0005 address Modify the program Sign input is wrong One or more signs are input behind the address 0006 where negative sign can not be used Modify the program 0007 Decimal point input is wrong One or more signs are input in the address where the sign can not be used Modify the program EN 0008 The program fle is too large Pease use CNC totransmitit 0009 egal adress input Mody the program o0 OGexewon Moiyepogam 00 Fesdrate is not specie or itis wrong in cutting feed ModlyWepogam 0012 Dispeceisnotenough Setup or ada fle ts notalowea 0013 The program fies are up to the upper imit New program can not be setup 004 695 can not be specifed itis not supported by thespindlo 0015 Exceed the number d ser controled aes 0016 Curent pien compensation beyendrange EE can ERES a NN modify parameter of user grade 0019 Scaling indion is OFF Pease use bit p
51. 0000 oystem parameter number 0 46 ORI SSOG SSOG 1 For servo spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping 0 For following spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping ORI 1 To perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts 0 Not perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 4 7 XSC SCLz SCLy SCLx RIN RIN 1 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by G90 G91 instruction 0 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by absolute instruction SCLx 1 Xaxis scaling effective 0 Xaxis scaling ineffective SCLy 1 Y axis scaling effective 0 Y axis scaling ineffective SCLz 1 Zaxis scaling effective 0 Zaxis scaling ineffective XSC 1 Axes scaling override specified by J K 0 Axes scaling override specified by P instruction Standard setting 0111 1001 System parameter number EE MDL MDL 1 Gcodes of unidirectional positioning set for modal 0 G codes of unidirectional positioning not set for modal Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 419 RPST RPST 1 Z axis moving by G01 mode at reset 0 Zaxis moving by GOO mode at reset Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 5 0 SIM G90 REL 29 Cr 13
52. 0371 Positioning error allowable for reverse X axis 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0372 Positioning error allowable for reverse Y axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0373 Positioning error allowable for reverse Z axis 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0374 Positioning error allowable for reverse 4TH axis 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm When the set backlash compensation value P0190 P0193 of an axis is bigger than the reverse positioning allowable error P0371 P0374 of this axis the speed at the end point of a single block reduces to minimum speed before this backlash compensation begins This will make the other axes move a small distance in the backlash compensation period and that will ensure the resultant path deviates the real path least 0376 Axes moving sequence to program beginning 12345 Setting range 0 99999 0380 Date of the record file Setting range 999 0000 999 0000 0381 Line of the record file Setting range 999 0000 999 0000 0382 Instalment times Setting range 0 24 0383 Arrived payment Setting range 0 24 0384 Delay times for each instalment Setting range 0 120 0385 Time limit for incorrect password allowed input Setting range 0 5 0387 X axis positioning value for tool setting machine on G53 Setting range 999 0000 999 0000 0388 Y axis positioning value for toolsetting machine on G53 Setting range 999 000
53. 1 1 2 1 252 Chapter 10 Edit Operation G92 X0 YO Z N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N1 8 Z2 3 N126 X795 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X795 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 DATA 08 49 38 PATH 1 NB eea Fig 10 1 1 2 1 3 Press address key and key in numerical keys o o o ol EN and in sequence an example for setting up a program name of O00002 here then O00002 is displayed behind the DATA column See Fig 10 1 1 2 2 CG ag N Gi e m T p e G92 X0 YO ZO N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 950 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N1 8 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 08 50 37 DATA O00002 PATH 1 EM oe ax ow om Fig 10 1 1 2 2 4 Press key to set up the new program name as is shown in the fig 10 1 1 2 3 253 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System
54. 101 2 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 lt 102 the program is executed in sequence 7 Conditional transfer 6 J LE K G65 H86 Pn Q J RZK n Sequence number e g G65 H86 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101s 102 it goes to N1000 when 2101 7 102 the program is executed in sequence Note The sequence number can be specified by variables Such as G65 H81 P 100 Q 101 R 102 if the conditions are satisfied it goes to the block of which the number is specified by 100 4 Logic AND logic OR and logic NOT instructions Example G65 H01 P 101 Q3 G65 H01 P 102 Q5 G65 H11 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 139 e g p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 140 The binary expression for 5 is 101 for 3 is 011 and the operation result is 2100 7 G65 H12 P2100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 for 3 is 011 and the operation result is 2100 71 5 Macro variable alarm Example G65 H99 P1 Macro variable 3001 alarm G65 H99 P124 Macro variable 3124 alarm Example for custom macro 1 Bolt hole cycle To drill N equal spaced holes on the circumference of the circle whose center is the reference point XO YO and radius is R with an intial angle A sl eference point X0 YO D Hole N 1 Fig 4 7 5 1 AU YO is the coordinates of the reference point in bolt hole cycle R Radi
55. 2 Click Series Port menu and set baudrate in Serial Setting dialog For data zz transmission select the baudrate of 115200 corresponding to the default set by data 2 parameter P002 For DNC on line machining select the baudrate of 38400 e corresponding to the default set by data parameter P001 11 1 1 Program start KE S c Run program Comm218MC exe directly The page is as follows Loi GSEComm Communicator SEE m C om ai SE Paste gp rint P About System GSN or Communi c B sena File yt Receive File Ze Set Port EEN Fig 11 1 1 1 11 1 2 Functions 1 File menu The file menu involves functions of New Open Save Print and Print setting and the latest file list etc 263 Or 18x ts 2 Edit menu GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual The edit menu involves functions such as Cut Copy Paste Undo Find and Replace 3 Serial port menu It is mainly used for opening and setting the serial port 4 Transfer Operation menu It consists of three transmission types DNC file sending and file receiving 5 View menu It is used for hiding and displaying the tool bar and status bar 6 Help menu It is used to view the software version 11 1 3 Serial port data transmission Steps are shown as follows 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Press key protocol password authority CG e ag N e x t E e Ladder PLC Parameter
56. 3 3 Chip removal control E CHIP REMOVAL A compound key used to switch between chip removal ON and OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out 233 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 3 4 Working light control e amp EN A compound key used to switch between working light ON OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out e e ag N e x Z E c 234 Chapter 5 Step Operation CHAPTERS STEP OPERATION 5 1 Step feed IL Press key STER to enter the STEP mode In this mode the machine moves by the step defined by the system each time 5 1 1 Selection of moving amount o e B e WFO W25 W50 W00 Press any of keys AONI ee sid i to select a moving increment then the V v 5096 increment will be shown on the screen E g If key Se is pressed a step of 0 100 See Fig 5 1 1 1 is displayed in POSITION page e e g N e t E e FEED E Omm min STEP W 0 100 FEED OVRD 10095 e mm 40 88 120 168 200 p Fa 25 DL 100 a SP S Orpm Y H HG so aos 58 66 78 88 op 188 118 120 pmM Z Kl HO mmn COMMAND T NO TOOO00 OFFSET H 08 DOOO0 Gu G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0000 0000 G11 G98 G15 Gig G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 00 O0 DATA 1 1290137 PATH 1 em n m Fig 5 1 1 1
57. 4 2 1 1 Explanation 1 After GOO is executed the system changes the current tool move mode for G00 mode Whether the default mode is G00 parameter value is 0 or G01 parameter value is 1 after power on is set by bit parameter No 031 0 2 With no positioning parameter specified the tool does not move and the system only 25 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual changes the mode of the current tool movement for GOO 3 G00 is the same as GO 4 The GO speed of axes X Y Z and 4th is set by data parameters P88 P91 The rapid positioning speed is adjusted by the keys FO 25 50 100 on the operation panel see fig 4 2 1 2 The speed to which FO corresponds is set by data parameter P93 and it is common to all axes Limitations E The rapid traverse speed is set by parameter The speed F specified in the GO instruction is the cutting speed of the following machining blocks x pd Example y GO XO Y10 F800 Feeding at the speed set by system parameter TS G1 X20 Y50 Using the feedrate of F800 e 3 J ye e e o VVFO W25 v 5096 W00 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 Fig 4 2 1 2 Keys for rapid feedrate override Note Note the position of the worktable and workpiece to prevent tool collision 4 2 Linear interpolation GO1 Code format GO1X Y ZE Function The tool moves to the specified position along a s
58. 5 2 9 4 5 3 Explanation for tool radius compensation Conception Inner side and outer side when an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move instructions for two blocks is over 180 it is called inner side when the angle is between 0 and 180 it is called outer side Inner side Outer side workpiece Programmed path Workpiece Programmed path Fig 4 5 3 1 Symbol meanings The following symbols are used in subsequent figures S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc r indicates the tool radius compensation value An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks 109 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual intersect with each other after they are shifted by r O indicates the center of the tool 1 Tool movement in start up When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode the tool moves as illustrated below start up a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Linear Circular d ILooq Programmed path r 3 S g e fa A _ Programmed path
59. 7001 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 17004 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of A axis 7006 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 7009 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 7246 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 7249 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 4 Local variables The correspondence between address and local variable 134 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Table 4 7 1 5 Argument Local variable Argument address Local variable No Se e b z mh E 0 iT 5 7 _ S PO O R J e L 6 8 1 s EE O u 834 T 50 R L9 L8 c O Gi ON N N Lin LA N Note 1 The assignment is done by an English letter followed by a numerical value Except letters G L O N H and P all the other 20 letters can assign values for arguments Each letter from A B C D to X Y Z can assign a value once and the assignment needs not to be performed in alphabetical order The addresses that assign no values can be omitted Note 2 G65 must be specified before any argument is used ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 5 Precautions for custom macro body 1 Input by keys Press key behind the parameter words G X Y Z R I J K F H M S T P Q for inputting S 2 Either operation or transfer instruction can be specified in MDI mode 3 H P Q R of the operation
60. By press moving key each time the corresponding axis on the machine is moved 0 1 mm 5 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction X axis may be moved in the positive or negative direction by pressing axis and direction key Press the key once the corresponding axis will be moved for a step distance 235 CG e ag N i x Z E e er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual defined by system The operation for Y or Z axis is identical with that of X axis Simultaneous manual moving for 3 axes is unavailable in this system but simultaneous zero return for 3 axes is available 5 1 3 Step feed explanation The step feed max clamp speed is set by data parameter P155 The step feedrate is beyond the control of the feedrate and rapid override 5 2 Step interruption While the program running in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to Step mode after a dwell operation the control will execute the step interruption The coordinate system of step interruption is consistent with that of MPG and its operation is also the same as that of MPG MPG for manual pulse generator i e handwheel similarly hereinafter See Section 6 2 Control in MPG Interruption for details 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step mode It is the same as that of Manual mode See Sections 4 2 and 4 3 in this manual for details 236 Chapter 6 MPG Operation CHAPTER6 MPG OPERATION 6 1 MPG feed
61. CCW rotation Two axes of X Y and End point coordinate in Rotation direction G90 mode End point position e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Z axes workpiece coordinate system G91 mode Two axes of X Y and Coordinate of end point relative Z axes to start point Distance from start point Two axes of I J and K Coordinate of circle center to circle center axes relative to start point Arc tangential speed CW and CCW on XY plane ZX plane or YZ plane refer to the directions viewed in the positive to negative direction of the Z axis Y axis or X axis in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system as is shown in Fig 4 2 3 1 Y X Z S S S X Z Y G17 G18 G19 Fig 4 2 3 1 The default plane mode at power on can be set by bit parameters NO 31 1 2 and 3 The end point of an arc can be specified by parameter words X Y and Z It is expressed as absolute values in G90 and incremental values in G91 The incremental values are the coordinates of the end point relative to the start point The arc center is specified by parameter words J K corresponding to X Y Z respectively Either in absolute mode G90 or in incremental mode G91 parameter values of J K are the coordinates of the circle center relative to the arc start point for simplicity the circle center coordinates with the start point taken as the origin temporarily They are the incremental values with signs See Fig 4 2 3 2 28 Chapter 4
62. Cancelling the canned cycle returning from the Point R level M30 Cancel G codes in group 01 G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G37 G38 cannot be specified in the same block or G37 G38 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 4 4 4 High speed peck drilling cycle G37 Format G73 X_Y ZRQFK Function The cycle is specially set for the high speed peck drilling It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole The operation illustration is shown as Fig 4 4 7 1 Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R Q Cut depth of each cutting feed F Cutting federate K Number of repeats 73 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G73 G98 G73 G99 Initial level O Point Z Fig 4 4 7 1 Z R If either of hole botto
63. Ch 2 Workpiece origin setting Setting range 9999 999 9999 999 Data input After finishing automatic tool length measurement in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system selection item press soft key MEASURE directly to set the current machine coordinate value of Z axis to the Z axis of the current selected workpiece coordinate system MEASUREMENT MODE O O00 mm LENGTH WRITE MOC TOOL NO 1 d H mm wer HL 833 ang FEED F a T SETTING GAUGE X REF POINT x aea SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT Y 188 STEP NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 58 H mm TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L 78 STEP3 PRESS ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT mmm z 88 8886 833 mn COORD SYS SELECT MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE STEP2 PRESS MEASURE gt SET Z REF l N N 000 mm 77 833 m lt e SELECTION G54 659 G54 P1 G54 P5a 12 03 54 PATH 1 DATA Fig 3 4 2 2 12 Or input the data in the following format Input format Z data 207 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Then press soft key MESAURE to set the current machine coordinate value of Z axis input data to the Z axis of the current selected workpiece coordinate system Example Input Z10
64. END is produced 146 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Processing time When a transfer to a sequence number in GOTO statement occurs the sequence number is searched for Processing in the reverse direction is longer than the one in the forward direction The processing time can be reduced by using WHILE statement for repetition Undefined variables In the conditional expression using EQ or NE vacant and zero have different affects In the other conditional expressions vacant is taken as O Typical program The program below calculates the sum of numbers 1 to 10 O0001 311 0 52 1 WHILE 1 LE 9 DO 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 END 1 M30 ES ag kel a e yo e ch 3 ya Precautions e When a macro program is called by G65 and M S T D and F are used for transferring variables only positive integers can be transferred This limitation does not apply to other letters e The line number N code cannot be in the same line with WHILE DO END or the loop is ineffective Loop and skip instructions cannot be used in DNC mode A GOTO statement starts searching at the beginning of the program and skips when the first corresponding line number is retrieved Try not to use the same N code in one program When the variable number is expressed by a decimal fraction the system will remove the decimal part with carry ignored e The values of local variables are retained b
65. Fig 3 2 6 II Press soft key DIR again to enter PROGRAM USB DIR display page the contents of which are displayed as follows See Fig 3 2 7 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting Pun a Me 3 K a 000017 txt 256B 08 08 14 12 18 Lg txt 126658568 11 08 408 18 A2 18 000027 txt 256B 08 08 14 12 18 087999 981364B 11 07 46 11 14 091001 G65H81P560 1603R 1 5669650615680640 M50 G65H81P4 Q 1001R1 G65H81P2 Q 100 R1 M138318438G38Z8 M21 INPUT j 16 54 44 PATH 1 Ge Explanation The program numbers in memory can be displayed by the page keys The program names with more than 6 digits or irregular formats cannot be previewed 3 3 System display SYSTEM Press key to enter system page which consists of four subpages HIOFFSET EIPARA EIMACRO and PITCH They can be displayed by corresponding soft keys See fig 3 6 1 below e e g N e t E e 3 3 1 Display modification and setting for offset 3 3 1 1 Offset display Press soft key EJOFFSET to enter OFFSET page which is shown as follows fig 3 3 1 1 1 19 Or JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual fj fj f A AAG d 4 UU V d UU d d UOY L H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 H 000 7 H Z d A AG H 000 000 H 000
66. G22 6G23 SE Um cid MEI EIC C DP CO LPS PEU EE NECS 62 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle Within a full circle G24 G25 65 4 4 3 Outer circle finish milling cycle G26 G32 UTTER ERE aod x RE CAR EC GbR SCR UON Y ERE COTE OE E CD E NU EAP DR OR 66 4 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 signals nae cate gus dee mince soli e da Di Ca Ru UE vade d QU ee 68 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 Beet e EE EE es 70 446 Rectangle outside fine milling cycle G37 G38 E 72 4 4 7 High speed peck drilling cycle G37 rS 73 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 EE 15 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring cycle G82 ee ede wesc ted en 76 44 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 g Ee ENEE ge P 78 44 11 Right hand taping cycle G84 Ween snot A eege alle dau ad drea n NuUa modu di 1 DE ec 79 44 12 Left hand taping cycle G74 A A A AAT A EE EE AT 81 4 4 13 Fine boring cycle G76 REENEN EEN a EN E e d EEN ENEE Badia 83 4 4 14 Boring cycle G85 SS RR DN EE iR a ck ae a n D ir a OR e Ren ROW RR nance CR a E GE 84 4 4 15 Boring cycle G86 I E E EE Vaud LX deu VER Dua ed DU Eat WE P at a d vache Fat I WR D Vc e deed tad Qu vid ER 86 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 Vues ide QURE ER EES See a WU dba dal aate 87 4 4 17 Boring cycle G88 Qecrin iae D iat EE Pn CUM AM ECUUCTa EEUU IR C ZU C EFE NU DROP UU PCI iUa MoDI Lia ff 88 4 4 18 Boring cycle G89 Senso opum als satus cM nual dad am
67. LA ei D ol e g N e m t E d i NOTE INPUT INTERFACE SIGNAL INPUT 16 57 03 PATH 1 ene 9 O Fig 3 3 3 1 2 Refer to SECTION 4 7 2 in PROGRAMMING for the explanation and use of macro variables 3 3 3 2 Modification and setting for macro variables 1 Select lt MDI gt mode 2 Press key hs J then soft key EIMACRO to enter macro variable page 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to be modified Method 1 Press page keys to display the page where the variable is to be modified move the cursor to the variable to be modified 195 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual SEARCH Method 2 Press key to search after inputting the variable number 4 Input a new value using number keys 5 Press key for confirmation and then the value will be input and displayed 3 3 4 Display modification and setting for screw pitch offset 3 3 4 1 Pitch offset display Press soft key PITCH to enter pitch offset page which is shown as follows fig 3 3 4 1 1 mw s IIe 000 O o o o o o oi j 0003 H ws o ECKER Loa o o 0 j Pos 0 o 9 ww 8a o f 9 Lows 0 o 98 ww a 8 e Fw 0 0 o CG e ag N e x t E e NUT Il 10 49 37 p SOFFSET EPARA MACRO em Fig 3 3 4 1 1 3 3 4 2 M
68. Offset value E 4MM Programmed position A d Unit MM Fig 4 5 1 1 N1 G91 GOO X120 Y80 1 N2 G43 Z 32 HUT 2 N3 G01 Z 21 F200 3 N4 G04 P2000 4 K key 5 N6 X30 Y 50 emm 6 N7 G01 Z 41 F200 7 NS 300 24 WEE 8 INS XOU Y 9 EE 9 N10 G01 Z 25 F100 10 N11 G04 P2000 e OU N12 GOO Z57 HOO e 12 N13 X 200 Y 60 e 13 N14 M30 102 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Format GA D X Y 1 G42D X Y G40 X_Y_ Function G41 specifies the left compensation of the tool moving G42 specifies the right compensation of the tool moving G40 cancels the tool radius compensation Explanation ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 1 Tool radius compensation As the following figure when using a tool with radius R to cut workpiece A the tool center path is shown as B and the distance from path B to path A is R That the tool is moved by tool radius apart from the workpiece A is called compensation N B Coffset tool center path A Cprogrammed path Vector Compensation and vector Fig 4 5 2 1 Programmers write machining programs using the tool radius compensation mode During the machining the tool diameter is measured and input into the CNC memory then the tool path turns
69. Operation at Retraction operation Application direction hole bottom Z direction Rapid traverse CCW inner circular groove G22 rough milling Cutting feed Cutting feed Rapid traverse CW inner circular groove G23 rough milling Cutting feed Rapid traverse CCW finish milling cycle G24 within a circle G25 Cutting feed Rapid traverse CW finish milling cycle within a circle Cutting feed Rapid traverse CCW outer circle G26 finish milling cycle Cutting feed Rapid traverse CW outer circle finish milling G32 cycle Cutting feed CCW rectangle groove G33 rough milling Rapid traverse Cutting feed Rapid traverse CW rectangle groove SES rough milling Gas Cutting feed Rapid traverse CCW rectangle groove inner finish milling cycle Gag Cutting feed Rapid traverse CW rectangle groove inner finish milling cycle G3 Cutting feed Rapid traverse CCW rectangle outside finish milling cycle Cutting feed Kl Rapid traverse CW rectangle outside finish 61 Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual II lees eer Deeg feed cycle CCW Stop G8 facet Cutting feed Rapid traverse Drilling spot drilling Cutting feed Rapid traverse Drilling counter boring G83 Intermittent Rapid traverse Peck drilling cycle feed G84 Cutting feed Stop gt spindle Cutting feed Taping CCW Cutting feed Cutting feed Cutting feed Spindle stop Rapid traverse Cutting feed Spindle CCW
70. PLC oystem parameter value Tool offset value Pitch offset value oystem macro variable Custom macro program CNC part program 4 Press key 264 to enter setting page set the I O channel to 0 or 1 With I O channel set to 0 select Xon Xoff for DNC protocol with I O channel set to 0 select XModem for DNC 3 Press soft key PSW to enter Setting Password page and then input corresponding Target file Password authority Password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level Password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level Password for system debugging level password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level Without a password Password for system debugging level password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level Without a password Password for system debugging level password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level Without a password stro to enter SETTING DATA DEAL page then press key Or Chapter 11 System Communication to move the cursor to the target position A Data output CNC PC 1 Press system soft key OUTPUT then the system prompts transfer waiting na Receive File 2 Click button M on GSK Com serial communication software then Receive File dialog pops up as is shown in fig 11 1 3 1 4 skComm
71. Preparation Function G Code 1 Two arcs can be drawn as follows one arc is more than 180 and the other one is less than 180 For the arc more than 180 its radius is specified by a negative value End point CX Y End point CZ X End point CY Z Start point Start point Start point Center Center Center ES I K J e 3 Fig 4 2 3 2 en J K are assigned with a sign according to the direction of the circle center relative to the start point The circle center can also be specified by radius R besides J and K z E GO2X Y R G03 X_Y_R_ z UG E g Fig 4 2 3 3 D As arc is less than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R50 F300 2 As arc is more than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R 50 F300 Fig 4 2 3 3 2 The arc equal to 180 can be programmed either by J and K or by R Example G90 GO XO YO G2 X20 110 F100 Equal to G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R10 F100 Or G90 GO X0 YO G2 X20 R 10 F100 Note For the arc of 180 the arc path is not affected whether the value of R is positive or negative 3 For the arc equal to 360 only J and K can be used for programming Program example 20 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Y 100 NE ET RN OE JN End point _ R50 60 ee Start point R60 Re ee ee eee eee 90 120 140 200 X Fig 4 2 3 4 The tool path programming
72. Programming and Operation Manual
73. Programming and Operation Manual 0800G2 DATA B 08 50 53 PATH 1 wm MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 10 1 1 2 3 SAVE control needs to be switched to other pages e g e page first press key to save the program and then finish the input of the program Note 1 Pure numerical value input is unavailable in Edit mode CG e ag N e x t E e Note 2 If a wrong instruction word is detected during program inputting press key L to cancel the instruction Note 3 No more than 74 characters can be input in one block each time 10 1 1 3 Search of sequence number word and line number 5 Input the written program word by word After the input the program will be saved automatically when the control is switched to other operation modes However if the The sequence number search operation is used to search for a sequence number from which the program execution and edit are usually started Those blocks skipped because of the search have no effect on the CNC state This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates M S T and G codes does not affect the CNC coordinates and modal values If the execution is started from a block searched in a program it is required to check the machine and CNC states The execution can only be performed when both the states are consistent with its corresponding M S T codes and coordinate system setting etc set in MDI mode T
74. Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 8 2 MDI instruction execution and stop After the instructions are input according to the steps in section 8 1 press key ACESA to execute them in MDI mode During the execution the instruction execution can be stopped by pressing key 2 Note 1 MDI execution must be performed in MDI mode Note 2 The program input in CUR MOD page is executed prior to that input in MDI mode 8 3 Word value modification and deletion of MDI instruction If a mistake occurs during the input press key L1 to cancel it if a mistake is detected after the input re input the contents to replace the wrong ones or press key ES to delete all the contents and then input them again 8 4 Operation modes conversion In Auto MDI or DNC mode when the control is converted to MDI DNC Auto or Edit mode during the program execution the system stops the execution of the program after the current block is executed When the control is switched to Step mode by a dwell during the program execution in Auto MDI or DNC mode the step interruption is executed See section 5 2 Step interruption If the control is switched to MPG mode by a dwell the MPG interruption is executed See section 6 2 MPG interruption If the control is switched to MANUAL mode by a dwell the manual intervention is executed See section 4 1 4 Manual interruption When the control is directly switche
75. Whether MPG Step interruption function is used is set by bit parameter NO 5623 238 Chapter 6 MPG Operation As the program being executed in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MPG mode by dwell the control will execute the MPG interruption The coordinate system for MPG interruption is shown in Fig 6 2 1 2 RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE 1 7287 mn 1 7287 mn 1 7287 mn 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 5 480 m 9 480 m 9 480 m HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED REM DIST d us d mm d D d ii d i d i d mn d mm d mn DATA 17 22 28 NW ECH ZEX eee ae Fig 6 2 1 2 Steps to clear MPG interruption coordinate system Press key X move the cursor upward and e e zn N e t E e downward till the MPG interruption coordinate X flickers and press key LJ then the coordinate system is cleared The operations for Y and Z axes are the same as above when the zero return operation is performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically too Note When the MPG interruption function is used to adjust the coordinate system if an alarm or resetting occurs the function is cancelled 6 2 2 Relationship between MPG interruption and other functions Table 6 2 2 1 After machine lock is effective the machine movement by using MPG interruption is ineffective MPG interruption does not Absolute coordinate value change the absolute coordinate values MPG interrupt
76. X60 0 Y60 0 G01 X100 0 F100 G01 Y100 G01 X60 0 Y60 0 M99 46 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code S E S g S 2 m Q 7 yo m ech 0 40 50 60 100 z Fig 4 2 14 4 ga Restrictions 1 When the canned cycle is executed in scaling mode the system only scales up or down the hole positioning data rather than point R value Q point Z at hole bottom and dwell time P at hole bottom For example 1 The cut in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle G83 G73 2 Fine boring cycle G76 3 Offset value Q of X axis and Y axis in back boring cycle G87 2 In MANUAL mode the traverse distance cannot be increased or decreased by scaling Note 1 The position displays the coordinate values after scaling Note 2 The results are as follows when a mirror image is applied to one axis of a specified plane 1 Circular instruction Direction of rotation is reversed 2 Tool radius compensation C Direction of offset is reversed 3 Coordinate system rotation Rotation angle is reversed 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 For the workpiece which consists of many figures with the same shapes users can program using the coordinate rotation function i e write a subprogram to the figure unit and then call the subprogram using rotation function Format G17 G68X Y R Or G18 G68 X_Z R Or G19 G68 Y_Z R_ G69 47 e g p e e
77. Z axis workpiece origin please make sure that automatic tool length measurement has been performed to the current tool or machining mistakes tool and equipment damage or even personal injury may occur 1 Coordinate system selection 1 Setting range G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 2 Data input After automatic tool length measurement in any mode move the cursor to the 206 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting coordinate system selection item then input the data in the following format a An integer from 54 59 b G54 G59 INPUT c P1 P50 then press key For example by inputting G55 the system calls the workpiece coordinate system G55 automatically MEASUREMENT MODE l m LENGTH WRITE MOC TOOL NO T d H mm OFFSET NO H 833 MEASURE FEED F 40 T SETTING GAUGE X REF POINT dl 308 SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT Y 100 STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 58 aaa Y H mm TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L 78 STEPS PRESS lt ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD z 85 833 COORD SYS SELECT MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF c mm STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y 000 mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF 77 833 mm SELECTION G54 G59 G54 P1 G54 P50 12 03 54 DATA PATH 1 zz e g N 5 e m A Fig 3 4 2 2 11
78. and transfer instructions preceding or behind G65 are all used as parameters for G65 H02 G65 P 100 Q 101 R 102 Correct N100 G65 H01 P 100 Q10 Correct 4 Variable range 1 7x10 1 7x10 5 The result of the variable operation can be a decimal fraction with a precision of 0 0001 All operations except H11 OR operation H12 AND operation H13 NOT operation H23 ROUNDING operation with decimal portions neglected in operation are done without the decimal portions abnegated Example 100 35 101 10 102 5 110 100 101 3 5 111 110x 102 17 5 120 100x 102 175 121 120 101 17 5 6 The execution time of operation and transfer instruction differs depending on different conditions The average time is usually 10ms 4 7 3 Custom macro call When G65 is specified the custom macro specified by address P is called and the data is transferred to the custom macro body by arguments Format G65 P oooooLoooo argument specification gt Calling times Program number of the custom macro body called 135 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Behind G65 code P is used to specify custom macro number L is used to specify custom macro calling times and the arguments are used to transfer data to custom macro If repetition is needed specify the number of repeats behind L code from 1 9999 if L is omitted the default time is 1 If
79. be 1 minute at least Or JIS Warnings and Precautions BOOK I PROGRAMMING This part gives an introduction to the specification product portfolio parameter configuration instruction codes as well as program format BOOK I OPERATION This part gives an introduction to the operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK 218MC series APPENDIX This part gives an introduction to the use of the machining center CNC system and its accessories of GSK218MC series BI AE A e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual oafety responsibility Manufacturer Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated on the design and configuration of the provided CNC systems Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC and its accessories Be responsible for the provided information and advice User Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system operation procedures and familiar with the safety operation Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing or modifying the original CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the danger caused by failing to observe the operation maintenance installation and storage in the manual This user manual shall be kept by the end user Thank you for your kind support when you are using the products of Guangzhou CNC Equipment Co Ltd VI Contents Contents OVE
80. can be specified except annotation statement Note 2 G10 must be specified in a separate block or an alarm occurs Please note that the parameter input mode must be cancelled by G11 after G10 is used 35 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note 3 The parameter value modified by G10 must within the range of system parameter otherwise an alarm occurs Note 4 Modal instructions of canned cycle must be cancelled prior to G10 execution otherwise an alarm occurs Note 5 Those parameters which take effect after Power OFF and then On are unavailable to be modified by G10 Note 6 On line modification for G20 and G21 is unavailable by G10 Note 7 When G10 modifies external zero offset workpiece offset additional workpiece zero offset or tool offset on line in G91 mode the system adds the instruction offset to the current offset when modifying them in G90 mode it modifies by the instruction offset Note 8 Cancel G10 mode when executing MOO M01 M02 M30 M99 M98 and M06 Note 9 Bit parameter No 0 7 Selection mode O for normal mode 1 for high speed and high precision mode does not support G10 on line modification 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Format G54 G59 Function for specifying the current workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is selected by specifying G instructio
81. canned cycle instruction G24 Initial level DRM ets es EE 5 ons levelZ 5 X Inner circle border Tool center path Fig 4 4 2 2 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G24 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J10 D1 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the inner circle finish milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 Cancellation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G24 G25 cannot be specified in the same block or G24 G25 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during canned cycle positioning 4 4 3 Outer circle finish milling cycle G26 G32 Format G26 G98 G99 X Y Z Rt J D F K G32 Function They are used to fine mill a full circle outside a circle by the specified radius and direction and then the tool returns after milling Explanation G26 CCW outer circle fine milling cycle G32 CW outer circle fine milling cycle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference level in G91 R Rreference level which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 Fine milling circle radius ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm mm Its absolute value is 66 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code used if it is a negative one J Distanc
82. count increases by 1 In other modes the count does not increase when M30 or M02 is executed Cut time Time counting starts after Auto run starts with a unit of hour minute second Sx Spindle override for adjusting spindle speed 500000 Actual feedback speed of spindle encoder T0000 Tool number specified by T code in a program Note The part count is reserved after power down Ways to clear part count and cut time 1 Switch to POSITION page select MDI mode 2 Press key D to locate the cursor to the PRT CNT item input data and press key for confirmation if key is pressed directly the part count will be cleared 3 Shift to CUT TIME by keys Up and Down 4 Press key to clear the CUT TIME Note 1 To display the actual spindle speed an encoder must be applied to the spindle Note 2 The actual speed the programming speed F x override The speed of each axis is set by data parameters P88 P92 in GOO mode and it can be overridden by rapid override the dry run speed is set by data parameter P86 Note 3 The programming speed for feed per revolution is displayed when the block involving feed per revolution is being executed Note 4 The total number of machined workpieces can be set by data parameter P356 and the total number of workpieces to be machined is set by number parameter P357 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and halving 186 The steps for clearing relative coordinate position are as follows 1
83. drill hole 1 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R TI e es ag p e e go m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to initial level G80 Cancel the canned cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G82 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G82 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 10 Drilling cycle with chip removal G83 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Format G83X Y Z RQ FK Function It is used for peck drilling It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of the hole while removing the chips from the hole Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of t
84. for Fig 4 2 3 4 is as follows 1 Absolute programming G90 GO X200 Y40 Z0 G3 X140 Y100 R60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 R50 Or GO X200 Y40 Z0 G90 G3 X140 Y100 l 60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 l 50 2 Incremental programming GO G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 R60 F3000 G2 X 20 Y 40 R50 Or GO G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 I 60 F300 G2 X 20 Y 40 I 50 Restrictions 1 2 3 4 D If addresses l J K and R are specified simultaneously in a program the arc specified by R takes precedence and others are ignored If neither arc radius parameter or the parameter from the start point to the circle center are specified an alarm is issued in the system A full circle can only be interpolated by parameters l J K from start point to circle center rather than parameter R Pay attention to the setting for selecting the coordinate plane when the helical interpolation is being done If X Y Z are all omitted i e the start point and the final point coincides and R is specified e g G02R50 the tool does not move B Helical interpolation Code format G02 G03 30 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Arc on XY plane G02 J G17 o Yoe Zac F_ G03 R_ Arc on ZX plane z G02 IK G18 Xo To p i F_ e G03 R_ a Arc on YZ plane c G02 JK E G19 E F_ G03 R_ Fig 4 2 3 5 d Function It is used to move the tool to a specified position from the current position at a feedrate specified by parameter F in a
85. for machine zero return e M MM S eeeeeeeM MMMMMHeHeeemmMee 250 9 3 Steps for machine zero return using instructlons He 250 CHAPTER 10 EDIT OPERATION ehenrn nnne nnn nnnm 254 10 1 Program edil HH 251 10 1 1 Program Creation III HII 252 10 1 2 Deletion of a single 0 016 ireli oE a 257 10 1 3 Deletion of all aldeje ire nik a M a t Hee eee 258 10 1 4 Copy ofa POC FAN Ee iesi CEU 258 10 1 5 Copy and paste of blocks ennen 258 10 1 6 Cutand paste of blocks ennen 259 10 1 7 Block Replacement bedeelege Deeg 259 10 1 8 Rename ofa egois lge lee 259 10 1 9 Program restart MM 260 10 2 Program management uahshresesessssesesssessnssusnsossuenssensnssesspusussssenensseesssesssssensossessesesessseesonseess 261 10 2 1 Program directory Search III 261 10 2 2 Number of stored 6 016 rz Ing a a 262 10 2 3 Storage capacity NEEN 262 10 2 4 Viewing of program QE 262 10 2 5 Program JOCK CRM 262 CHAPTER 11 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION III 263 11 1 Serial communication MM MM 263 11 1 1 Program Slart III MI III III III 263 11 1 2 Functions MIHI 263 11 1 3 Serial port data transmission ee 264 11 1 4 Serial port on line machining Tere dx EE RNE eee er E EE FEN ERE CK ERE EEUU KR RR ER RAE KM EP RR RR CER ER RE 268 11 2 USB COMMUNICATION MMMMMMMMMMMMMHHMMMMMMMMMMMMMMHMMMMMM S MMM MM HHMHMHMHHMeee 269 11 2 1 Overview and precautions mE E 269 11 2 2 Operations steps for USB part eee rz TAE AL E 270 11 2 3 USB DNC machining operation steps sida da aia Stine Wat
86. from block research at restarting to restarting or the restarting must be done from the first step Note 6 The restart function of the system does not support the program containing subprograms currently 10 2 Program management 10 2 1 Program directory search PROGRAM Press key reo then press soft key DIR to enter the program directory page See Fig 10 2 1 1 z e ag N Gi e t p c Program tere Storage capacity Pa WED 167 aco Program dictory 11 07 12 08 50 N 117B 11 07 05 10 02 108 11 07 97 16 04 11 07 07 09 15 rcs EE cuc ECCE M LE E T Program preview Gaexaefi aF19000 ES 81X30 10Z 12R5 eY30120U05 J S we Mu I1 ER amp PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT Fig 10 2 1 1 1 Open a program Open a specified program O sequence number key ENTER or key EOB or sequence number key ENTER or key EOB In Edit mode if the sequence number input does not exist a new program will be created 2 Deletion of a program 1 In Edit mode press key DEL to delete the program where cursor is located 261 CG e ag N i x Z E e er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 2 In Edit mode press O sequence number DEL or sequence number DEL 10 2 2 Number of stored programs Not more than 400 programs can be stored in this system The number of the stored programs can be viewed
87. function So 0282 Please check whether toolsetting gauge is installed or parameter 1 6 is set EE 0283 Z axis exceeds safety position please check toolsetting gauge or tool length NEM setting 0286 Automatic tool length measurement is wrong Please measure it again EE APC alarm n axis communication error data transmission error Possible 0301 reasons APC error cable or servo interface module faults 0302 APC alarm n axis overtime data transmission error Possible reasons APC error cable or servo interface module faults APC alarm n axis data format error data transmission error Possible 0303 l reasons APC error cable or servo interface module faults APC alarm n axis parity error data transmission error Possible reasons 0304 APC error cable or servo interface module faults oso APC ala ais pulse ear APC cable enor Lou Aec aam raris bate voege tow 0307 APC warm manis batery votage too low The battery shouid be charged T0308 APG arm ranis batery votage too Tow The RE 0300 wacnine zero point retum is performed before motornn T0401 Drie unit alarm 0 speed of servo motor exceeds set vae oao Drue unit alarm 02 power of spindle croutistoo rion T0403 Drue unt alarm 03 main cout power source stoo ow T0408 Drive unit alarn 04 value of positon deviation counter exceeds sehe RRE ee EE 0407 Drive unit alarm 07 Drive unit alarm 07 CCW CW input prohibition OFF CW inp
88. i o ia d ptg ad ar ER RO i lcu e iain Eua 272 11 2 4 Exiting U disk ez e E 273 APPENDIX GSK218MC SERIES PARAMETER LIST cevrccccceccetcetcetcetcesceseeseesseess 277 Explanation uhssresesassssssssssesshssasessesenssecsssssussspsessensesesssessessessesssessseaessusesshssueseseseeseseossessossesseceosseeess 21 1 Bit parameter M I 278 2 Data Parameter sens 294 APPENDIX Il ALARM LIST eere nnne nnne nenne 317 XI BI AE A e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual XII Overview OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview This manual consists of the following parts BOOK Programming This part describes the program configuration and programming basics for the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system as well as the function of each code Moreover it introduces the code format features and limitations when NC language is used to program BOOK I Operation This part describes the pages and their settings of the CNC system the operations and automatic run of the machine tool the program input output and program editing as well as the system communication etc Appendix This part describes the parameter list and alarm list including parameter default values and parameter setting range of the GSK218MC series machining center CNC system This manual applies to the CNC systems of GSK218MC GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V 1 2 System introduction GSK 218MC series product is upgraded from
89. increment unit Fig 2 6 2 Creating or changing forbidden area by parameters When the forbidden area is set by data parameters P76 P83 the data should be specified by the distance output increment from the machine coordinate system in the least instruction increment unit 2 When the forbidden area is set using program instructions G12 forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area G13 allows the tool to enter the forbidden area G12 must be specified in a separate block in a program The instructions below are used for creating or changing the forbidden area 180 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations B I J K X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X I G Least instruction increment unit Y J G Least instruction increment unit Z K gt Least instruction increment unit Fig 2 6 3 Creating or changing forbidden area using programs If it is set by a G12 instruction specify the data by the distance from the machine coordinate system in the least input increment Input increment The programmed data is then converted into the numerical values in the least command increment and the values are set as the parameters Example 1 The inside is the forbidden area bit parameter NO 11 0 0 S N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30120 J10 K15 Setting point A 50 40 30 and point B E 20 10 15 for the tool forbidden area E N2 G01 X30 Y30 Z20 Linear interpolation to 30 30 20 Cd N3 G13 Cancelling stored strok
90. it is specified by arguments the values will be assigned to the corresponding local variables Note 1 If the subprogram number specified by address P is not retrieved an alarm PS 078 will be issued Note 2 No 90000 99999 subprograms are the system reserved programs if such subprograms are called they can be executed but the cursor will keep staying at block N65 and the program page displays the main program all the time The subprogram can be displayed by setting bit parameter No 2724 Note 3 The macro program cannot be called in DNC mode 4 7 4 Custom macro function A e ag p e e UG ka e z ya 1 Format G65 Hm P i Q j RZk m 01 99 indicate functions of operation instruction or transfer instruction i Variable name for saving the operation result 4j Variable name 1 for operation or a constant which is expressed directly without 4k Variable name 2 for operation or a constant Significance i j o k L Operation sign specified by Hm Example P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 P 100 Q 101 R15 _ 100 101 o 15 P 100 Q 100 R 102 100 100 o 102 H code specified by G65 has no effect on the offset selection Table 4 7 4 1 Definition Hor Value assignment A Hos Subtraction s 4 5 Ho Hos H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 21 22 23 G65 G65 Iti G65 G65 Multiplication x k G65 ELE G65 iti G65 G65 G
91. its operation 5 2 4 Subprogram calling M98 M98 is used to call a subprogram in a main program Its format is as follows 151 e ag p a e yo m e z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual M98 PULIDO III BE be ail Number of called times Subprogram number Fig 5 2 4 1 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 1 In auto mode if M99 is executed at the end of the main program the control returns to the program beginning to continue automatic operation Meanwhile the following blocks are not to be executed and the number of the machined workpieces is not accumulated 2 If M99 is executed at the end of a subprogram the control returns to the main program and proceeds to the next block following the subprogram block 3 In DNC mode M99 is processes as M30 thus the cursor keeps staying at the end of the program e ag p e e UG ka e z ya 152 Chapter 6 Spindle Functions G Codes CHAPTER6 SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODES By using an S code and the numerical values behind it the code signal can be converted to the analog signal and then sent to the machine for controlling the machine spindle S is a modal value 6 1 Spindle analog control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 0 the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage which is specified by address S and the numerical values behind See OPERATION in
92. key ES pressed the system enters the reset state 1 All axes movement stops 2 The M functions are ineffective 3 Whether the G codes are saved after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 35 1 NO 35 7 and NO 36 0 NO 36 7 Whether F H D codes are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 34 7 In MDI mode whether the edited program is deleted after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 28 7 6 Whether the relative coordinates are cancelled after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 1023 7 n non Edit mode whether the cursor returns to the beginning of the program after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 10 7 8 Whether macro local variables 1 50 are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 52 7 9 Whether macro common variables 100 199 are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 52 6 10 Resetting can be used during abnormal system output and coordinate axis action as e e N e t p e 2 3 2 Emergency stop If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during machine running the system enters into emergency state and the machine movement is stopped immediately Release the button usually rotate the button towards left to exit the state Note 1 Confirm the faults have been removed before releasing the Emergency Stop button Note 2 Perform Reference Point Return again after releasing the Emergency Stop
93. manual operations RRRRRRRARRRARRRARRARRARSANERAARASRRRARARRRRRRRRARARRRRRRAARARRARRARRRARARARRRRRRASARRRRANARRRRAR ARRA 233 4 3 1 Coolant control M eee 233 4 3 2 Lubricant control ccc eM MMMMMMMMMMMMeeeeeeeeeeBBMB BBeeeeReeeeeeeeIBBBBReeeeMmmeI IIee eeemmmIenHmI 233 4 3 3 Chip removal control enee 233 4 3 4 Working light control HIM III 234 CHAPTER 5 STEP OPERATION enne nnne nnn nnn 235 5 1 Step feed RERARRARRARRRARRARARRARRARRRRRARARARARRRRARRRAASRARARARARRRRARARARRARRRARAARRRRRRAARRRARARRRRERRRAARARRRARRRRRRARRARAAARRRRRAAMS 235 5 1 1 Selection of moving amount eee M MI III III 235 5 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction eene 235 5 1 3 Step feed explanation idea osa Eu apos a s Ee EEN ENEE ROLL GR OR UR ayes RU x ON RO QD D RD ER nes 236 5 2 Step interruption A E a E E rer ere rere ree 236 5 3 Auxiliary control in Step mode Hee 236 CHAPTER 6 MPG OPERATION nnne nennen nnn nnne nnn 237 6 1 MPG feed RRRRRRRARYRRARRRRNARASNARERRRNANEZAREESNEANRANRERAREARRARRSERRRNARRHRARERARRAZRRRRRRRRENASAAERARRREASAERRSRRARNRRRRARREARRR eee 237 6 1 1 Moving amount selection ee 237 6 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction MBs 237 6 1 3 MPG feed explanation E 238 6 2 Control In MPG interruption VERRRRRRRAARRARRRARRANRARARRRNARRRARSRRRARARARSRRRARARARRRARARRARRRARRRRARARAARARRRRRRAARRRRRRRARAR 238 6 2 1 MPG interruption operation Kerger EC 238 6 2 2 Relationship between MPG interruption and other functions 88 239 6 3 Auxiliary control in MPG mode Hee 240
94. mode during tool radius compensation corner offset circular interpolation can be specified The radius of the corner offset equals the offset value Whether the corner arc is valid or not is determined by bit parameter NO 4155 Explanation 1 When G39 is specified corner circular interpolation of which the radius equals offset value can be performed 2 G41 or G42 preceding this instruction determines whether the arc is CW or CCW G39 is a non modal G code 3 When G39 is programmed the arc is formed at the corner so that the vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of the next block It is shown as follows In offset mode N1 X10 N2 G39 N3 Y 10 Block N1 Block N2 Tool center path Programmed path Offset vector Block N3 Y Fig 4 5 4 1 G39 126 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 5 5 Tool offset value and offset number input by program G10 Format G10L10P R Geometric offset value of H code G10L12P R Geometric offset value of D code G10 L11P R Wear offset value of H code G10L13P R Wear offset value of D code P Tool offset number R Tooloffset value in absolute mode G90 Value to be added to the value of the specified offset number in incremental mode G91 the sum is the tool offset value Explanation The range of tool offset value Geometric offset metric input 999 999mm 999 999mm inch input 99 9998inch 9
95. of it is that if a functional word is set it is unnecessary to input it again in the following blocks which use the same function Example GO X100 Y100 Rapid positioning to X100 Y 100 X20 Y30 Rapid positioning to X20 Y30 the modal GO can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 Linear interpolation to X50 Y50 at a federate of 300mm min G0 G1 X100 Linear interpolation to X100 Y50 at a federate of 300mm min the modal G1 Y50 and F300 can be omitted GO XO YO Rapid positioning to XO YO The initialized state is the default state after the system Power On See table 4 1 2 Example O00001 X100 Y100 Rapid positioning to X100 Y100 GO is the initialized state G1 X0 YO F100 Linear interpolation to XO YO feed per minute feedrate 100mm min Non modal indicates that the address value is effective only in the block using it If it is used in the following blocks it must be specified again E g the functional instructions of group 00 shown in table 4 1 2 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual See table 3 4 1 for the modal and non modal description for the function word Table 3 4 1 Modal and non modal of functional instructions A group of G functions that can cancel each other Modal G Once executed these functions keep effective until function they are cancelled by the other G functions in the Modal same group Modal M A group of M functions that can cancel each other
96. one F Cutting feedrate G84 G98 G84 G99 Initial level Point R level Point R spindle CW Spindle CW P P Spindle CC P Point Z P PointZ Fig 4 4 11 1 Taping is performed by rotating the spindle counterclockwise When the bottom of the hole is reached the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction for retraction This operation creates threads Feedrate override and spindle override are ignored during tapping A feed hold does not stop the machine until the return operation is finished Before specifying G84 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If the spindle CCW rotation is not specified the system will adjust the rotation to the CCW rotation automatically in R level by the current specified spindle speed If G84 and M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the first hole not for the other holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by number parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes e
97. origins of these workpiece coordinate systems can be specified by inputting the coordinate offset in MDI mode or by setting data parameters P15 P43 These 6 workpiece coordinate systems are set up by the distances from machine zero to their respective coordinate system origins 37 e g p e e UG ka e z z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual X Z Workpiece zero offset Machine zero Fig 4 2 8 2 Example N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 Y20 N20 G56 X80 5 Z25 5 In the above example when block N10 is executed the tool traverses rapidly to the position in workpiece coordinate system G55 X 100 Y 20 When block N20 is executed the tool traverses rapidly to the position in workpiece coordinate system G56 and the absolute coordinates shifts to the coordinates X 80 5 Z 25 5 in workpiece coordinate system G55 automatically 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system Another 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used besides the 6 workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 Format G54 Pn Pn A code to specify the additional coordinate system with a range of 1 50 The setting and restrictions of the additional workpiece coordinate system are the same as those of workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 G10 can be used to set the offset value of the workpiece zero in the additional workpiece system as shown below By instruction G10
98. oyatem parameter number 01 0 SCBM ZCL RLC MSL RCUR MSL RLC ZCL SCBM 1 Check the stroke before moving 0 Not check the stroke before moving 1 To cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point return 0 Not cancel relative coordinate system when performing manual reference point return 1 To cancel relative coordinate system after resetting 0 Not cancel relative coordinate system after resetting 1 Start from the line where cursor locates on cycle start of multi section MDI 0 Start from the first line on cycle start of multi section MDI 281 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual RCUR 1 Cursor returns to the starting position in non edit mode after reset 0 Cursor not returns to the starting position in non edit mode after reset Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 1 1 BFA LZR OUT2 OUT2 1 Outer area entry of the 2 stroke is unallowed 0 Inner area entry of the 2 stroke is unallowed LZR 1 To perform travel check before manual reference return after power on 0 Not perform travel check before manual reference return after power on BFA 1 To make alarm after overtravel when overtravel instruction is given 0 To make alarm before overtravel when overtravel instruction is given system alarm range is 5MM in front of borders of forbidding area Standa
99. pro acceleration deceleration parameter is set to O RRE RRE el oneone el ms name repeated pase modit parameter NOITE 0251 Emergency stop aarm perom zero return again afer canoeing te aarm 0252 Program ends illegally CNC transmission speed is low please reduce feedrate Due LEET again after reset 0262 DSPismisateiPeaepoweronapis wm DSP paramers oro wm DSPawmDwastobg 0265 DSP alarm The bus can not be connected orbusinitalizaton failure 0266 Speed of DSP interpolation axis exceeds 200M MIN Perform zero return again after reset 0267 DSP initial sign 5555 is abnormal Perform zero return again after reset fd 0268 DSP pulse output volume per revolution is too big Perform zero return again after reset 0269 DSP internal alarm Perform zero return again after reset 0270 Length of DSP equally distributed interpolation point is too small 0271 DSP received interpolation data is too small Perform zero return again after reset 0272 DSP received undistinguishable G code a 0273 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal instructions Kl 0274 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal data Ko 0275 In high speed mode interpolation multiple is O Ld 323 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0280 Perform axes zero return before using tool setting function oF 0281 Switch to SET Halving interface before using tool setting
100. program beginning and MO2 can be set by bit parameter NO 33 2 to return to the program beginning If M99 is executed in a program the control returns to the beginning of the program and then executes the program repeatedly if M99 MO2 or M30 is at the end of the subprogram the control returns to the program that calls the subprogram and goes on executing the following blocks e ag p a e yo m e z ya e g p e e UG ka e z z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTER3 PROGRAMMING BASICS 3 1 Controlled axis Table 3 1 1 GSK218MC Basic controlled axes 4axes X Y Z ATH Extended controlled axes total 3 2 Axis name The names of the four basic axes are X Y Z and A by default The number of the controlled axes is set by data parameter P005 and the name of each additional axis such as A B and C is set by P175 P179 Note If two or more axis names are the same the system initializes them to X Y Z A and B automatically 3 3 Coordinate system 3 3 1 Machine tool coordinate system A special point on a machine used as machine benchmark is called machine zero which is set by the machine tool builder The coordinate system with machine zero point set as its origin is called the machine coordinate system It is set up by manual machine zero return after the power is turned on Once set it rem
101. specified axis The difference between assumed tool length usually the 1st tool and actual tool length used is saved into the offset memory tools of different length thus can be used to machine the workpiece only by changing the tool length offset values instead of the program G43 and G44 specify the different offset directions and H code specifies the offset number 1 Offset direction G43 Positive offset frequently used G44 Negative offset Either for absolute instruction or incremental instruction when G43 is specified the offset value stored in offset memory specified with the H code is added to the coordinates of the moving end point specified by an instruction in the program When G44 is specified the offset value specified by H code is subtracted from the coordinates of the end position and the resulting value obtained is taken as the final coordinates of the end position G43 G44 are modal G codes which are effective till another G code belonging to the same group is used 2 Specification of offset value The length offset number is specified by H code The offset value assigned to the offset number is added to or subtracted from the moving instruction value of Z axis which obtains the new instruction value of Z axis H00 H256 can be specified as the offset number as required The range of the offset value is as follows 100 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Table 4 5 1 1 pe NN Offset value E in
102. systems can be used besides the 6 standard workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 coordinate systems as is shown in fig 3 4 2 2 Each 198 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting coordinate system can be viewed or modified by page keys See section 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system in PROGRAMMING for details about its operation c58 G59 MACHINE X d m X d m X d m Y d m Y d m Y ni Z 000 mm Z d m Z d m EXT G54 P 1 G54 P902 X us X 80 000 m E d n Y o rn Y d us Y d s Z d m Z d m Z m INPUT 10 5 34 PATH 1 EH soc INPUT INPUT RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 2 There are two ways to input coordinates 1 After entering this page in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system to be altered e e zn N e t E e INPUT Press the axis name to be assigned and then press key Ei for confirmation then the values in the current machine coordinate system will be set as the origin of the G coordinate system e g by INPUT pressing X and then key or pressing XO and then key E the X machine coordinate of this point is input automatically by the system In addition e g if X10 or X 10 is input and then key is pressed the X machine coordinate is 10 or 10 2 After entering this page in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate axis to be altered input the machine coordinates of the ori
103. the ones of previous GSK 218M and GSK 218MA With the adoption of the high speed spline interpolation algorithm its control precision and dynamic performance have been improved significantly The installation structure of the product is divided into three types inclulding standard integrated type horizontal type and vertical type Both the standard integrated type and GSK 218MC V vertical type CNC systems adopt a 10 4 inch BI AE e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual color LCD while the GSK 218MC H horizontal CNC system adopts a 8 4 inch color LCD moreover the product is easy to operate by using a friendly and beautiful man machine interface Therefore it is applicable to the CNC application for the machines in automation field such as milling machines carving and milling machines machining centers grinding machines and gear hobing machines Product features Excellent high speed interpolation function used for complicated curved face machining Effective machining speed 8m min optimum machining speed 4m min Up to 1000 interpolation pre processing blocks making the machining precision and workpiece surface smoothness much higher Maximum positioning speed 30m min can be extended to 60m min maximum feed speed 15m min Display resolution 800x600 with a more beautiful and delicate interface With RS232 and USB interfaces data transmission DNC machining and USB on line ma
104. then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4870 is set to 1 and G83 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G83 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 11 Right hand taping cycle G84 Format G84 A Y Z R PF Function This cycle performs taping The spindle is rotated in the reverse direction when the bottom of the hole is reached in this taping cycle Explanation 79 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e g p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Minimum Dwell time at the hole bottom The absolute value is used if it is a negative
105. these signals to turn on off these functions Usually only one M code can be specified in a block In some cases up to three M codes can be specified in a block by setting bit parameter No 33 7 Some M codes cannot be specified simultaneously because of the restrictions of the mechanical operation See the machine manual provided by the tool builder for the mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification for M codes in one block 5 1 M codes controlled by PLC If an M code controlled by PLC is in the same block with a move instruction they are executed simultaneously e ag p a e yo m e z ya 5 1 1 CCW CW rotation instructions M03 M04 Instruction M03 M04 Sxxx Explanation Viewed from the negative direction to the positive direction along Z axis that the spindle is rotated counterclockwise CCW is defined as CCW rotation vice versa that the spindle is rotated clockwise CW is defined as CW rotation The direction of moving forward to the workpiece by the right hand thread is defined as the positive direction and the direction of departing from the workpiece by the right hand thread is defined as the negative direction ox x x specifies the spindle speed or the current gear in gear control mode Unit revolution per minute r min When it is controlled by a frequency converter Sx x x specifies the actual speed e g S1000 specifies the spindle to rotate at a speed of 1000r min
106. tool is replaced by another tool and the length of the tool is measured the obtained length difference between current tool and reference tool is set to the position specified by measured value write mode 200 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting opindle end face X and Y position of tool setting gauge Estimated tool length L n E duct E cle c E Z axis machine Tool setting start position of Z axis Zero Q 5mm ib Z axis lowest safe machine position Fig 3 4 2 2 2 B Z axis workpiece origin setting After finishing the tool length measurement it is required to move the tool to the workpiece surface Here press soft key MEASURE to set the current machine coordinates as the origin to the selected workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 e e zn N e t E e II Operation After system power on firstly perform machine zero return operation before the automatic tool length measurement See Section 9 2 Operation procedure for machine zero return in BOOK 2 OPERATION for details Turn on the parameter switch set bit parameter NO 126 to 1 tool setting gauge installed set bit parameter NO 1 7 to 1 reference point memory bit parameter NO 2 5 sets whether the tool measured value can be written to reference offset and bit parameter NO 2726 1 sets the skip signal SKIP 0 1 1 0 is input as
107. v O Z lt e V i n T oD D LL O Eam o 2 o o O Q O Z O O 2 G signal page Q H Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q o o o 6012 0 1 H 00000 0 0 6015 00020801 00020 0 Gu 6013 6014 Gu G003 GA GO005 1 H H Q H H H H H Q H Q H HH HH HH 0 0 EISEN G016 6017 Lee akl al H 0 Q H 0 0 GOOG G007 6018 H 1 H 1 H Q G019 1 G020 G88 Gud G010 1 H H H G022 o 00000 H 01010000 G023 H 6011 DATA o rm BEE em imm m Fig 3 6 1 2 This is the signal sent to CNC system by PLC See GSK218MC CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number 3 X signal page Press soft key X SIGNAL in DIAGNOSIS page to enter diagnosis MT PLC page as is shown in fig 3 6 1 3 215 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual p WOISXT g H H H Q H H H H Q H H H Cu e C gt lt X013 00201200 0 H X001 x002 1101180801909 X014 X015 000202011 H H o0 0 H 1 X003 H X016 X017 1 H H H erst H X004 X005 X006 X007 00000
108. vector has been created correctly The offset vector points towards or is apart from the arc center from the start point or the end point 105 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual New vector New vector X Y X Y Tool center path Tool center path R Programmed path EN V Start point Old vector ee a Start point Programmed path Fig 4 5 2 3 Tool radius compensation right G42 In contrast with G41 G42 specifies the tool to deviate at the right side of the workpiece along the tool advancing direction i e the vector direction obtained in G42 is reverse to the vector direction obtained in G41 Except for the direction the deviation of G42 is identical with that of G41 e g p e e UG ka e z z ya 1 In G00 G01 mode G42X_ Y D G42X Y Programmed path Mew yectot Start point Q Tool center path Fig 4 5 2 4 2 In G02 G03 mode XY X Y New vector Programmed path New vector Programmed path Start point Tool center path Start point P Tool center path Old vector Fig 4 5 2 5 6 Precautions on offset A Offset number specification 106 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code G41 G42 and G40 are modal instructions The offset number can be specified by D code anywhere before the offset cancel mode is switched to the tool radius compens
109. version number 0 Do not read and display PLC software version number Standard setting 0000 0001 oystem parameter number 0 54 OPRG 1 Debugging and above authorithies one key input output is effective for workpiece program 0 Debugging and above authorities one key input output is ineffective for workpiece program Standard setting 0000 0011 OPRG Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List oystem parameter number 0 55 CANT CANT 1 Automatic clearing for single piece 0 Not automatic clearing for single piece Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 56 HNGD HISR HPF HPF 1 To select full running for MPG moving 0 Not select full running for MPG moving HISR 1 Use MPG step pause function 0 Not use MPG step pause function HNGD 1 Axes moving direction are identical with MPG rotation direction 0 Axes moving direction are not identical with MPG rotation direction Standard setting 0000 0001 system parameter number 0 58 ROVD ROVD 1 Band switch is used in rapid operation override debugging 0 Operation panel keys are used in rapid operation override debugging Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 59 LEDT LOPT RHPG RHPG 1 Use electronic handwheeel drive function 0 Not use electronic handwheeel dri
110. z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 156 by calculating the surface speed by a transient change of the tool position but is made by calculating the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the rapid traverse block on the condition that cutting is not performed during rapid traverse Therefore the constant surface cutting speed is not used Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code CHAPTER 7 FEED FUNCTION F CODE The feed functions are used to control the feedrate of the tool The functions and control modes are as follows 7 1 Rapid traverse GOO instruction is used for rapid positioning The traverse speed is set by data parameters P88 P92 An override can be applied to the traverse speed by the OVERRIDE adjusting keys on the operator panel which are shown as follows 9 e e VFO W25 N50 W00 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 E x p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Fig 7 1 1 Keys for rapid traverse override FO is set by data parameter P93 The acceleration of rapid positioning GO can be set by data parameters P105 123 It can be properly set depending on the machine and the motor response characteristics Note In a block containing GOO the feedrate instruction F is invalid even if it is specified The system performs positioning at the speed specified by GO instead T 2 Cutting feedrate The tool feedrates in linear interpolation G01 an
111. 0 999 0000 0389 Z axis positioning value for tool setting machine on G53 313 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 999 0000 999 0000 0393 Estimated length from tool nose to tool holder 50 Setting range 0 0000 999 0000 0395 Offset value of last toolsetting Setting range 999 0000 999 0000 0396 X axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 0 0 0397 Y axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 0 0 0398 Z axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 0 0 0399 Multiple of interpolation step length 1 Setting range 1 0000 10 0000 0400 Shape matching parameter 1 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 Shape matching parameter 400 is to control error in a permissible range through shape error analyzing and shape optimization based on initial spline curve The bigger the parameter is the bigger the shape error will be and vice versa 0401 Shape matching limit 1 Setting range 1 0000 999 000 When shape matching limit parameter 401 is performing velocity matching calculation the parameter will prevent shape error increasing caused by curvature optimization 0402 Velocity matching parameter Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 Velocity matching parameter 402 is to smooth velocity by optimizing curvature in which curvature is radially distributed along normal direction of each point on the curve T
112. 0 1000 mm min Maximum control speed in rapid positioning for all 8000 axes nge 300 30000 mm min Maximum control speed in non forecast mode Minimum control speed in rapid positioning for all axes nge 0 300 mm min Minimum control speed in non forecast mode 299 Cr i Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0096 Maximum control speed in cutting feed for all axes 6000 Setting range 300 9999 mm min 0097 Minimum control speed in cutting feed for all axes Setting range 0 300 mm min 0098 Feedrate of manual continuous feed for axes JOG 2000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0099 opeed FL of reference return for all axes 40 Setting range 1 60 mm min 0100 X axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0101 Y axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0102 Z axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0103 4TH axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0105 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid X axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0106 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid Y axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0107 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid Z axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0108 L type time constant of pre acceler
113. 0 000 A AG fj fj d VU d VU J YUE d UUP d VUY UU d OOP 4 idk i A ADU d UOP d VUY 6 d Ut d dd fjlhilt d BOE 0 BYE A AAG d HUY d UUE d MU d BUY WY UU WU YE e J ld WU WU e d YY UY d UU UY WU UU i d YOY OY AG Og OOmm Dan OOmm INPUT fd 10 49 10 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 1 1 1 Press soft key E 3 3 1 1 2 JOFFSET in the above figure to enter offset operation subpage See fig oo 003 004 e 0 000 205 o 006 e 007 o oos CG g N e T E e X 62 273mm Y 47 897mm Z 9 488mm INPUT E EE PATH 1 i 15 35 ANS NE Fig 3 3 1 1 2 The offset value can be input directly or added to or subtracted from the actual position value GEOM H stands for tool length compensation WEAR H for tool length abrasion GEOM D stands for tool radius compensation and WEAR D for tool radius abrasion 3 3 2 2 Modification and setting for offset value The steps for setting tool offset in Offset page are as follows 1 Press soft key EHOFFSET to enter offset display page 2 Move the cursor to the target offset number otep 1 Press page keys to display the page where the offset value is to be modified move the cursor by pressing cursor keys to the offset number to be modified SEARCH otep 2 Press key to search after inputting the offset number 192 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data
114. 0 0 o H HH H H H X018 X019 00000 0 00020111 X008 H 000200800 H H 0 0 Q Q Q 1 i H X020 H H X021 H H HM H 86 0 H X009 X010 X011 H x022 000202020200 xo23 17 04 18 PATH 1 L F mrema RES Gc wee DATA Fig 3 6 1 3 This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system See GSK218MC CNC System Connection and 1 O an NY aD n Cc O J o oleole e e leie A ci mc o e leie LU D GA Gies Q O E a e ele 9 e leie yn e ele AQ un O V S c sg CO 77 elele DD ra ME O T oZ 9s e B o ele EE Cc st ke Oo gt 9e o Q i x ele O l c O eo ele o 985 Se P c C C cos ele D ce gt gt o A E 09 Be e o0 5 o Hi OU s cT oc Ei o 7 S o O0 lt O A Book 2 Operation H H H o 0 H 1 H H H o H Q 008002811 1 e H Q H Q o YO19 02 MEN SEI YO17 018 YO16 Y wo a e gt Y H H H H HHH o H H H H HHH H H H HHH ji H H H H H H HHH H 08866686 nu oo H H H H HHH H H H H H H H H v o 0 0 0 0 o 0 Le 6 YOO7 YO 003 004 005 Du 08 Vu YO10 YO11 Y Y Y Y 17 04 29 PATH 1 MEL S un LLLA DATA Fig 3 6 1 4 This is the signal sent to CNC system by PLC See GSK218MC CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setti
115. 0 m H T G64 Q H G97 SPRM 06000 E D G13 SMAX 100000 DATA Il D I 09 42 PATH 1 peg me e EM c Fig 3 2 4 4 Program CUR NXT display Press soft key CUR NXT to enter current next page It displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the blocks to be executed See Fig 3 2 5 189 Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CG g N e T E e 190 T a Ao e JI 09 09 58 PATH 1 NN Sy o w m omo R ol Fig 3 2 5 5 Program DIR display I Press soft key DIR to enter program DIR page the contents of which are displayed as follows Fig 3 2 6 a PRG USED The saved programs including subprograms maximum number of the programs that can be saved b MEM USED The capacity occupied by the saved programs the remaining capacity for program storage c PROGRAM DIR The sequence numbers of the saved programs are displayed in sequence d Previewing the program where the cursor is located 15 400 1504 58368 K 0700 9587B 11 07 45 16 0 B 07700 344B 11 7 5 16 2 07708 12665B 11 07 05 16 02 7999 981364B 11 07 06 11 14 1 91000 111B 11 0 11 15 288 a 0879383 B3exavaz a Ni e G G38 X74 295 Y 58 N186 Z58M351500M6 N18B8Ze 33 N126Xx75 425 46 551Z aea N188 X75 472 46 356 Z 831 N188 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 436 EEN EE EE 16 51 46 PATH 1
116. 00 When only scaling function is applied 1 Cutting program 100 0 100 200 300 400 Fig 4 2 15 3 49 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Erde tes Example 3 Repetition of G68 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual By program main program G92 X0 YO Z20 G69 G17 M3 1000 GO Z2 G42 D01 M98 P2100 P02100 M98 P2200L7 G40 GO G90 Z20 X0YO M30 Subprogram 2200 O2200 G91 G68 X0 YO R45 0 G90 M98 P2100 M99 Subprogram 2100 02100 G90 GO XO Y 20 G01Z 2 F200 X8 284 X14 142 Y 14 142 M99 50 A 3 8 284 20 AN Subprogram tool offset setting subprogram call call 7 times relative rotation angle subprogram O2200 calls subprogram O2100 right hand tool compensation setup Programmed path a g p When offset is applied 14 142 14 142 N Fig 4 2 15 4 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 2 16 Skip function G31 Format G31X Y Z Function Linear interpolation can be specified after G31 in the same way as after G01 During the execution of this instruction if an external skip signal is input the execution of the instruction is interrupted and the next block is executed When the machining end point is not programmed but it is specified using a signal from the machine use the skip function For example use it for grinding The function is use
117. 047 to 10 29 0 and 10 29 to NEN 1047 0112 Zero including tan900 is specified as a divisor E 0113 Unusable functional instruction is specified in user macro program Modify d the program 0114 G39 format error Modify the program EE 0115 Variable value can not be specified O N can not be specified as variables in user macro program A variable is on the left of the assignment statement while value assignment 0116 DE to it is not allowed Modify the program 0117 G10 online modification is not supported by this parameter Please modify NEN the program 0118 Nest exceeds the upper limit 5 Modify the program WE 0119 Instructions M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 MO6 can not in a same block with other M instructions Part of setting is restored 0121 Machine coordinates and encoder feedback values exceed setting value of EN error 0122 Called nests of macro program exceed 5 layers Modify the program EN 0123 Macro program is used in DNC operation Modify the program Oo Program end illegally without M30 M02 M99 or end sign Modify the m program 0125 Macro program format error Modify the program i ai Program syal fature Modi tne program 0127 NC coexists with user macro instruction statement Modiy the program oe e e NN number is not found Modify the program 0120 The address The address of argument assignment Modify the program STOLE assignment The address of argument assignment Modify the program the progra
118. 1 MO2 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Note 2 When the bit parameter NO 432 1 0 no alarm will be issued if there is no cut in value specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 At this moment if the instruction parameter Q is not specified or it is O the system performs the hole positioning in XY plane but it does not perform the drilling operation When the bit parameter NO 43 1 1 an alarm will be issued if no cut in value is specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 i e an alarm 0045 Address Q not found or set to 0 G73 G83 occurs when the instruction parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 If the Q value is negative the system uses its absolute value to perform intermittent feeding Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Example M3 2000 opindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G83 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q15 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3
119. 1 l Fine milling circle radius ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Distance from fine milling start point to circle center ranging from 0 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is 0 by default The tool diameter value is obtained by the given number K Number of repeats Cycle process D Rapid positioning to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to point R level 3 Feed to the machining start point at hole bottom 4 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 5 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by inner arc path of finish milling 6 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to instruction G98 or G99 Instruction path G24 CCW fine milling cycle within a full circle G25 CW fine milling cycle with a full circle Y Y EE EES Inner circle border Tool center path Tool center path Fig 4 4 2 1 65 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note The NO 1221 should be set to 1 when this instruction is used Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled as follows by
120. 18 11 07 11 15 32 PARAMETER OCUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO VAR OMACRO PRG OPART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE 10 59 06 DATA LE PATH 1 Lee em NES 1 Fig 3 4 3 1 Operation 1 Set the password for a corresponding level in password page pressing soft key PASSWORD The corresponding password levels of the data are shown as follows 208 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting Table 3 4 3 2 Ladder PLC parameter Password for machine tool builder level password for PLC All parameters system manufacturer level Password for machine tool builder level password for system manufacturer level password for system debugging level oystem parameters pitch offset values Password for machine tool builder level password for Custom macro system manufacturer level password for system debugging level password for end user level Tool offset values system No password required during data output input macro variables CNC part The password for end user level or above is required programs during one key output one key input 2 Press soft key EIDATA twice to enter the DATA DEAL page as is shown below CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 3 FILE DIR LADDER PLC odder arp 153118 11 07 11 15 29 LADDER A GRP 155718 11 87 11 15 26 PARA PLC ladder 1 bak 158118 11 87 11 15 32 PARAMETER OCUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO VAR OMACRO PRG OPART PRGR
121. 18MC deceleration and zero signals at the same time GSK218MC series machine zero return Type B Fig 9 1 2 CG e ag N e x t E c 9 2 Steps for machine zero return gt e MACHINE 1 Press 0 to enter Machine Zero Return mode then machine zero return will be displayed at the lower right corner of the LCD screen 2 Select axis X Y or Z for machine zero return the direction of which is set by bit parameter No 7 3 N0 7 5 3 When it moves towards the machine zero the machine traverses rapidly traverse speed set by data parameter No 100 No 103 before the deceleration point is reached After the deceleration switch is touched it moves to the machine zero point i e reference point at a speed of FL set by data parameter P99 As the machine zero is reached the coordinate axis movement stops and the Machine Zero indicator lights up 9 3 Steps for machine zero return using instructions The zero return specified by G28 is available after bit parameter NO 4323 is set to O Since it detects the stroke tongue this instruction is equivalent to manual machine zero Note 1 If no machine zero is fixed on your CNC machine do not perform the machine zero return operation Note 2 The indicator of the corresponding axis lights up when the machine zero return is finished Note 3 The indicator goes out when the axis is moved out from the machine zero by the operator Note 4 Refer to the machine
122. 4 5 3 1 Sign of offset value G code Left offset Right offset Right offset Left offset In a special case the offset direction can be changed in offset mode However the direction change is unavailable in the start up block and the block following it There is no such concepts as inner and outer side when the offset direction is changed The following offset value is assumed to be positive 115 ES e ag kel a e yo e ch 3 ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual i Linear Linear S ii Linear Circular ez L C f S Pe gt i ES Programmed path T G41 G41 roast PY Gn Programmed path wk Tool center path iii Circular Linear iv Circular Circular Tool center path 342 Tool center path d e es ag p a e UG ka e z ya Programmed path Programmed path Fig 4 5 3 6 v When the tool compensation is executed normally without an intersection When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if the intersection of the offset path is not required the vector normal to block B is created at the start point 1 Linear Linear L Single block B G41 Single block A PA G42 7 Programmed G42 path Tool center L path L Compensation vector Fig 4 5 3 7 2 Linear Circular aay G42 Too
123. 4 Retraction or spacing amount in peck tapping cycle Setting range 0 100 mm 0286 Tooth number of spindle side gear 1 gear Setting range 1 999 2000 6000 1024 0 5000 400 0000 0 0010 1 5000 2 0000 2 0000 250 9999 1 0000 309 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0287 Tooth number of spindle side gear 2 gear Setting range 1 999 0288 Tooth number of spindle side gear 3 gear Setting range 1 999 0290 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0291 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 2 gear Setting range 1 999 0292 Tooth number of position encoder side gear 3 gear Setting range 1 999 0294 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 1 gear 6000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping GT gear 6000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 3 gear 6000 Setting range 0 9999 r min 0298 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 200 spindle and tapping axis 15 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0299 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 200 spindle and tapping axis 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0300 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of 200 spindle and tapping axis Ei gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0302 Time constant of spindle and tap
124. 48 551 Z 428 N188 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 131 N138 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z a33 Nise Y 48 811 N134 X75 472 Y 47 676 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 ABSOLUTE X 1 727 m Y 47 897 mm 9 480 m P START T STOP jm uu m G PARA SWITCH START STOP ERASE Fig 3 5 2 The machining path of the program being executed can be monitored in graphic page J A Press soft key START or key to enter the DRAW START mode then sign is placed in front of S START E K B Press STOP soft key or key moved ahead of T STOP C Press softkey SWITCH to switch the graph display among coordinates corresponding to 0 5 DELETE D Press soft key ERASE or key to erase the graph drawn 3 6 Diagnosis display to enter the DRAW STOP mode then sign is CG e ag N e x t E e The state of DI DO signals between CNC and machine the signals transferred between CNC and PLC PLC internal data and CNC internal state etc are displayed in the diagnosis page Refer to GSK218MC CNC System Connection and PLC Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number The diagnosis of this part is used to detect the running states of the CNC interface signals and internal signals rather than modifying the states 3 6 1 Diagnosis data display DIAGNOSIS Press key as to enter the Diagnose page which consists of 5 subpages F SIGNAL GSIGNAL X SIG
125. 5 1 13 Auto tool change SIART END M50 M51 e 150 5 1 14 Tool judging after tool change M53 eege Ee 150 5 1 15 Tool judging on the spindle M55 EE 151 52 Mcodes used by control program EE 151 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 M02 EE 151 5 2 2 Program dwell MOO Pica TuS tua IM EE EE EE 151 5 2 3 Program optional stop MO1 E EC rr P rn E 151 524 Subprogram calling M98 se dise esa ed aaa Sond RUN RU nd UR ene RD CA OR EQ Ko eee fend are ose AUR inte QR Ros LR wags wena ne a 151 5 2 5 Program end and return M99 EEN i cale xad ERR acea ePi baa e ER Rc ecd ea ec a RR UR Ca e RU ORE 152 CHAPTER 6 SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODES eres 153 6 1 Spindle analog control e 153 6 2 Spindle switch value control e 153 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 Faaa RERRRRRARRRRENARNARERRRRANRRARRRRRRRRRARRAREREARSARRARRRRRARRRRRRRRRE 153 CHAPTER7 FEED FUNCTION F CODE eeeeeeeeeeeeIIIIIIIIIIRIRIRHIIRIIH Mey 157 T 1 Rapid lr aVerse e Ie 157 T 2 Cutting feedrate VERRARRRRARRRARRRARNAARARRNARARARASRARRRAMRRARSRRRRARARERRRRARARRRSRRRRRAREREARARRARARRREARRRRARRRRRRNAARRRARRRAS 157 7 2 1 Feed per minute G94 GE EE EE END CER REM SENA etc KNEE Mad ex UEM BEE 158 7 2 2 Feed per revolution G95 E cune dE T redes Foo scdo EE deeg 158 1 3 Tangential speed control e HMM 159 14 Keys for feedrate elle HEET 159 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration SRRRRRRANRARSARRARAARRRARARRRARARARRRRRANEASARRRRANASASRRRRBARARASRRRRAARRRRRRARARARRRRRARE 159 1 6 Acce
126. 5818 i R S7 6 SH 2 KOOS e Faas 1 5812 n Ra87 7 ABBB 4 KOOS e FH 1 5812 M ROSS XBBB 6 KOOS e Fags 1 5818 1 ABBB ABBB 1 R SS 1 KOOS 2 FH 1 58013 KOG KH ABBB 2 ABBB 3 RaaB8 e KOOS e FH 1 58013 EIPPL CPAR PLCDGN EPLCTRA 220 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting CK K001 c c c t t eie eie olo eeler eeler oleole eeler ei Le fj t f O O O O O c c c t t f K 5 d Kos o o o o o o o o K007 KOOS K K010 K 11 ele ele ele ele ele ele ek eie c c ei c c Lea c ei fj i O LA O O O LA O LA c c O c i LA O c c ei c O O G S cC c ei c c 16 58 16 M A id PRAE 1 Fig 3 8 3 Fon FO01 Eau F004 F 5 FOO06 F007 FOS F 09 F010 F 11 fj L d fj c c c c L c c c O O O O O O S c f Gj d c e e e e Lea O c i cC c GC G Gc O e G HB LA Fos o cC e e c c c i G O c c O O O c c c e c i c c c cC c c ei O c c c c c MAC El 18 5881 FR 1 Fig 3 8 4 SAMPLING MODE TIME CYCLE SIGNAL TRANSITION RESOLUTION 8 8ms 1880ms TIME 819290 1888ms 81920ms STOP CONDITION NONE BUFFER FULL TRIGGER TRIGGER ADDRESS unknown MODE RISING EDGE FALLING EDGE BOTH EDGE SAMPL
127. 60 X120 Z80 120 100 80 150 130 110 36 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 5 The offset value of external workpiece zero or the one of workpiece zero can be modified by G10 which is shown as follows Using instruction G10 L2 Pp XYZ P 0 External workpiece zero offset value reference offset amount P 1to6 Workpiece zero offset values of workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 X YZ For absolute instruction G90 it is workpiece zero offset of each axis For incremental instruction G91 it is the offset to be added to the set workpiece zero of each axis the result of addition is the new workpiece zero Offset Using G10 each workpiece coordinate can be changed respectively ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya pda Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece ERROR system 2 system 3 system 4 G55 G56 G57 Workpiece system 5 G58 Machine Zero Workpiece coordinate system offset Workpiece system 6 G59 Machine reference point Fig 4 2 8 1 As shown in Fig 4 2 8 1 after power on the machine returns to machine zero by manual zero return The machine coordinate system is set up by the machine zero which thus generates the machine reference point and determines the workpiece coordinate system The corresponding values of offset data parameter P10 13 in workpiece coordinate system are the integral offset of the 6 workpiece coordinate systems The
128. 65 G65 G65 Logic multiplication Exclusive OR Hi j XOR k Ge H22 Absolute value Hi j 065 SS 665 665 ees Hi Logic addition OR si amp ORfK Ge 136 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Compound multiplication and i i x j k division operation Compound square Je pene IHE 665 ss Tangent i amp TAN MQ Lese Ha Aetngen ATANGBH Unconditional transfer ces HeT Condtiona transfer IFA ie GOTON iF ij gt k GOTON iF tj lt k GOTON iF tj gt k GOTON F j lt k GOTON Ges H89 Aam TC ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 2 Operation instruction 1 Variable assignment J G65 H01 PZI Q J e g G65 H01 P 101 Q1005 101 1005 G65 H01 P 101 Q 110 101 110 G65 H01 P 101 Q 102 101 102 2 Addition J K G65 H02 Pai Q J R K e g G65 H02 P 101 Q 102 R15 101 102 15 3 Subtraction J K G65 H03 P I Q J R K e g G65 H03 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 4 Multiplication 1 Jx K G65 H04 P I Q J RZK Ce g G65 HOA P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102x 103 5 Division 1 J K G65 H05 PAI Q J R K e g G65 H05 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 6 Logic addition CORO 1 J OR K G65 H11 P I QZJ R K Ce g G65 H11 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 OR 103 7 Logic multiplication AND 123 J AND
129. 8 58 OPARA PLC op 117 11 87 85 10 02 118 11 87 11 09 58 PARAMETER 0120 18 11 87 87 16 04 Bog 88 11 87 87 83 15 OCUTTER COMP p 81 11 07 09 09 52 O PITCH COMP ATAAF 333 11 07 08 13 53 i 9587 11 87 85 16 02 OMACRO VAR A7700 344 11 07 05 16 02 12665 11 87 85 16 02 O MACRO PRG j 581269 11 87 11 16 49 561364 PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 11 87 86 11 14 Fig 11 2 2 1 1 To copy CNC program files to U disk from the system disk gt a Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory b Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be copied in the system disk c Press soft key COPY then the systems prompts COPY TO USB DISC New Name as is shown in fig 11 2 2 2 270 08 54 24 oroo Chapter 11 System Communication CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 13 FILE DIR O LADDER PLC TT 18 11 87 84 11 18 OPARA PLC A 117 11 07 05 10 02 118 11 07 11 83 58 O PARAMETER o 18 11 87 87 16 04 020 88 11 87 87 88 15 OCUTTER COMP 81 11 87 89 83 52 OPITCH COMP ATAF 333 11 07 08 13 53 2780 3587 11 87 85 16 02 OMACRO VAR 07788 344 11 87 85 16 82 12665 11 87 85 16 82 MACRO PRG p 581269 11 07 11 16 49 581364 11 87 86 11 14 9 PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA Uu 08 54 55 copy TO USB DISK New Name PATH 1 CNC USB COPY DEL RETURN Fig 11 2 2 2 d If renaming for CNC program files is not requ
130. 9 9998inch Wear offset metric input 400 000mm 400 000mm inch input 40 0000inch 40 0000inch ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Note 1 For inch and metric conversion whether the tool offset value is converted automatically is set by bit parameter No 41 0 Note 2 The max value of the wear offset is restrained by data parameter P267 4 6 Feed G code 4 6 1 Feed mode G64 G61 G63 Format Exact stop mode G61 Taping mode G63 Cutting mode G64 Function Exact stop mode G61 Once specified this function keeps effective till G62 G63 or G64 is specified The tool is decelerated for an in position check at the end point of a block then next block is executed Tapping mode G63 Once specified this function keeps effective till G61 G62 or G64 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block but the next block is executed When G63 is specified both feedrate override and feed hold are invalid Cutting mode G64 Once specified this function keeps effective till G61 G62 or G63 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block and the next block is executed Explanation 1 No parameter format 2 G64 is the system default feed mode no deceleration is performed at the end point of a block and next block is executed directly 3 The purpose of in position check in exact stop mode is to check whether the servo motor has reached within a specified position range 4 n
131. 999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0035 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 o G58 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0036 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0037 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0038 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 5 G58 4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0040 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0041 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0042 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0043 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 6 G59 4TH 96 NO Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0045 X coordinate of the 1 reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0046 Ycoordinate of the 1 reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0047 Z coordinate of the 1 reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0048 4TH coordinate of the 1 reference point in machine coordi
132. 999 9999 ms Dwell time 1 99999 Subprogram number to be called 99999 9999 99999 9999 mm Cutting depth or hole bottom displacement in canned cycle H 01 99 Operator in G65 00 256 Length offset number D 00 256 Radius offset number Please note that the limits in table 2 1 3 1 are all for the CNC device but not for the machine tool Therefore users are required to refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder besides this one in order to get a good understanding of the programming limits before programming Note each word should not exceed 79 characters e ag p e e UG e z ya 2 2 General structure of a program The program is divided into main program and subprogram In general the CNC system is actuated by the main program If an instruction for calling the subprogram is executed in the main program the CNC system acts by the subprogram When an instruction for returning to the main program is executed in the subprogram the CNC system will return to the main program and execute the following blocks The program execution sequence is shown in Fig 2 2 1 Main program oubprogram Instruction 1 Instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 2 Calling subprogram Instruction N M99 Returning to main program Fig 2 2 1 The structure of a subprogram is the same as that of a main program Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Opera
133. 999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0078 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 98 NO Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0079 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0080 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0081 Positive Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0082 Setting ra 0083 Setting ra 0086 Setting ra 0087 Setting ra 0088 Setting ra 0089 Setting ra 0090 Setting ra 0091 Setting ra 0093 Setting ra 0094 Setting ra 0095 Setting ra Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 2 nge 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm Positive 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 nge 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm Dry run speed 5000 nge 0 9999 mm min Cutting federate at power on 300 nge 0 9999 mm min GO rapid traverse speed of X axis 5000 nge 0 30000 mm min GO rapid traverse speed of Y axis 5000 nge 0 30000 mm min GO rapid traverse speed of Z axis 5000 nge 0 30000 mm min GO rapid traverse speed of 4TH axis 5000 nge 0 30000 mm min FO rapid override of axis for all axes 30 nge
134. ARRARAWARRARRRARAMAS 178 2 5 1 Hardware overtravel protection EE 178 25 2 Software overtravel protection TM EA 179 25 3 Overtravel alarm release e MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM B eexeeeeeee 3eenee 179 2 6 Stroke Check e Mee 179 BI AE e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING e 183 3 1 Position display TTT STEET 183 3 1 1 Four types of position display NEE 183 3 1 2 Display of cut time part count programming speed override and actual speed 185 3 1 3 Relative coordinate clearing and halving Ee 186 3 2 Program display VARERRARAARRARRRAERNANAARERRSANARARSERRARARARASRRARRARRRARRARARARRARRRARARRARRRARARNRRRARRARRNARARARRRRSRRRARRRARAARA 187 3 3 System display SERRRARRNSAARRARRRRERARAEASSERERSARESARARRARARARRRRRRRRARARRRRARRAARRERRANRARRARRSARRSRRRERANNARERARRARARRSSHARARRARAR REA 191 3 3 1 Display modification and setting for offset eneen 191 3 3 2 Display modification and setting for parameters EE WEE EIER 193 3 3 3 Display modification and setting for macro variables m 194 3 3 4 Display modification and setting for screw pitch olfset teers 196 3 4 Setting display RRRARARRNRARRRRARARRERNRRARRRRWANERRARARNRRARRRRARRRRARRRRRARRRRRREARARARRNRRARRARARRWARERRRERRARRARRARRRRRNASRARRRAR REA 196 3 4 1 Setting RE 196 3 4 2 Workpiece coordinate setting eel E 198 3 4 3 Backup restoration and transmission for data Messe 208 3 4 4 Setting and modification for passwo
135. ATH 1 MDI p EN EE co EE t MN Fig 3 9 10 SYMBOL MEANING Y 19s EDIT indicator Y 1e 1 AUTO indicator Yale e INPUT indicator vales ZERO indicator Yale 4 SINGLE STEP indicator Y 12 5 MANUAL indicator Y O12 6 HANDWHEEL indicator Y 12 7 DNC indicator Y A13 0 Spindle reverse indicator Ya13s1 Spindle forward indicator Y 13 2 Spindle ovrd cancel indicator Y 13 3 X zero return indicator MRT Y zero return indicator Y 13 5 Z zero return indicator Sao d g PATH 1 MDI Fam ea xan co sa MM Fig 3 9 11 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting The PLC addresses signs meanings are described in this page and you may get the corresponding information here if you are unfamiliar with these addresses 8 CALCULA page In HELP page press soft key CALCULA to enter this page See fig 3 9 12 E IT a D Hu n M sqrt DATAT 17 20 09 a 2 Fig 3 9 12 The operation formats of addition subtraction multiplication division sine cosine extraction are shown in this page You can move the cursor to the blank space where the data is to be input then e e zn N e t E e INPUT input the data and press key E After the data is input the system will calculate automatically and output the result to the blank behind sign If the user needs to input data to calculate again press ke
136. Before the machine zero return The G92 floating coordinate system is often used for the alignment for temporary workpiece machining It is usually specified at the beginning of the program or in MDI mode before the program auto run 2 There are two methods to determine the floating coordinate system 1 Determining the coordinate system with tool nose e ag p e e UG s Z z z ya Fig 4 2 11 2 As shown in Fig 4 2 11 2 G92 X25 Z23 the tool nose position is taken as point X25 223 in the floating coordinate system 2 Taking a fixed point on the tool holder as the reference point of the coordinate system Reference point Fig 4 2 11 3 As Fig 4 2 11 3 shows specify the workpiece coordinate system by instruction G92 X600 Y1200 taking a certain reference point on the tool holder as the tool start point Taking a reference point on the tool holder as the start point if the tool moves by the absolute value instruction in the program the specified position to which the reference point is moved must adds the tool length compensation the value of which is the difference between reference point and tool nose 40 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Note 1 If G92 is used to set the coordinate system in the tool offset the coordinate system for tool length compensation is the one set by G92 before the tool offset is added Note 2 For tool radius compensation the tool offset is cancelled wit
137. C gt modes it is the distance to go 3 1 2 Display of cut time part count programming speed override and actual speed The programming speed actual speed feedrate and rapid override G codes tool offset part number cut time spindle override spindle speed tools etc can be displayed on the subpages REL and ABS of page POSITION see Fig 3 1 2 1 PRG SPEED FEED DVBHD 10095 SIA 2A EE T 4r agf a5 e aeo S 10095 580 58 78 op op 188 118 128 Eeer COMMAND T NO ou OFFSET H0000 DAGAA G00 G17 G90 G94 G21 G4a G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 613 CUT TIME 000 00 DATA 1 1 1 S 09 97 5e SE TT JPATH 1 E o 1 Fig 3 1 2 1 185 e g N e m t E CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual The meanings of them are as follows Speed The actual cutting speed overridden Programming speed Speed specified by F code Feedrate override Feed override selected by feedrate override keys Rapid override Rapid override selected by rapid override keys G codes The values of the G codes in the block being executed Tool offset HOOOO the tool length compensation for the current program DOOOO the tool radius compensation for the current program Part count When M30 or M02 is executed in Auto or DNC mode the
138. Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancelling the canned cycle and returning from point R level M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G35 G36 cannot be specified in the same block or G35 G36 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 4 4 6 Rectangle outside fine milling cycle G37 G38 Format G37 G98 G99 X Y Z R J L U D F MK G38 Function The tool performs fine milling outside the rectangle by the specified width and direction and then returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G37 CCW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle G38 CW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R Rreference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular width in X axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Rectangular width in Y axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative L Distance from the milling start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative U Corner arc radius There is no corner transition arc i
139. Cleo 15 CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMMING BASICS eere nnne 16 3 1 Controlled axis ttt MMHHHMMMneRRHRMHMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMHHHMMSMMMMMMMMM e eMMMeeHl 16 3 2 AXIS name e e III 16 3 3 Coordinate system menssssshsysesesesssseusssusseshhpseasessssenssemssssusshssseneseseesasesssesssssesessecesesessesssessosseeseees 16 3 3 1 Machine tool coordinate system Wiss cL PLU Lud IM FLU EE NM IPFE DI EU uM S UP LUNE 16 3 3 2 Reference point Vua eia e bao eA os n rive Ee TEE Te SCTE See CECT Tee en TT Te au e rae ter vette dca rer er ee ter ere eC rc Terre 16 3 3 3 Workpiece coordinate system EERE CCE ETE CE EET ENEE EE EERO ere er a E E 17 3 3 4 Absolute programming and relative programming EE 18 3 4 Modal and non modal serra IIIS MMMMMMMMMMees 19 3 5 Decimal point programming uhssresesacsesamensusensossessesesessesesssssssssenseysssessseesssemsosseasspssueseseoeeseseoss 20 CHAPTER 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION G CODE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeelss 24 4 1 Types of G codes e e M eee 21 4 2 Simple G codes e HH 25 4 2 1 Rapid positioning e100 CO 25 4 2 2 Linear interpolation GO01 MIHI 26 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation G02 G023 MM MMR eHeeeeeeey 27 4 24 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 E 32 4 25 Dwell G04 EE 33 4 2 6 Single direction positioning G60 ee er ee RN RM MR E ere ee eee ee ere ee ee ee eee 33 42 7 On line modification for system parameters G10 Haband Ca Ea RR HIE Rd NER Eege 35 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system 547 G59 eee 36 4 29 Addition
140. E BB ere cries erm Fig 3 4 2 2 5 e g N e t E Non reference tool setting After the reference tool setting is finished the system sets the Measurement Mode Selection to 1 automatically Users can perform the non reference tool setting after changing the reference tool Measure the length of the non reference tool and write it into the tool length estimation L select lt AUTO gt mode press AUTO MEAS to enable the system to call the tool setting macro program automatically then press key to execute Auto Tool Setting 203 Or JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual TOOL LENGTH MEASURE MACHINE MEASLIREMEMT MODE X o Si LENGTH WRITE MODE TOOL NO Tg Y H mm OFFSET NO Hd o MEASURE FEED F 40 T SETTING GAUGE RELATIVE SELECT T SETTING GAUBE FIXED POINT QUEE Mus 5 d X H mm STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y MEF POINT Y 8 688 STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 3B HHH Y mm TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L ae eee STEP3 PRESS lt ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD Z 38 800 Z H mm Z AXIS ORIGIN SET WORK 654 COORD SYS SELECT G54 x H mm MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm SET Z REF STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z o Si THE LENGTH OF SP NOSE TO THE TOOL TIP DATA Pd 42 80 38 PATH 1 AUTOMEA
141. E then hole 9 drilling and point R level return N018 G98 Y 450 ee then hole 10 drilling and initial level return N019 GOO X0 YO M5 N020 G49 Z250 T31 M6 N021 G43 ZO H31 Reference point return spindle stop Tool length compensation cancel tool change Initial level tool length compensation N022 S100 M3 Spindle start N023 G85 G99 X800 Y 350 Positioning then hole 11 drilling and point R level Z 153 R47 F50 return N024 G91 Y 200 Positioning then holes 12 and 13 drilling and Y 200 point R level return N025 GOO G90 X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop N026 G49 ZO Tool length compensation cancel N027 M30 Program stop 4 5 Tool compensation G code 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 Function G43 specifies the positive compensation for tool length G44 specifies the negative compensation for tool length 99 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G49 is used to cancel tool length compensation Format There are 2 modes A B for tool length offset which are set by bit parameter No 39 0 in this system Mode A G43 G44 L n Mode B G17 G43 Z_H G17 G44 Z H G18 G43 Y H G18 G44 Y H G19 G43 X H G19 G44 X_H Tool length offset mode cancel G49 or HO Explanation The instructions above are used to shift an offset value for the end point of the
142. ING CONDITION TRIGGER ANY CHANGE TRIGGER ADDRESS unknown MODE RISING EDGE FAIIING EDGE BOTH EDGE ON OFF kr O 17 08 05 Fig 3 8 5 221 e g N e m t E Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note Refer to GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC manual for the PLC ladder modification and relevant messages 3 9 Help display Press key to display help page There are 8 subpages including SYS INFO OPRT ALARM G CODE PARA MACRO BIPLC AD and CALCULA All of them can be viewed by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 9 1 3 9 12 1 System information page In HELP page press soft key SYS INFO to enter system information page See fig 3 9 1 SES vs weoma VER use 0 INTERPOLATION VER eme DEER wrkmom wn DATA L TL 17 08 27 CG g N e T E e PATH 1 2 OPRT page In lt HELP gt page press soft key OPRT to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 9 2 MDI mode MDI data input value gt Enter Search NO any mode NO gt SER key POS interface Rel coord clear rel coord interface X Y Z cancel Rel coord mediating REL interface X Y Z Enter spindle Speed Set REL or ABS down keytspeed Enter PRT CNT clear REL or ABS interface down key gt Enter RUN TIME
143. L CURRENT MODAL GOA G49 E 300 GOA G49 E H G17 G80 5 1500 G17 G80 Sg G90 G98 M 05 09 G90 G98 M 30 G94 G15 T duu G94 G15 lt 888 G54 G50 H Hu G54 G50 H G88 G21 G69 D 300A G21 G69 D 300A G40 G64 N 262 G40 G64 N 2 DATA 08 51 54 PATH 1 E on Fig 10 1 9 1 d In CUR MOD page input corresponding modes according to the pre loaded modal values in Fig 10 1 9 1 2 on the panel Then the 6 Op PROG 5 Return to AUTO mode press key FESTART ang then key 260 Chapter 10 Edit Operation program moves to the start point i e the end point of the last block of the interrupted block at the dry run speed and the execution continues The operation can be restarted anywhere Note 1 The 1 2 3Y ahead of the coordinates in the figure above are the sequence in which the axes moves to the program restart position They are set by data parameter P376 Note 2 Check whether the collision occurs when the tool moves to the program restart position If such a possibility exists move the tool to the place where no obstruction occurs and then perform restart Note 3 When the coordinate axis restarts the position moving to switch on the single block running the tool stops each time it finishes an axis movement Note 4 If there is no absolute position detector the reference point return must be performed before the restart after power on Note 5 Do not perform the resetting during the program execution
144. L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0126 o type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0127 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0128 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed 100 80 100 100 301 Cr i Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 3 400 ms 0129 FL speed of exponential acceleration deceleration 0 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0130 Maximum blocks merged in pre interpolation Setting range 0 10 0131 In position precision of cutting feed 0 03 Setting range 0 01 0 5 mm 0132 Control precision of circular interpolation 0 03 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0133 Contour control precision of pre interpolation 0 01 Setting range 0 01 0 5 mm 1 0134 Acceleration of the fore linear acceleration deceleration interpolated in forecasting control Setting range 0 2000 mm s 0135 Forecasting control S type pre acceleration 100 deceleration time constant Setting range 0 400 ms 0136 Linear time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0137 Exponential time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 0 400
145. L20 Pn X Y Z n 1 to 50 XYZ Code of additional workpiece coordinate system For setting axis address and offset value for workpiece zero offset For absolute instruction G90 the specified value is the new offset value For incremental instruction G91 the specified value is added to the current offset value to produce a new offset value By G10 instruction each workpiece coordinate system can be changed respectively When the address P of the additional workpiece coordinate system is in the same block with other instructions containing address P they share this P address together 38 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 2 10 Selecting machine coordinate system G53 Format G53 X Y Z Function To rapidly position the tool to the corresponding coordinates in the machine coordinate system Explanations 1 While G53 is used in the program the instruction coordinates behind it should be the ones in the machine coordinate system and the machine will rapidly position to the specified location 2 G53 is a non modal instruction which is only effective in the current block It does not affect the coordinate system defined before Restrictions ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Selecting current coordinate system G53 When the position on the machine is specified the tool traverses to the position rapidly G53 used for selecting the machine coordinate system is a non modal instruction i
146. Manual machine tool builder for details In general handwheel CW rotation indicates the positive feed while CCW rotation indicates the negative feed 6 1 3 MPG feed explanation 1 The relationship between handwheel scale and machine moving amount is as follows Table 6 1 3 1 Moving amount per MPG scale MEM MPG increment 0 001 0 04 0 1 mm Machine moving 0 001 0 04 0 1 amount mm 2 The values in the table above vary with the mechanical transmission See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for details 3 The rotation speed of the handwheel cannot exceed 5r s otherwise the scale and the moving amount may be inconsistent 6 2 Control in MPG interruption 6 2 1 MPG interruption operation The MPG interruption operation can overlap the automatic movement in Auto mode Tool position in Tool iti ft ool position after DR ge MPG interruption Cutting depth caused by MPG interruption Fig 6 2 1 1 The operations are as follows 1 After the dwell operation switch the program being executed in Auto mode to MPG mode 2 Move the tool by the handwheel to modify the coordinate system such as moving Z axis upward and downward moving X and Y axes horizontally or rotating A axis 3 After the control is switched to Auto mode the workpiece coordinates remain unchanged till the machine zero return operation is performed again After the operation the coordinates restore to their actual values Note
147. Modification and Setting 3 Input offset value in any mode and press key or soft key INPUT for confirmation 4 In any mode input offset amount and then press soft key INPUT or OUTPUT After that the system computes the offset amount automatically and displays it on the screen Note 1 During the tool offset modification the new offset value is ineffective till the T code which specifies its offset number is specified Note 2 The offset value can be modified anytime during the program execution If the value is required to take effect in time during the program execution the modification must be completed before the tool offset number is executed Note 3 If the length offset value needs to be added to the relative coordinate value of Z axis the offset value should be specified behind Z code then they will be automatically added up in the system For example if Z 10 is input the offset value is the one obtained by adding 10 to the current relative coordinate value of Z axis 3 3 2 Display modification and setting for parameters 3 3 2 1 Parameter display Press soft key EHIPARA to enter parameter page There are two subpages including BITPAR and NUMPAR Both of them can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys as is shown below e e g N e t E e 1 Bit parameter page Press soft key BITPAR to enter this page see Fig 3 3 2 1 1 Bit7 Bit6 BitS Bit4 Bits Bite Bit1 B
148. Move the cursor to the parameter number to be modified Method 1 Press page keys to display the parameter to be set then move the cursor to the place to be modified SEARCH Method 2 Press key to search after inputting the parameter number 5 Input a new parameter value using number keys corresponding passwords are required for modifying parameters of different levels 6 Press key for confirmation then the parameter value is input and displayed 7 Turn off the parameter switch after setting all the parameters 3 3 3 Display modification and setting for macro variables 3 3 3 1 Macro variable display Press soft key EEMACRO to enter macro variable page which consists of two subpages CUSTOM and SYSTEM Both of them are available to be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys as is shown below 194 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting 1 User variable page Press soft key CUSTOMER to enter this page ER Poof moi ew oe ff ote S we sw me ew mos foots mw Ci ots Lemos oe we wm KSE KREE NOTE ALWAYS NULL INPUT 16 56 48 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 3 1 1 2 System variable page Press soft key SYSTEM to enter this page Hlp AG Hlp AE d LA LA LA O S
149. N 0208 This instruction can not be executed in G10 mode Please cancel G10 mode LH first Restart of the program is not supported by scaling revolution polar EN coordinate modes hasnsete 31 3 REES REES Lua Toot chenging nacre oat dows rt euppo ai opeaion A a e and tool compensation dynamically Lune scana vatn ard polar coordinato do rot suppon GSTS REES Eed system and tool compensation dynamically M06 Tool magazine is not used parameter is not opened Tool changing NEN instruction can not be used 322 Appendix l Alarm List 0220 Metric inch switching is not supported by scaling revolution and polar coordinate mode 0221 Metric inch switching is not supported by tool changing macro program ks 0224 Reference return is not performed before auto run started EE Parameter format error 1 N or R is not input 2 Parameter number is not defined 3 Address j is not defined in bit parameter input L50 N P Rexceed the range 0252 ___Sormore axes are spoofed as helical interpolator ads Una Deves connected o RS 252 Cisbengused 0235 Specified record end sign ome Parameter setting ot program resertswong Tor CN decimalpoint Toss Adesmproneny An illegal G code is specified in pre reading control mode In pre reading 0239 control mode dividing spindle is specified max cutting feeding parameter is set to O and interpolation
150. NAL Y SIGNAL and EIWAVE All of them can also be viewed by pressing the soft keys See Fig 3 6 1 1 to Fig 3 6 1 5 214 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting Chapter 3 1 F signal page Press soft key F SIGNAL in DIAGNOSIS page to enter diagnosis NC PLO page See figure 3 6 1 1 0002000 0 H 0 H Fo12 H H H o o 0 0 H H 00 0 0 0 0 0 H 0 H 1 1 0118 o Q H 1 o H 0 H 0 H 0 H 0 H H 0 H 0 H 0 H 0 H 0 H H 0 H H 0 H 0 o H o F013 F014 F015 F016 F 17 F018 F 19 F020 F 21 F022 F023 dor o o H H H H H H H H H o H H 1 H 0 1 o H H 0 H Q Q o o 0 Q Q o o o F001 Faa2 F003 F004 Foos Faas F007 Foes 8208000208 Foos F010 F011 17 63 54 PATH 1 DATA s C H UI LL O C c ke Oo D c c O O c 2 V 2 V O Z O co qm N X 0 e o S D e H o E o g o LL v O Z O gt Q O CL D C eb o be c D o d t EA EA M eg H D Q 2 c 2 on O c O D OH Kan O D eb uU O O a eb on O c D O E c D D Be UN O ucl o c D O CL Operation to enter diagnosis q lt Z Y O gt 0b x E O o o o O o O LLI
151. No axis specified in reference return Eoo 4 0167 Intermediate point coordinate too large NEN 0168 The min dwell time at the hole bottom should be shorter than the max dwell NEN time C Mhi a subprogram sl F s notan integer or less than 0 in a block calina subprogram ous Subprogram cal shouldbe essthan 9009 ous Canned ele can only be exeoutedin G17 pere 0176 Spinde spoed is not specfed before iid tapping 0177 Spindle orientation isnot supported by 10 contol in G76 nsiucton os Spindle speed is not spotted in cammed eye ERR e oe se Cows WamTode om Tissen beyond rens L is too small 0185 1 L is smaller than tool radius in rectangular groove fine milling 2 Lis smaller than O in groove rough milling L is too big 1 Lis bigger than tool diameter in inner circular groove rough milling 0186 2 L is bigger than tool diameter in rectangular groove rough milling 3 Lis bigger than in rectangular groove rough milling 4 L is bigger than J in inner circular groove rough milling Tool diameter is too big 1 Tool diameter is bigger than in inner circular groove rough milling 2 Tool radius is bigger than I J in inner circular groove rough milling 0187 321 Cr 441 Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 3 Tool radius is bigger than J in outer circular groove fine milling 4 Tool diameter is bigger than in rectangu
152. O 269 value Feed to the rectangle center To mill a rectangular surface helically by an increment L from center outward each time Rapid return to R level along Z axis Rapid positioning to star point of the helical feed in XY plane Rapid down to a position at which the distance to the end surface is V along Z axis Z axis cuts downward for a Q V depth e es ag p e e go m e z z ya 10 Repeat the actions of 4 8 till the rectangular surface with the total depth machined 11 Return to the initial level or R level according to instruction G98 or G99 Instruction path G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling Note is the coefficient of 834 CW rectangular groove rough milling L helical feed radius _ Tool center path _ Tool center path Rectangle groove Rectangle border groove border Fig 4 4 4 1 Note The NO 12 1 should be set to 1 when this instruction is used Example Rough milling an inner rectangular groove by the canned cycle instruction G33 as shown in the following figure 69 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Fig 4 4 4 2 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G33 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 170 J50 L10 W20 Q10 V10 U5 D1 F800 To perform inner rectangular grove rough milling cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cy
153. O 45 2 whether the signals for feedrate override selection and feedrate override cancel are valid in rigid taping is set by bit parameter NP 45 4 When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped and then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction When bit parameter NO 44 5 is 0 the type is standard peck tapping cycle After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse to point R level is performed The cutting is performed with feed depth Q cutting depth for each cutting feed from point R and then a return is performed to point R Whether the override in rigid tapping retraction is valid is set by bit parameter NO 44 4 and the retraction speed override is set by bit parameter NO 45 3 The moving of cutting feedrate F is performed from point R to a position distance d set by data parameter P284 to the end point of the last cutting which is where the cutting is restarted Whether the same time constant is used in rigid 96 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code tapping feed and retraction is set by bit parameter NO 45 2 When point Z is reached the spindle is stopped and then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction Restrictions F Analarm is issued if the specified F value exceeds the upper limit of the cutting feedrate S Analarmis issued if the rotation speed exceeds the max speed for the gear used The speed gear is set by number parameter P294 296 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 and G84 Cor G74 ca
154. Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 85 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G85 cannot be specified in a same block otherwise G85 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 15 Boring cycle G86 Format G86 X_Y_Z RF K Function This cycle instruction is used to perform a boring cycle Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R F Cutting federate K Number of repeats
155. Preparation Function G Code D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is O by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number K Number of repeats Cycle process D Rapid positioning to the start point within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 1 from the start point 5 Perform linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 6 perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point e es ag p e e go m e 3 z ya 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path G35 CCW rectangular groove finish milling cycle G36 CW rectangular groove finish milling cycle L L Tool center path Rectangular Rectangular groove border groove border Fig 4 4 5 1 Note The NO 12 1 should be set to 1 when this instruction is used Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled in the figure below by canned cycle G35 instruction X10 Y0 I 80 Fig 4 4 5 2 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G35 X10 YO Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Performing inner rectangular groove milling at hole bottom in the canned 7 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining
156. Q P F K_ ri kee mg Hole machining data Hole position data Hole machining type e ag p e e UG ka e z z ya The meanings of hole position data and hole machining data are shown in table 4 4 1 Table 4 4 1 word Hole Afe Refer to table 4 4 3 and note the restrictions above Hole The hole position is specified by either absolute value or position incremental value and the control is identical to that of G00 data positioning As Fig 4 4 2 shows the distance from point R level to the hole bottom is specified by incremental values or the hole bottom coordinates are specified by absolute values As shown in fig 4 4 1 the federate is the speed specified by F in operation 3 while it is the rapid traverse speed or the speed specified F instruction in operation 5 depending on different hole machining types Z In Fig 4 4 2 the distance from the initial level to point R level R is specified by incremental value or point R level coordinates are specified by absolute values The federates shown in fig P Hole machining data 4 4 1 are both rapid traverse in operations 2 and 6 It is used to specify the cut in value each time in G73 or G83 or the parallel movement value incremental value in G76 or G87 It is used to specify the dwell time at the hole bottom The canned cycle instruction can be followed by a parameter P which specifies the dwell time after the tool reaches the Z plan
157. RVIEW ELLO LLL LIII 1 1 1 UE 1 1 2 System introduction e HMM 1 1 3 Type signification messsssshesesessasssssemsussssshssiessssesssesssossassessessssesesssemsnssessossueneseoossescossessossesseseoovee 2 BOOK I PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW rn aaa 5 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation VRRARRRRRRRRRRRRORANRERRERRARRERARRRERRSSREAERAREARRERENE 5 1 2 Feed feed function e MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM M M8eeem Meer 6 1 3 Cutting speed and spindle speed function e MM MMMMM ee eee MeMMMMMM SM T 1 4 Instructions for machine tool operations miscellaneous function 6668 T 1 5 Tools used in different machining tool function EE 8 1 6 Tool geometry and tool movement controlled by pr gram eren rrt eu eaten ees 8 1 6 1 Tool length compensation EE EE 8 1 6 2 Tool radius compensation GEREENT ERENNERT ENN 9 1 7 Tool movement range stroke eassresesscsssesssssusshssseseneesssamsossessossueseseseevessossessossueseseseesesoons 9 CHAPTER2 PART PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 7HHIHIRHIHrHIHHIIRHIRRMRRMRIIIHIIeIIlI8I 11 2 1 Program configuration euhsssesesasssssesssssesshsasmenssaesssesssssesssssusssysesnessseessusesssssussesesessesesssemsossesossees 11 2 1 1 Program NAME ME 11 2 1 2 Sequence number and program block ue 12 2 1 3 WoOrd M II I III III HII III hh hne hne nnne 12 2 2 General structure of a gleef Inte 13 22 1 Subprogram writing Sosa Si ee nel tees ames ae cue da te a D dE EE 14 222 Subprogram call MM n 14 223 Program
158. Rapid traverse G88 Cutting feed Stop gt spindle Manual Boring CCW Cutting feed Cutting feed e ag p e e UG ka e Z ya Restrictions Tool radius offset D is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 4 4 14 Inner circular groove rough milling G22 G23 Format G22 G98 G99 X Y Z R L WQ V D F K G23 Function it is used for performing circular interpolations from the circle center by helical line till the programmed figure of the circle groove is machined Explanation G22 CCW inner circular groove rough milling G23 CW inner circular groove rough milling X Y The start point in X Y plane Z Machining depth which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to R level in G91 R Rreference level which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Circular groove radius which should be greater than the current tool radius Cut width increment within XY plane which is less than the tool diameter but more than 0 W First cutting depth in Z axis direction It is the distance below the R level which should be GC greater than O if the first cutting depth exceeds the groove bottom then the machining is performed at the groove bottom Q Cutting depth for each cutting feed 62 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code V Distance greater than 0 to the end surface to be machined at rapid tool traverse D Tool compensati
159. S MEASURE ST MEAS RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 6 oS S The difference between a tool and reference tool is set to the reference offset ag N MACHINE G54 G55 S X Q T X ep X o m a Y H mm Y mm Y mm V c mm E mm A mm EXT G56 G57 X mm X mm X mm Y mm y mm Y mm Z H mm Z mm Z mm INPUT 10 50 34 D m PATH 1 mm SETTING Ework EH DATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 2 2 7 2 Measuring tool length automatically and writing it into tool length offset H Reference tool setting 1 Measurement mode selection 0 reference tool 2 Measured value write mode 1 tool offset Here modify the bit parameter NO 2 25 STME whether the tool measured value is written into the reference offset to O then the system will set the measured value write mode to 1 which cannot be modified 3 Tool number The purpose of changing the tool number is to change the measured tool number conveniently in the non reference tool mode in a shorter time The offset number changes with the change of the tool number However during tool setting the tool measured value is subject to the offset number set in the tool offset number 4 Tool offset number In reference tool mode when the measured value write mode is set to 1 tool length offset users can change the tool offset number as required In non reference tool mode the tool offset number changes automatically as the tool
160. S CY v Start position Start position Tool center path b Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an obtuse angle 1807 0290 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which are set by bit parameter No 4080 Linear Linear Linear Circular Start position Start position Tool center path Start position Linear Linear Start position Linear Circular Programmed S x path Intersection B Tool center path Intersection Note Intersection is the position where offset paths of two successive blocks intersect Tool center path 110 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code C Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which are set by bit parameter NO 40 0 Linear Linear Linear Circul Start position Start position G42 G42 Programmed path ES ag kel a e yo e ch 3 ya Less than1 Fig 4 5 3 2 111 d 400g SUIUIUIU GO I Erde tes 2 Tool movement in offset mode GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual An alarm occurs and the tool is stopped if the offset plane is changed when the offset mode is being performed The tool movement in the offset mode is shown as the figure below a Movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 112 Linear Linear Programmed path S L Tool center pa
161. UTO MEAS to enable the system to call the tool setting macro program automatically then press key 2 to execute Auto Tool Setting TOOL LENGTH MEASURE MACHINE MEASLIREMEMT MODE H X o LENGTH WRITE woe TOOL NO JT dg Y H mm OFFSET NO E re o MEASURE FEED FL T SETTING GAUGE RELATIVE SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT ee NN E x H mm STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT Y 8 688 STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 3B HHH Y D ES TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L ae aag STEP3 PRESS lt ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD Z 38 000 Z H mm Z AXIS ORIGIN SET WORK G54 COORD SYS SELECT 854 x mm MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF E Z d a THE LENGTH OF SP NOSE TO THE TOOL TIP DATA Pd 1e 01 13 PATH 1 mS MEASURE ST MEAS RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 8 Non reference tool setting After the reference tool setting is finished the system set the Measurement Selection Mode to 1 Users can perform non reference tool setting after changing the reference tool Measure the length of the non reference tool and write it in the tool length estimation L select lt AUTO gt mode and press AUTO MEAS to enable the system to call the tool 205 e e g N e t E e Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Prog
162. VRD 100 0 40 op 120 160 200 A Il Lm Y 4 f 89 Cm 5 aeos Fa 25 50 100 l SP 5 Orpm 5 10095 50 68 78 op op 108 110 128 mmm Tool T WM COMMAND T NO TOO00 OFFSET Hu Dou PART CNT 0001 0000 CUT TIME 000 00 0 09 05 55 CG e ag N e x t E e Gu G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 DATA _ ji PATH 1 ANTES ABS ALL PMONI Fig 2 1 1 2 2 System power off Before turning off the system make sure that 1 The axes X Y Z of the CNC are at halt 2 Miscellaneous functions spindle pump etc are off 3 The CNC power is cut off prior to cutting off the machine power When cutting off the power check that 1 The LED which indicates the cycle start on the operator panel is off 2 All the movable parts of the CNC machine tool are at halt 3 Press POWER OFF button to turn off the power Cutting off the power in an emergency The power should be cut off immediately to prevent accidents in an emergency situation during the machine running However the zero return tool setting etc must be performed again because an error between system coordinates and actual coordinates may occur after power off Note See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for the machine power cut off 176 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations 2 3 Safety operations 2 3 1 Reset operation With
163. X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G84 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G84 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 12 Left hand taping cycle G74 Format G74X Y Z R PF Function This cycle performs taping In this cycle the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction when the bottom of the hole is reached Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom The absolute value is used if it is a negative one F Cutting feedrate 81 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G74 G98 G74 G99 Spindle CW Spindle CW P Point Z P Point Z Fig 4 4 12 1 Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle CW When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle is rotated reversely for retraction This operation creates threads
164. a corner is smaller than the tool radius because the inner offsetting of the tool will result in overcutting an alarm for interference occurs and the CNC stops before the execution of the program Tool center path An alarm occurs and 4 the operation stops before the execution Programmed path No interference check for overcutting path is performed in theory gt An overcutting occurs if the CNC does not stop Fig 4 5 3 27 2 When machining a groove smaller than the tool radius When a groove smaller than the tool radius is machined since the tool radius offset forces the path of the tool center to move in the reverse direction of the programmed path the overcutting will occur 124 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Tool center path gt An alarm occurs and the operation stops Programmed path An overcutting occurs if the CNC does not stop Fig 4 5 3 28 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 3 Machining a step smaller than the tool radius When the machining of the step is instructed by circular machining in the case of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius the tool center path with the common offset becomes reverse to the programmed direction In this case the first vector is ignored and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position This single block operation is stopped at th
165. a signal 1 Auto tool length measurement and reference offset writing Reference tool setting 1 Measurement mode selection 0 reference tool 2 Measured value write mode 0 reference offset The bit parameter NO 225 STME whether the tool measured value is written in reference offset must be set to 1 or the value cannot be written When the measured value write mode is O neither tool number nor tool offset number can be written 201 Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual MEASUREMENT MODE mm STEP1 INMPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT STEP NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT 9B B H X H mm kb LENBTH WRITE wgl TOOL NO T d H mm OFFSET NO H 4 l MEASURE FEED F Ap T SETTING GAUGE BEES X REF POINT g SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT Y REF POINT 0 PAA TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION STEP3 PRESS lt ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START 7 MIN MT COORD EU EOS COORD SYS SELECT G54 MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF H 00 Is TOOL SETTING GAUGE INSTALLATION FIXED B N 1 Y a OOO m 11 98 14 DATA L S PATH 1 Bee E EE Fig 3 4 2 2 3 H mm 3 Measure feed setting The measure speed is the traverse speed at which the tool moves from the start point to point R When it
166. aa OP OP TMAS ZERO MAG COW TMG OW fT INFEED T RETRACTION CLAMPRELEASE T CHANGER BRICATINGE COOUNG een 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 ovem zen WA Fig 1 2 4 1 Machine control area of GSK218MC 170 Keys LJ SKIP D SINGLE Chapter 1 Operation Panel Designation Explanation Remarks and operation explanation Switching to Edit mode in Auto mode MDI mode and DNC mode System Edit mode key To enter edit mode qecelerates to stop after current block is executed Auto mode key To enter auto mode In this mode program in internal memory is selected Switching to MDI mode in Auto MDI mode key To enter MDI mode mode system decelerates to stop after current block is executed Machine zero mode key otep mode key Manual mode key MPG mode key DNC mode key skipped Block skip key For switching the single block execution between Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode key single block and blocks If it is on the Switching to Machine zero mode Auto mode System immediately decelerates to stop Switching to Step mode in Auto mode system immediately decelerates to stop To enter machine zero mode To enter step mode Switching to Manual Mode in Auto mode system immediately decelerates to stop Switching to MPG mode in Auto mode system immediately decelerates to stop Switching to DNC mode in Auto mode system decelerates to stop after current block is e
167. achining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual ES S Y 2 wy Je Outer circle border a p rE ool center path pels 3 Fig 4 4 3 2 us G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G26 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J30 D1 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the outer circle fine milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4820 is set to 1 and G26 G32 cannot be specified in a same block or G26 G32 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 4 4 Rectangular groove rough milling G33 G34 Format G33 G98 G99 X Y Z R JS L W Q V U D F K_ G34 Function These instructions are used for linear cutting cycle by the specified parameter data from the rectangle center till the programmed rectangular groove is machined Explanation G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling G34 CW rectangular groove rough milling X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R Rreference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular groove width in X axis which should be greater than The setting value of data parameter P269 tool radius tool radius
168. ae This manual describes the various matters concerning the operations of this CNC system as much as possible However it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations due to space limitation and product specific applications Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable Ka This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability BI AE A e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Preface Dear users It is our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this machining center CNC system of GSK218MC series produced by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is Programming and Operation Manual which introduces the programming and operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK218MC series in detail To ensure the product works in a safe and efficient state please read this manual carefully before installation and operation Warnings L improper operations may cause unexpected accidents Only those qualified staff are allowed to operate this system Special notes The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK It cannot be applie
169. ain X Y Z or other axes Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G86 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to Point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to Point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to Point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to Point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to Point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G86 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G86 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 16 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 Function This cycle performs accurate boring Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to point Z level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the point Z level R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R level hole bottom Q Shift amount at the bottom of the hole P Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom with its absolute value used if it is negative F Cutting feedrate I
170. ains unchanged till the power off system reset or emergency stop This system uses right hand Cartesian coordinate system The motion in spindle direction is defined as Z axis motion Viewed from spindle to the workpiece the motion of the spindle box approaching the workpiece is defined as negative Z axis motion and the one departing the workpiece as positive The other directions are determined by right hand Cartesian coordinate system 3 3 2 Reference point There is a special point on the CNC machine tool for tool change and coordinate system setup This point is called reference point It is a fixed point in the machine coordinate system set by the machine tool builder By using reference point return the tool can easily move to this position Generally this point in CNC milling system coincides with the machine zero while it is usually the tool change point for machining center Chapter 3 Programming Basics Reference point Worktable e ag n a e LE e Ko Fig 3 3 2 1 s There are two methods to move the tool to the reference point 1 Manual reference point return see Reference point return in CHAPTER 9 2 Auto reference point return 3 3 3 Workpiece coordinate system The coordinate system used for workpiece machining is called workpiece coordinate system or part coordinate system which is preset by CNC system set in workpiece coordinate system setting Program Instruction
171. al workpiece coordinate system ME 38 4 2 10 Selecting machine coordinate system etsn HMM 39 BI AE e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 yi soup aa adaae EE M c LEM UNE 39 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 ee Ee LI Danis cnMvINU ee 41 4 2 1 3 Polar coordinate start cancel G16 G1 5 nqicDect ou dein cure ees UE iut EE 41 4 2 14 Scaling In a plane G51 G50 reR 44 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 Rr H oe AT 4 2 16 Skip function G31 i als abs ly ah al cata akg esa int Pca lin naa la nal ss wales nnn a Rd ce E Roa ca o claw lee Ee 51 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 M 52 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner rounding EE 52 4 3 Reference point G instruction r 53 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 EE 54 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 M 55 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 M T 56 4 3 4 Reference point return check G27 snatch lew uc e M MIS MID I EE EMT LL EE toate enero ele 56 4 4 Canned cycle G code PEE TEC ELAR eni ii iau EE uera eie VI E VENOUS Ee Uu vada qe ui ee mr rer dg 57 4 4 1 Inner circular groove rough milling
172. aling center coordinates P each axis is scaled up or down at the same rate of magnification jai Scaled machining blocks e G50 Scaling cancelled Or G51X YZ I J K Each axis is scaled up and down at different rates Il J K of E magnification TS T Scaled machining blocks G50 Scaling cancelled M Function ye G51 scales up and down the programmed figure in the same or different rate taking a specified position as its center It is suggested that the G51 be specified in a separate block or unexpected results may occur resulting in workpiece damage and personal injury and cancelled with G50 Y Po Scaling center Fig 4 2 14 1 Scaling up and down P1P2P3P4 P1 P2 P3 P4 Explanation 1 Scaling center G51 can be specified with three positioning parameters X Y Z all of which are optional parameters These positioning parameters are for specifying the scaling center of G51 If they are not specified the system assumes the tool current position as the scaling center Whether the current positioning mode is in absolute or incremental mode the scaling center is always specified with the absolute positioning mode Moreover the parameters of instruction G51 are also expressed with rectangular coordinate system in polar coordinate G16 mode Example G17 G91 G54 GO X10 Y10 G51 X40 Y40 P2 Though in incremental mode the scaling center is still the absolute coordinates 40 40 in G54 coordinate system G1 Y90 Par
173. am files directly Renaming required press key CANCEL to input the new program number e g O10 or 0100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the program files If the same program name already exists in the system disk the system prompts Please rename the file Here input the new program number e g O10 or 0100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files CG e ag N e x t E e Note File LADCHI TXT is ineffective after transmitted to the system unless the power is turned off 3 To delete files from system disk U disk a Press key Or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be deleted in the system disk U disk b Press soft key DEL then DELETE CURRENT FILE is prompted at the bottom of the page Press key CANCEL to cancel the file deletion press key ZENTER to delete the file 11 2 3 USB DNC machining operation steps 1 In lt SETTING gt page set I O channel to 2 See Section 3 4 1 in OPERATION for details 2 Insert the U disk 3 Press key lt DNC gt to switch the system to DNC mode then Please select machining files in program directory page is prompted at the bottom of the screen Press key PRG _ to enter program page and press soft key DIR to display the USB program directory move the cursor to select the program to be machined and then press lt INPUT gt to open the program finally press key lt CYCLE START gt to execute DNC machin
174. ameter Y is still in incremental mode 44 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 2 Scaling Either in G90 mode or G91 mode the rate of magnification is always expressed with absolute mode The rate of magnification can be set either in parameters or in programs Data parameters P331 P333 correspond to the magnifications of X Y and Z respectively If there is no scaling instruction specified the setting value of data parameter P330 is used for scaling If the parameter values of parameter P or J and K are negative the mirror image is applied for the corresponding axis 3 Scaling setting The effectiveness of scaling is set by parameter No 6025 The effectiveness of the X axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47223 the effectiveness of the Y axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47724 the effectiveness of the Z axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47325 and the scaling rate of each axis is set by bit parameter NO 47326 0 instructed with P 1 instructed with l J K 4 Scaling cancel After the scaling followed by a movement instruction is cancelled by G50 the current tool position is regarded as the start point of this movement instruction by default 5 In scaling mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can not be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled 6 Even if different magnifications are specified for circul
175. anation explanation The system enters Emergency stop emergency stop Any mode state by pressing this key N axis FOL CN Manual mode step selecting key n WEE mode MPG mode For spindle speed Spindle override adjustment spindle switch speed analog control valid Any mode Auto mode MDI Feedrate override For feedrate mode manual mode switch adjustment DNC mode ZPS ot 218MC are equivalent to key CG e ag N e t e c x of 218MC H and 218MC V The introduction below is based on 2 and key the keys of 218MC Note 2 When the rapid traverse key is not pressed in manual mode the manual speed override is adjusted with the feedrate override switch Note 3 In the explanation below the keys in lt gt are the panel keys in are the soft keys at the bottom of the screen indicates the corresponding page of the current soft key indicates there are submenus 175 er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM POWER ON OFF AND SAFETY OPERATIONS 2 1 System power on Before GSK218M CNC system is powered on ensure that 1 The machine state is normal 2 The voltage of the power supply conforms to the requirement of the machine 3 The wiring is correct and reliable The current position relative coordinates is displayed after system self check and initialization Omm min PRG SPEED H FEED O
176. ancelling the rigid taping M29 for specifying the rigid taping 5 1 10 Helical chip remover ON OFF M35 M36 Instruction M35 M36 Itis used to control the ON OFF operation of the helical chip remover 5 1 11 Chip flushing water valve ON OFF M26 M27 Instruction M26 for turning on the valve M27 for turning off the valve 5 1 12 Spindle blowing ON OFF M44 M45 Instruction M44 M45 controls the ON OFF of the spindle blowing 5 1 13 Auto tool change START END M50 M51 Instruction M50 M51 controls the START END of auto tool change 5 1 14 Tool judging after tool change M53 Instruction M53 used for checking whether the changed tool is correct 150 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code 5 1 15 Tool judging on the spindle M55 Instruction M55 used for judging whether there is a tool on the spindle 5 2 M codes used by control program M codes used by a program are divided into main program type and macro type If an M code used by a program and a move instruction are in a same block the move instruction is executed prior to the M code Note 1 Codes MOO M01 M02 MO6 M30 M98 and M99 cannot be specified together with other M codes or an alarm is issued When these codes are in the same block with other non M instructions the non M instructions are executed prior to the M codes Note 2 This kind of M codes include the codes that direct the CNC to perform the internal operation in addition to sending t
177. and 218MC V CNC systems the feedrate is selected by the feedrate override band switch with 21 gears Note 1 Value specified by F in feedrate override program The actual federate Value specified by F X feedrate override Note 2 The rapid traverse speed overridden by data parameter P88 P89 P90 and rapid override is calculated as follows Actual rapid traverse speed along X axis Value specified by P88 X rapid override The calculation methods for Y and Z axes are the same as that of X axis 7 10 Spindle speed override in auto run In auto run the spindle speed can be overridden if it is controlled by analog quantity The spindle override which is classified into 8 gears from 50 120 can be adjusted by pressing Jet Droe Th S OVERRIDE S OVERRIDE S OVERRIDE spindle override keys in auto mode Tp The spindle speed override increases by one gear 10 till 120 by pressing key saan each time h S OVERRIDE once When it The spindle speed decreases by one gear 10 by pressing key decreases to 50 the spindle stops The spindle speed of 218MC H V CNC system is overridden by spindle override band switch with 8 gears from 50 120 The actual spindle speed speed specified in the program x spindle override The maximum spindle speed is set by data parameter P258 If the spindle speed exceeds it it is taken as the actual speed 245 e e ag N e m t c CG e ag N
178. ar interpolation and each axis the tool Will not trace an ellipse When the magnification for each axis is different and the circular interpolation is programmed with radius R the interpolation figure is shown in fig 4 2 14 2 in the example below the magnification for X axis is 2 for Y axis is 1 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya G90 GO X0 Y 100 G51 XO YO Z0 I2 J1 G02 X100 YO R100 F500 Above instructions are equivalent to the following ones G90 GO X0 Y 100 G02 X200 YO R200 F500 The magnification of radius R depends on or J whichever is larger Y Scaled figure a 0 00 100 0 200 0 Fig 4 2 14 2 Scaling for circular interpolation 1 When the magnifications of the axes are different and the circular interpolation is programmed with I J and K an alarm is given if the arc does not exist 7 Scaling has no effect on the tool offset value see Fig 4 2 14 3 45 Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Programmed figure e g p e e UG ka e z z ya Scaled figure Tool radius compensation value is not scaled Fig 4 2 14 3 Scaling for tool radius compensation Example of a mirror image program Main program G00 G90 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 I 1 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 11 J 1 M98 P9000 G50 M30 Subprogram O9000 G00 G90
179. arameter 60 5 10 mako tactve In circular interpolation G02 or G03 the distance between the start point 0020 and the circle center is not equal to the distance between the end point and the circle center The value beyond the one specified by parameter 214 0021 In circular interpolation illegal axis is specified Modify the program 0022 In circular interpolation R radius J and k distance from the start point to E the center are not be specified Lu _rereularnerolaton J K and R are spected together L un ____Heloalintrpoaton ciation angles Lou tzana oer G code cantbeinasametioce 0028 Unsupported fie format is to arge or with above EE Tool length compensation instruction can not be in the same block with G92 0027 Modify the program In plane selection instructions two or more axes are specified at the same 0028 egen direction Modify the program 317 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0029 The compensation value specified by D H is too big Modify the program m Tool length compensation number or tool radius compensation number 0030 specified by D H code is too big Workpiece coordinate number specified by P is too big 0031 Illegal P specified in G10 NEN 0032 Compensation value is too big or it is not specified Modify the program LS H program Lu Seuporofsecansaemotabweomuarmsodon T0035 Tol com
180. ate decas pat dau mde Ea bacca A io a ere ara ur dd VAR CR DU QUE 90 4 4 19 Left hand rigid taping G74 TET Tere a Te Ne E E A E a a E E E EE er a E 91 4 4 20 Right hand rigid taping G84 EN dE EE a ENEE a re 93 4 4 21 Peck rigid taping chip removal cycle TEEN 95 4 4 22 Canned cycle cancel G80 TPAC ESET ERE TREC ESTEE A s da Ee n OEC CR RI COTTE E VO X RO o Cd RR c n D a d EN 97 4 5 Tool compensation G code Geen dus El oh a de oe baci fu sa Te aos wb ban wins PAD E Di taa o2 Yee ege 99 4 5 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 Wied Cade deentasn auiad Malic dautieads Uae tedecnentase dana keke iq CCS UE Ca 99 4 5 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 rR eee eer rr rrr Tr eer es 103 45 3 Explanation for tool radius compensation a aa 109 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 EE 126 4 5 5 Tool offset value and offset number input by program G10 M 127 4 6 Feed G code iade cda du n3 ali E Eu ads ud E ER LR E DNI DI wen heehee cate E arava wae i VACANT EE UCET EE atone ew vernon vaa of d adu SS 127 4 6 1 Feed mode G64 G61 G63 n 127 46 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 oki d AD ENEE Ro Cone wea Quah RC RC UH RR EGER D a RN 128 47 Macro G code eT eee eT eT ee OTe CE eer eT ee E ee eT iol egen 130 47 1 Custom MaC TO EE 130 4 7 2 Macro variables
181. ath x m block specified keck by G42 Tool center path L a i KE S L c LE m Fig 4 5 3 14 z LC A block specified by G42 Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 15 8 Instruction for cancelling the offset vector temporarily In offset mode if G92 absolute programming is specified the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and then restored automatically In this case different from the offset cancel mode the tool moves directly from the intersection to the specified point where the offset vector is cancelled When offset mode is restored the tool moves directly to the intersection again S intersection S intersection G41 mode N5 G91 G01 X300 Y700 N6 X300 Y 600 N N7 G92 X100 Y200 Ne G01 X400 Y800 Tool center path a Programmed path N7 G92 block Fig 4 5 3 16 9 A block without tool movement The following blocks have no tool movement In these blocks the tool will not move even if tool radius compensation mode is effective 1 OR M code output 2 9521 uituiecne epe S code output 119 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 3 G04 X10000 Dwell 4 G17 Z100 Move instruction not included in offset plane 9 GU s deele G code only 6 G01 G91 X0 Move distance is zero a Specified at offset start If the tool movement is not made by the start up b
182. ation e e e e VUFO v2596 W50 V v10096 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 In manual rapid traverse press keys to select the override of the manual rapid traverse speed The rapid override is divided into four gears including Fo 25 50 and 100 The speed of FO is set by data parameter P93 Note The rapid overrides are effective for the following speed 1 GOO rapid traverse 2 Rapid traverse in canned cycle 3 Rapid traverse in G28 4 Manual rapid traverse Example If the rapid traverse speed is 6m min and override is 50 the actual speed is 3m min 4 1 4 Manual intervention While a program being executed in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MANUAL mode after a dwell operation the manual intervention is available Move the axes manually then shift the mode to the previous one after the intervention When key NGESTAR is pressed to run the program each axis returns to the original intervention point rapidly by GOO and the program execution continues Explanation 1 Ifthe single block switch is turned on during return operation the tool performs single block stop at the manual intervention point 2 f an alarm or resetting occurs during the manual intervention or return operation this function will be cancelled 3 Use machine lock mirror image and scaling functions carefully during manual intervention 4 Machining and workpiece shape should be taken into consideration prior to the manual intervention to prevent to
183. ation G92 XO YO Z0 M98 P9010 Calling the custom macro G80 XO YO M30 4 7 5 Custom macro function B 1 Arithmetic and logic operation The operations listed in the following table can be executed on variables The expressions on the right of the operation characters can contain constants and or variables constituted by functions or operation characters The variables 20 and k in the expression can be replaced by constants The values of the variables on the left can also be assigned by an expression 141 Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Table 4 7 4 2 1 Arithmetic and logic operation Definition HH Addition Subtraction ES E 2 Multiplication e ere GG Division Sine i SIN pci i ac ul The angle is specified by osine i COS H d 90 30 indicat E S gree indicates qe Arc cosine i ACOS AZ an angle of 90 5 A Tangent i TAN Z n Arc tangent i ATANFZ k Square root i SQRT 3 zy Absolute value i ABS Hj qa Rounding off iti ROUND Zj Rounding up to an i FUPT j integer Rounding down to i FIX 42 j an integer Natural logarithm i LN Zj Exponential i EXP function OR Exclusive OR AND Hi j OR k i j XOR sik i AND k i BIN J BCD to BIN Bin to BCD iti BCDIA Logic operation is executed by the binary system Used for switching wit
184. ation deceleration 100 of rapid 4Th axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0110 o type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid X axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0111 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of rapid Y axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0112 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 300 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List of rapid Z axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0113 o type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid 4Th axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0115 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0116 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0117 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0118 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 4Th axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0120 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid X axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0121 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Y axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0122 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid Z axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0123 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid 4Th axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0125
185. ation mode B Switching from the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode The moving instruction must be positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 when the mode is switched from the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode The circular interpolation G02 G03 is not permitted C Switching between tool radius compensation left and tool radius compensation right In general the offset direction is changed from the left to the right or vice versus via offset cancel mode but the direction in positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 can be changed directly regardless of the offset cancel mode and the tool path is as follows Tool center path X Y usually not a straight line rogrammed pat ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya New AN it Start point vec S gd old X Y yecto Programmed path yecto Tool center path Start point Fig 4 5 2 6 G1G41D_X_Y G42D X Y G1G42D X Y GMD X Y D Change of offset value In general the tool offset value is changed in the offset cancel mode when the tool is changed but for positioning GOO and linear interpolation the value can also be changed in the offset mode It is shown as follows Tool center path Tool center path eu vedo XY Programmed path x Programmed path Start point Start point Fig 4 5 2 7 Change of offset value E Positive and negative offset value and the tool center path If the off
186. ative sign is ignored The hole bottom shift amount of Q is a modal value retained in the canned cycle which must be specified carefully because it is also used as the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G87 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G87 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time The canned cycle can only be executed in G17 plane Boring In a block which contains no X Y Z or other additional axes boring is not performed Note The values of Z and R must be specified when the back boring cycle is being programmed In general point Z is located above point R otherwise an alarm occurs
187. axis is shown as Fig 4 4 2 Usually it is programmed by G90 if it is programmed by G91 Z and R are processed according to the specified signs and z G90 absolute instruction G91 incremental instruction e x f f F Lp Z 0 t Z 0 qe 1 T S R B Point R Z Point R i E yo N Point Z Point Z Absolute Relative A B Fig 4 4 2 B Return to initial level in canned cycle G98 G99 After the tool reaches the bottom of a hole it may return to the point R level or the initial level These operations can be specified by G98 and G99 Generally G99 is used for the 1st drilling operation and G98 for the last drilling operation The initial level does not change even if the drilling is performed in G99 mode The following figure illustrates the operations of G98 and G99 G98 is the system default mode G98 return to initial level G99 return to point R level Initial level Initial level Point R Fig 4 4 3 60 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code The following symbols are used for the canned cycle illustration gt Positioning rapid traverse GO Cutting feed linear interpolation G1 m Manual feed Offset rapid traverse GO Dwell Fig 4 4 4 Canned cycle comparison table G22 G89 ES ag kel a e yo m ch z 3 ya Table 4 4 3 G code Driling Z
188. be executed This function is for checking a program e MACHINE Note The machine position and coordinate position are inconsistent after key HD js pressed to execute the program Therefore it is required to perform machine zero return operation after the execution 7 8 MST lock 9 MST In AUTO mode press key MS LOCK that the indicator on the panel lights up means MST lock state is entered In this state M S and T codes are not executed This function is used together with Machine Lock to check a program Note MOO M01 MO2 M30 M98 M99 are executed even in MST lock state 7 9 Feedrate and rapid speed override in Auto run In AUTO mode the feedrate and rapid traverse speed can be overridden by the system In auto run the feedrate override which is divided into 21 gears can be selected by pressing D 00 4 7N keys WM Wh W Press key WW 96 once the feedrate override increases by one V gear 10 till 200 Press key WW once the feedrate override decreases by one gear 10 If the override is set to Fo whether the axes are stopped is set by bit parameter NO 12 4 and If the 244 Chapter 7 Auto Operation axes are not stopped when the override is set to 0 the actual rapid traverse speed is set by data parameter P93 common to all axes e e e e WFO Ww25 A50 Vv10096 In auto run press keys ES gu nn l to select the rapid traverse speed with gears Fo 25 50 and 100 For 218MC H
189. before the digits sometimes Address Figure Word Fig 2 1 3 1 General structure of a word An address is one of the English letters from A Z It specifies the meaning of the digits behind it In this system the addresses and their meanings as well as their ranges are shown in figure 2 1 3 1 Sometimes an address may bear different meanings based on different preparatory functions When an address is used more than one time in the same instruction whether an alarm is issued is set by bit parameter NO 32726 Table 2 1 3 1 O0 age Phgamname N 0 999 Sequence number 8 0 9999 999 S Dwell time NE AE 99999 9999 99999 9999 mm Y coordinate address 99999 9999 99999 9999 mm Z coordinate address E 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 Arc radius angle displacement mm 99999 9999 99999 9999 mm R plane in canned cycle 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 Arc center vector in X axis relative to start mm point Chapter 2 Part Program Configuration 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 Arc center vector in Y axis relative to start 99999999 9999 99999999 9999 Arc center vector in Z axis relative to start 0 99999 mm min Federate per minute J K F 0 001 500 mmv r Federate per revolution Set by parameters Spindle speed 00 04 Multi gear spindle output T Set by parameters Tool function M Set by parameters Miscellaneous function output program execution process subprogram call 0 99
190. between a variable and a constant and must be enclosed with brackets An expression can replace a variable gt Operator Operators each consists of two letters are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one is greater or smaller than the other one 144 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Table 4 7 4 2 2 Operators Greater than gt Greater than or equal to 2 A g Smaller than or equal to x gt Typical program The program below calculates the sum of numerical value 1 to 10 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya O9500 411 0 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum 42 1 Initial value of the variable as an addend N1 IF 1 GE 10 GOTO 2 Transfers to N2 when the addend is greater than or equal to 10 1 1 2 Calculation to find the sum 1 2 1 The next addend GOTO 1 Traverse to N1 N2 M30 Program end 4 Loop WHILE statement Specify a conditional expression behind WHILE when the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed otherwise program execution proceeds to the block after END WHILE conditional expression DO m m 1 2 3 If the condition is satisfied Program If the condition is not satisfied END m When the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed Otherwise program execution proceeds to the block after END This kind of instructio
191. boring of a 95 hole Return position 250 Initial position Unit MM 4 0 T11 T15 T31 i 200 Fig 4 4 22 1 The values of offset No 11 No 15 and No 31 are set to 200 190 and 150 respectively The program is as follows NOUT G92 X0 YO ZO Coordinate system set at reference point N002 G90 GOO Z250 T11 M6 Tool change NO003 G43 ZO H11 Tool length compensation at the initial point 98 N004 S300 M3 NO005 G99 G81 X400 Y 350 Z 153 R 97 F120 NOOG6 Y 550 return N007 G98 Y 750 Positioning then hole 3 drilling and initial level S return M u en N008 G99 X1200 Positioning then hole Z4 driling and point R level return C m a N009 Y 550 Positioning then hole 5 drilling and point R level K return S N010 G98 Y 350 Positioning then hole 6 driling and initial level z return d N011 GOO XO YO M5 Reference point return then spindle stop d N012 G49 Z250 T15 M6 N013 G43 ZO H15 N014 S200 M3 N015 G99 G82 X550 Y 450 Z 130 R 97 P30 F70 N016 G98 Y 650 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Spindle start Positioning then hole 1 drilling Positioning then hole 2 drilling and point R level Tool length compensation cancel then tool change Initial level tool length compensation Spindle start Positioning then hole 7 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 8 drilling and initial level return N017 G99 X1050
192. builder s manual for the direction of the machine zero reference point 250 Chapter 10 Edit Operation CHAPTER 10 EDIT OPERATION 10 1 Program edit D The edit for part programs should be operated in Edit mode Press key EDIT to enter Edit mode Press key to enter program page and press soft key IR PROGRAM to enter the program editting and modification page see fig 10 1 1 G92 X0 YO Z N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N1 8 Z2 3 N126 X795 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X795 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 08 48 43 DATA Mid PATH 1 St L jew leese serie sl Press P to enter the next page Press P to enter the next page Press 4 to return to the last page Fig 10 1 1 z ag N Gi e m T p e The replacement cut copy paste reset operations etc can be done by pressing the corresponding soft keys The program switch must be turned on before program editting See Section 3 5 2 Parameter and program switch page in this manual for its operation Note 1 A program contains no more than 200 000 lines Note 2 As is shown in fig 10 1 1 if there is more than 1 sign f a
193. button to ensure the coordinate position is correct In general the emergency stop signal is a normal closed signal When the contact point is open the system immediately enters into the emergency stop state and emergently stops the machine The connection for the emergency stop signal is as follows 24V eb Emergency stop switch ESP Fig 2 3 2 1 177 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sx zz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 2 3 3 Feed hold Users can suspend the execution pressing key during the machine running Please note that the execution is not suspended in rigid tapping instructions and cycle instructions until the current instruction is executed 2 4 Cycle start and feed hold The keys GE SIN and are used for the program start and dwell operations in Auto mode MDI mode and DNC modes Whether the external start and dwell is used is set by PLC address K5 1 2 5 Overtravel protection Overtravel protection must be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the overtravel of the X Y or Z axis 2 5 1 Hardware overtravel protection The overtravel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the machine X Y and Z axes respectively If the overtravel occurs the moving axis decelerates and stops after it touches the limit switch Meanwhile the overtravel alarm is issued Deceleration and stop Limit switch
194. cel of the tool length offset otherwise the length offset will be set up or cancelled at the current point Therefore please ensure a safe height in the Z axis when using G49 to prevent tool collision and workpiece damage 5 G53 G28 or G30 in tool length offset mode While G53 G28 or G30 is specified in the tool length offset mode the offset vector of the tool length offset axis is cancelled after the tool is moved to a specified position cancelled at the specified position in G53 cancelled at the reference point in G28 G30 but the modal code display is not switched to G49 and the axes except the tool length offset axis are not cancelled If G53 and G49 are in the same block all the length offsets of the axes are cancelled after the specified position is moved to if G28 or G30 is in the same block with G49 the length offsets of all the axes are cancelled after the reference point is moved to The cancelled tool length offset vectors will be restored in the next buffered block containing compensation axes 101 ES e ag kel a e yo e ch 3 ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 6 Example for tool length compensation A Tool length compensation boring hole 2 1 2 3 B H01 z offset value 4 ES Y g bech a c Unit MM yo e eh z o E LC 13 120 gt x Actual position
195. cessing the contents of which are shown as follows table 3 4 3 3 210 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting Table 3 4 3 5 Prompt message Handling 1 Once key operation completed Operation succeeded Msn completed The input output operation of the macro One key operation completed program has been 2 system prompts Copy after performed but the Skip the input output operation of this file modifying parameters parameters concerned in the system have not been set The update for the ladder and ladder Transmission is One key operation completed i l parameters has been completed please system alarm Parameters taking e executed which turn on the power effect after power off are modified l requires power on again again l I Interrupt the File reading failed File error input output operation z 5 File writing failed File error E ui input output operation Interrupt the n File copy failed File error l input output operation e The part program is Interrupt the cargo o Diedse USE DNG greater than 4M input output operation T SS R 8 Insufficient storage capacity The storage capacity is Interrupt the not enough input output operation S 6 File LADCHI TXT is invalid after it is transmitted to the system until the power is turned off and on again 3 4 4 Setting and modification for password authority To prevent the part programs and CNC parameters from ma
196. chining function are available Flexible and extendable functions available to modifiy machines according to customers production requirements 1 3 Type signification GSK 218MC m Assembling mode standard integrated panel is omitted H Horizontal assembling V Vertical assembling 218MC series machining center CNC system Indicating GSK Equipment CNC CO LTD Book1 Programming D Z lt D O a D BOOKI Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual d 400g 3 S g ch fa Chapter 1 Overview CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Tool movement along workpiece contour interpolation 1 Tool movement along a straight line Point C Program command G01 Y20 F100 moves from point A to point B X50 Y50 moves from point B to point C Point B E g p e e UG e e z ya Program origin X0 YO Point A Fig 1 1 1 2 Tool movement along an arc Program command G01 X100 Y50 F500 moves from point A to point B G03 X50 Y100 R50 moves from point B to point C Point B Program origin X0 YO Point A Fig 1 1 2 The function of moving a tool along a straight line or an arc is called interpolation The programming instructions such as G01 G02 and G03 are called preparatory function which is used to specify interpolation types for the CNC device e g p e e UG ka e z z
197. cle and return from R level M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4820 is set to 1 and G33 G34 cannot be specified in the same block or G33 G34 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 4 4 5 Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle G35 G36 Format G35 G98 G99 X Y Z R J L U D F K G36 Function They are used for fine milling within a rectangle by the specified width and direction and the tool returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G35 CCW inner rectangular groove finish milling cycle G36 CW inner rectangular groove finish milling cycle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R R reference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular width in X axis ranging from tool diameter 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Rectangular width in Y axis ranging from tool diameter 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative L Distance from milling start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging from tool radius 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative U Corner arc radius No corner transition if it is omitted Alarm is issued if O U tool radius 70 Chapter 4
198. clear leet ABS down key gt Enter MPG interrupt clear ALL interface X Y Z down key gt Cancel SYS interface OFFSET setting MDI mode input value gt Enter H compensation num X Z gt Enter Ln 001 135 peque 0 920 EM o o ve Fig 3 9 2 The various operation steps on different pages are described in HELP OPRT page you can get help in the HELP page if you are unfamiliar with some operations 222 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 ALARM page In HELP page press soft key ALARM to enter this page See fig 3 9 3 NO MEANING Hun Parameter been modified that must power off 661 File open fail Banane Data input overflow 463 Program number exists BBB4 Digit or character input without address Modify program Bagn5 Address with no data but another address or EOB code Modify program BBBB Character input wrongly for address ore or more 7 input Modify program 8887 wrongly input for address 2 or more input Modify program Bana Program too large use DNC Hu Character can t be used Modify program HIH G code wrongly used Modify program HI Feeding speed not specified or improper Modify program 12 Insufficient memory 4613 Too many Files En 1 359 17 08 58 DATA El PATH 1 aa o 5s ow MEM 0 r Fig 3 9 3 The meaning and handling for each alarm number is described in this page 4 G cod
199. compensation B 0 Start up type in tool radius compensation A 1 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and cancel compensation in tool radius compensation 0 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and reserve compensation in tool radius compensation ODI 1 Tool radius compensation value set by diameter 0 Tool radius compensation value set by radius Standard setting 1000 0101 CCN system parameter number 0 411 CNI G39 PUIT OIM 289 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual OIM 1 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change enabled 0 Metric and inch conversion automatic tool offset change disabled 1 Distance and speed parameters input are consistent with display unit and E CNC input unit 0 Distance and speed parameters units and display unit are metric units G39 1 Corner rounding effective in radius compensation 0 Corner rounding ineffective in radius compensation CNI 1 Interference check enabled in radius compensation 0 Interference check disabled in radius compensation Standard setting 0110 0000 oystem parameter number 0 42 RD2 RD1 RD1 1 Tosetthe retraction direction of G76 G87 negative 0 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 positive RD2 1 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 Y 0 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 X Sta
200. cters in the block by the new one Note This replacement operation is only for characters but not for an entire block 10 1 8 Rename of a program otep for renaming the current program to another one 259 Or JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page and specify a program name with the cursor c Press address ke to key in the new name ALTER d Press key to complete the renaming 10 1 9 Program restart The function is used in the event of an accident such as tool fracture system restarting after power off or emergency stop during program execution After the accident is eliminated the system returns to the program breakpoint by program restart to continue the program execution and then it retracts to original point by Dry Run Steps for program restart are as follows 1 Solve the machine accident such as tool change offset changing machine zero return Op PROG 2 In lt AUTO gt mode press key FESTART on the panel CG e ag N e x t E e PROGRAM 3 Press key sem to enter the program page then press soft key RSTR to enter program restart subpage Fig 10 1 9 1 ABSOLUTE DISTANCE REM DIST 61 680 m X Toydf m X 63 407 mm 2 Y 48 490 m 47 897 m Y 0 593 mn 6 186 mm 5 480 mm Z 0 706 mm LOADED MODA
201. cursor one column to the right If it is located at the end of the line the cursor moves to the beginning of the next line t d Press key to move the cursor one column to the left If the cursor is at the beginning of the line it moves to the end of the last line to scroll screen upward to move the cursor to the last D e Press ke screen H f Press key 5 to move the screen downward to move the cursor to the next screen HOME g Press key ES to move the cursor to the beginning of the line where it is located 255 Or JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual h Press keys to return the cursor to the beginning of the program i Press key to move the cursor to the end of the line where it is located j Press keys T 10 1 1 5 Insertion deletion and modification of a word to move the cursor to the end of the program PROGRAM Select lt EDIT gt mode press key pow to display the program then locate the cursor to the position to be edited 1 Word insertion After inputting the data press key L to insert the data to the left of the cursor 2 Word deletion CG e ag N e x t E e DELETE Locate the cursor to the word to be deleted press key ser to delete the word where the cursor is located 3 Word modification ALTER Move the cursor to the place to be modified input the new contents then press key to replace the
202. cy stop 0 To reserve G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop C14 1 To clear G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop C15 1 Toclear G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop 288 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter setting 0 3 7 SOC RSC SCRW SCRW 1 To perform pitch compensation 0 Not perform pitch compensation 1 To calculate G96 spindle speed according to current coordinate during GO rapid positioning 0 To calculate G96 spindle speed according to end point coordinate during GO rapid positioning SOC 1 G96 spindle speed clamped behind spindle override 0 G96 spindle speed clamped before spindle override Standard setting 0000 0000 RSC oystem parameter number 0 3 8 PG2 PG1 SAR SAR 1 To detect the spindle speed in position signal 0 Not detect the spindle speed in position signal PG2 PG1 Gear ratio of spindle and position encoder 00 for 1 1 01 for 2 1 10 for 4 1 11 for 8 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 03 9 TLC TLC 1 Tool length compensation type B 0 Tool length compensation type A Standard setting 0000 0001 oystem parameter number 0 40 ODI CCN SUP SUP 1 Start up type in tool radius
203. d 1014 CTR address repeated 0000 address CTR address repeated 0000 EE LBL is wrong JMP is used again between JMP and LBL 306 Imombtemwoksmoue O OOOO 1017 Unsupported network exists Change the adder diagram 309 CTR acaressrepeated YS 1020 _____Noparameterinfuncionalinstuston 03 PLO stops automaticaly by CNC when PLC execution overtime 192 _____Pleaseinputthe name deele 1025 _Adaress or constant red instruction parameter is out ofrange oa mece roer OOOO OO 1025 _____Functionalinstucion outputwonay 192 NETWkimgebeyndtesuporedrng 1027 Same output adress is usod in anotherplacs 326 Appendix l Alarm List wa Femmawwg mm eiert ladder ciagambengused Lamp Fever nemo O Gs Message data area fl Please reduce DEE e Fret level of adder diagram is too large to complete execution on tme RER 1034 Functional instruction DIFU DIFD address is repeated ko 1039 Instruction or network beyond executable area i Functional instruction CALL or SP is wrongly used Correspondence between CALL and SP or between SP and SPE is wrong SP functional instruction is used again between SP and SPE or SP is set before using END2 1041 Level conducting line in parallel with node network i 1042 PLC system parameter file is not loaded Ll 327 er Jd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System
204. d INPUT 2 Key in the password under the corresponding level then press key If the password is correct the message Password is correct is issued by the system 3 Input a new password of 0 6 digits or letters to modify the system password then press 4 After modification move the cursor to the END button by pressing key L then the INPUT page prompts Press INPUT key to confirm the cancellation after key Ei is pressed the page prompts Cancellation is Finished and the cursor returns to the password setting item The password is also automatically cancelled when the power is turned off 3 5 Graphic display Press key to enter the graphic page which consists of two subpages G PARA and EIGRAPH They can be switched between each other by corresponding soft keys 212 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting AXES XY 1 XZ 2 ZX 3 YZ A XYZ 5 ZXY GRPH MOD 0 GRPH CENTER 1 MINSMAX AUTO ERA 0 ON 1 OFF SCALE GRPH CEN X COORDINATE GRPH CEN Y COORDINATE GRPH CEN Z COORDINATE MAX X MAX Y MAX Z MINX MINY MINZ DATA 17 02 14 PATH 1 Ee Fig 3 5 1 1 Graphic parameter page Press soft key G PARA to enter this page see Fig 3 5 1 A Graphic parameter meaning AXIS set drawing plane with 6 selection modes 0 5 as shown in the next line Graphic mode set graphic display mode Automatic erasion Wh
205. d circular interpolation GO2 G03 are specified with the numbers after F code in mm min The tool is moved by the programmed feedrate An override can be applied to the cutting feedrate using the override keys on the operator panel Override range 0 200 In order to prevent mechanical vibration acceleration deceleration is automatically applied at the beginning and the end of the tool movement respectively The acceleration can be set by data parameters P125 P128 The minimum cutting feedrate is set by data parameter P96 and the maximum cutting feedrate in the forecast mode is set by P97 If it is smaller than the lower limit the cutting feedrate is clamped to the lower limit The cutting feedrate in auto mode at power on is set by data parameter P87 The cutting feedrate can be specified by the following two types A Feed per minute G94 it is used to specify the feed amount per minute after F code B Feed per revolution G95 it is used to specify the feed amount per revolution after F code Note When the cutting feedrate is specified with F the system displays the value as an integer If the input value is not an integer the system displays it as an integer obtained after rounding it off but still performs processing using the actual input value If the pitch is specified by F the system displays one decimal point for the input value but still performs processing using the actual input value 157 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Se
206. d for measuring the dimension of a workpiece as well Explanation 1 G31 is a non modal G instruction only effective in the block in which it is specified 2 When tool radius compensation is being executed if G31 is specified an alarm will occur Therefore the tool radius compensation should be cancelled before G31 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Example The block after G31 is a single axis movement specified by incremental values as Fig 4 2 16 1 shows Skip signal is input here i Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 1 The next block is the single axis movement specified by incremental values The next block after G31 is a single axis movement specified by absolute values as shown in fig 4 2 16 2 Y100 G31 G90 X200 F100 Skip signal is input here b X200 Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 2 The next block is a single axis movement specified by absolute values 51 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual The next block after G31 is two axis movement specified by absolute values as shown in fig 4 2 16 3 Skip signal is input here 300 100 Actual motion Motion without skip signal e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Fig 4 2 16 3 The next block is two axis movement
207. d for other purposes or else it may cause serious danger Or JIS Warnings and Precautions Declaration e We try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this manual However it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too many possibilities Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable Warning Before installing connecting programming and operating the product please read this manual and the manual provided by the machine tool builder carefully and operate the product according to these manuals Otherwise the operation may cause damage to the product and machine tool or even cause personal injury Caution e The functions and specifications e g precision and speed described in this manual are only for this product itself For those CNC machine tools installing this product the actual function configuration and specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders Moreover the function configuration and specifications of the CNC machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool builder All specifications and designs in this manual are subject to change without notice MI BI AE A e GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual oafety notes B Transportation and storage Do not pile up the packi
208. d to Step MPG MANUAL or Zero Return mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the system will execute deceleration and stop 248 Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation CHAPTER9 ZERO RETURN OPERATION 9 1 Concept of mechanical zero machine zero The machine coordinate system is the inherent coordinate system of the machine The origin of the machine coordinate system is called mechanical zero or machine zero which is also called reference point in this manual It is usually fixed at the maximum stroke point of X axis Y axis and Z axis This origin is determined as a fixed point after the design manufacture and adjustment of the machine As the machine zero is unknown at power on the auto or manual machine zero return is usually performed There are two types of zero return 1 with one revolution signal 2 without one revolution signal both of which are set by bit parameter NO 676 The zero return without one revolution signal in the motor is classified into type A and type B zero return which are set by bit parameter NO 6 7 Zero return using stepper motor without encoder Type A Machine zero return direction uoneJod z ooq Metal inductive block fixed on the slider Explanation As the system performs the machine zero return operation the machine slider is moved in the positive direction The T1 part on the inductive block touches the proximity switch first and the ENE NG system decelerates No
209. data items saved in the system disk to a U disk output simultaneously It can copy multiple data items to the system disk from a U disk One key input PY j y simultaneously 3 Press and to select the target file press and to switch between data item directory and file directory CG e ag N e x t E e 4 Press corresponding soft keys to perform operations such as backup recovery output input one key backup one key recovery one key output and one key input Note 1 When I O channel is set to U Disk the functions of soft keys Data Output and Data Input are the same 2 When performing data output input operation ensure the setting for the I O channel is correct When using a U disk set the I O channel to 2 when using transmission software via PC set the I O channel to O or 1 3 The contents of One Key Output Input are determined by password authorities See table 3 4 3 1 for the correspondence between data items and password authorities 4 Related parameters Bit parameter N0 54Z7 for setting whether one key output input is valid for part programs in debugging level authority or above Bit parameter NO 27 0 for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program numbers from 80000 89999 is forbidden Bit parameter NO 27 4 for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program numbers from 90000 99999 is forbidden 5 There are concerned operation prompts in the system during data pro
210. e it is effective only in the block specifying the machine coordinate system Absolute value G90 should be specified for G53 If G53 is specified in incremental mode G91 the instruction G91 will be ignored i e G53 is still in G90 mode without changing G91 mode The tool can be specified to move to a special position on the machine e g using G53 to write a moving program to move the tool to the tool changing position Note When G53 is specified the tool radius compensation and tool length offset are cancelled temporarily They will resume in the next compensation axis block buffered 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 Format G92X Y Z Function for setting the floating workpiece coordinate system The current tool absolute coordinate values in the new floating workpiece coordinate system are specified by 3 instruction parameters This instruction does not cause the movement axis to move Explanation A G92 floating coordinate system Machin r y achine zero Origin of the machine coordinate system Fig 4 2 11 1 39 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 As shown in Fig 4 2 11 1 the corresponding origin of the G92 floating coordinate system is the value in machine coordinate system which is not related to the workpiece coordinate system G92 setting is effective in the following conditions 1 Before the workpiece coordinate system is called 2
211. e DIR page move the cursor to find the target program c Press key for confirmation 2 Program loading in Edit mode E EDIT a Press key to enter the Edit mode e e ag N e m t c PROGRAM b Press key mon to enter the DIR page move the cursor to find the target program INPUT C Press key for confirmation AUTO d Press key to enter the Auto mode 7 2 Autorun start After selecting the program using the two methods in section 7 1 above press key 2 to execute the program automatically The execution of the program can be viewed by switching to lt POSITION gt MONI GRAPH etc pages The program execution is started from the line where the cursor is located so it is recommended to check whether the cursor is located at the program to be executed and whether the modal values are correct before pressing key D If the cursor is not located at the start line from which the 241 CG e ag N e t E e Gr dd Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual program is started press key ES and then key 2 to run the program automatically from the start line Note The workpiece coordinate system and reference offset values cannot be modified during program execution in Auto mode 7 3 Auto run stop In Auto run to stop the program being automatically executed the system provides five methods 1 Program s
212. e Press key ES to enter the MPG mode In this mode the machine movement is controlled by a handwheel 6 1 1 Moving amount selection The moving increment will be displayed on the position page if any of keys e e e VUFO W25 W50 V v 5096 0 991 _ 0 01 o is pressed e g if key Se is pressed the MPG increment 0 100 See Fig 6 1 1 1 is displayed in POSITION page FEED F Omm min MPG INC 100 FEED OVRD 10095 e mm 40 80 120 1680 200 p L F 25 5 188 eT SP 8 Orpm Y Z e Z P nm 5 100 Sp 66 78 op op 188 118 120 pmM Z Kl HO ns COMMAND T NO TOOO00 OFFSET H 08 DOOO0 Gu G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0000 0000 G11 G98 G15 Gu G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 0O DATA le 02 ge E EC a ABS ALL PMONI m Fig 6 1 1 1 6 1 2 Selection of moving axis and direction In MPG mode select the moving axis to be controlled by the handwheel and press the corresponding key then you can move the axis by the handwheel In MPG mode if X axis is to be controlled by the handwheel press key then you can move the X axis by rotating the handwheel The feed direction is controlled by handwheel rotation direction See the manual provided by the 237 e e g N e t E e CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation
213. e post acceleration deceleration 0 Cutting feed type pre acceleration deceleration CBLS 1 Pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed S 0 Pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed lineat CLLE 1 Post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed exponential 0 Post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear HLOE 1 JOGrunning type exponential 0 JOG running type linear WLOE 1 MPG running type exponential 283 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0 MPG running type linear CALT 1 Cutting feed acceleration clamping 0 Cutting feed acceleration not clamping CPCT 1 To control the in position precision in cutting feed 0 Not control the in position precision in cutting feed Standard setting 1010 0101 oystem parameter number 0 1 8 RVCS RVIT RVIT 1 To execute next block after compensation as backlash is over value allowable 0 To execute next block during compensation as backlash is over value allowable RVCS 1 Backlash compensation type ascending or decending 0 Backlash compensation type fixed frequency Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 19 IOV ALMS ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX ALMX 1 High level effective of X axis driver alarm 0 Low level effective of X axis driver alarm ALMY 1 High level effective of Y axis driver alarm
214. e 8 display keys for operation pages and 1 display key for the help page on the panel in this system See the figure below Graphic page Alarm page Help page PLC page Diagnosis page SYSTEM PROGRAM SETTING System page Position page Program page Setting page Prese this ke Subpages for graphic parameters and graphic display can Graphic Y be viewed by switching corresponding soft keys The to enter graphic l page ade center size and ratio for the graph are set using graphic pag parameters Press this key i Subpages for a variety of alarm message can be viewed by Alarm page to enter alarm SLE switching corresponding soft keys page Help paae hus E Help message about the system can be viewed in this page P P by switching corresponding soft keys page 169 Or JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Press this key The version of the PLC ladder and the configuration of PLC page to enter PLC system I O can be viewed on this page and the modification page for PLC ladder is available in MDI mode Diagnosis plese iis KEY The states of I O signals on the system side can be viewed to enter S ER l page in this page by switching corresponding soft keys diagnosis page Press this key Subpages for tool offsets parameters macro variables and System l l Ve i Se to enter system screw pitch can be displayed by switching corresponding pag page soft keys Positi
215. e check S N4 G01 X50 Example 2 The outside is the forbidden area bit parameter NO 1122071 N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30120 J10 K15 Setting point A 50 40 30 and point B 20 10 15 for the tool forbidden area N2 G01 X10 Y 10 Z 10 Linear interpolation to 10 10 10 N3 G13 Cancelling the stored stroke check N4 G01 X50 3 Check point for the forbidden area Before programming for the forbidden area please confirm the check point the top of the tool nose or tool holder As is shown in Fig 2 6 4 if the check point is A tool nose the distance a should be set as the data for stored function check if the check point is B tool holder the distance b should be set as the data for stored function check When the check point is A tool nose and the tool lengths vary with the tools the forbidden area should be created according to the longest tool thus ensuring the safe operation 181 er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 z e ag N i x Z E e 5 6 T 8 182 Tool position after reference point return Forbidden area for tool Fig 2 6 4 Setting forbidden area Tool forbidden area overlap The forbidden area can be created by overlap as is shown in the following figure Forbidden area for tool Fig 2 6 5 Setting overlapping forbidden area Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the mach
216. e compensation cancel mode is changed for compensation mode by G41 instruction is called start At the end of the block the tool center is compensated by the tool radius that is vertical to the path of the next block from P1 to P2 The offset value is specified by DO7 i e the offset number is set to 7 and G41 specifies the tool path compensation left After the offset starts when the workpiece figure is programmed as P1 P2 P9 P10 P11 the tool path compensation is performed automatically Example for tool path compensation program G92 X0 YO Z0 1 N1 G90 G17 GO G41 D7 X250 Y550 Offset value must be preset using offset number 2 N2 G1 Y900 F150 3 N3 X450 4 N4 G3 X500 Y1150 R650 5 N5 G2 X900 R 250 6 N6 G3 X950 Y900 R650 7 N7 G1 X1150 0 1 M Mm M 8 N8Y550 9 N9 X700 Y650 10 N10 X250 Y550 11 N11 GO G40 X0 YO Om 108 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code d N fe NV NW O Z Y j 250 d 1 C1 700 1300 l P5 900 1 150 l z 650R h 650R e Me P4 500 1150 Z O C2 1 150 1550 S OQ 5 P6 950 900 UA l l gt l j 120909900 p3 450 900 p7 1150 900 g9 pels l Oi P9 700 650 150 550 250 550 Ee del mE unc ctt l ya Mr MEME n ee 7 4 4 5 Y axis del 7 Ze L X axis Q Start point programmed origin Fig 4
217. e coordinate system 3 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate system 5 Workpiece coordinate system 6 Unidirectional positioning Exact stop mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode H C1 LA Written in a program G Ql D 3 37 38 1 3 51 G55 G56 Written in a block usually placed at the program beginning T G57 G 58 G59 00 01 G60 X_Y_Z_ 2 r G61 G62 G63 oO G64 NO G2 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Whether high speed and Group Format high Function code precision z mode is e valid 2l true or zx false ET Macro program go Sn G68X Y R Coordinate rotation R G69 G69 T Coordinate rotation 5 cancel E G73 G73 KARTS Peck drilling cycle Q N I Ke x N A U Ti n D St 2 Q mpe Q Kei 2 5 ie Q lt O D G74 G76 G76 XYZQRPFK Fine boring cycle G80 aen in a block with other programs Canned cycle cancel G81 XYZRF_ Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G82 G82 XYZRPF Drilling cycle counter 09 Soning yan E ET Ges es xYzmr Bong ce SS ear XY ZRF EL Bermgeyde e eer EE F Back boring cycle G86 Gm xyz RPF F Bongoyo Ges GE XY ZRP F EL Boma es 03 Written into blocks SE programming G91 Incremental programming system Sung T Feed per revolution G96 Goes Constant surface speed control cutting s
218. e corner is preceded by a start up block or followed by a block including G41 or G42 3 Override for inner corners is not performed if the offset is zero 129 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 7 Macro G code 4 7 4 Custom macro The functions realized by a group of instructions can be prestored into memory like a subprogram using an representing instruction If the instruction is written into the program all these functions can be realized This group of instructions is called custom macro body and the representing instruction is called custom macro instruction Moreover the custom macro body is also called macro program for short and the custom macro instruction is also called macro calling instruction Custom macro body e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Main program Custom macro instruction A group of instructions for a certain function Fig 4 7 1 1 Variables can be used in custom macro body Operation can be performed between them and they can be assigned values by macro instructions 4 7 2 Macro variables The common CNC instructions and the variables operation as well as the transfer instructions can be used in the custom macro body The custom macro body begins with a program number and ends with M99 O0066 Program number G65 HOT 3 Operation instruction G90 GOO X 101 CNC instruction using variables Tra
219. e current tool in the relative coordinate system by pressing soft key REL See fig 3 1 1 1 FEED F Qmm min EE EES H FEED OVRD 100 e mm 46 88 126 3158 2a C FER 25 50 100 ee SP 8 Orpm een Y cl e 89 mm 90000 Ej 100 D 66 76 880 Op 188 118 128 E E E ABV mn Tool T o COMMAND T NO TOOO00 OFFSET H2000 DOOO0 GOO0 G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 Gu G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 00 00 DATA 1 1 1 09 05 55 LH 3 ABS ALL PMONI m Fig 3 1 1 1 2 Absolute coordinate It displays the current position of the tool in absolute coordinate system by pressing soft key ABS see Fig 3 1 1 2 183 e e g N e t E e Or W418 ts CG g N e T E e GSK218MC Series H 10095 BREET FEED OVBD A 1 Ce Ce 0 40 pp 120 160 200 FO 25 50 100 Y a e 89 mm S 00000 10096 58 68 78 88 op 188 118 128 Ee mm Z cm e A480 m COMMAND T NO T 000 OFFSET H2000 DAOA PART CNT 0001 0000 CUT TIME 000 00 00 G G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 09 06 15 DATA El PATH 1 Ld BE 29 BM ve l Fig 3 1 1 2 3 ALL It enters ALL page by pressing soft key ALL displaying the following items A The position in relative coordinate system B The position in absolute coordinate system C The position i
220. e executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified 92 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the taping axis is changed If the taping axis is changed in the rigid mode an alarm No 206 will be issued In feed per minute mode Thread pitch feedrate spindle speed z Federate of Z axis thread lead X spindle speed In feed per revolution mode em Thread lead feedrate Federate of Z axis thread lead c yo A Example z Spindle speed1000r min thread lead1 0mm z then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 21000mm min zi G00 X120 Y 100 Positioning MIS M29 1000 Rigid mode specification G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restrictions
221. e from the milling start point to the milling circle center ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one D Tool radius number ranging from 0 256 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool radius value is obtained by the given number K Number of repeats Cycle process D Rapid positioning to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 5 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by the path of arc2 and arc 3 6 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to instruction G98 or G99 e es ag p e e go m e 3 z ya Instruction path G26 CCW outer circle finish milling cycle G32 CW Mor d finish milling cycle Y GES Le 4 1 X Y X p M i KY N Feed Circle center KY Feed Outer circle borde point Outer circle border point Tool center path Tool center path Fig 4 4 3 1 Explanation In outer circle finish milling the interpolation directions of the transition arc and fine milling arc are different The interpolation direction in the instruction means the one of the fine milling Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled as follows by the canned cycle instruction G26 67 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series M
222. e operator panel F Es Feed amount per spindle revolution Cmm rev or inch rev Fig 7 2 2 1 Feed per revolution 158 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code Note When the spindle speed is low feedrate fluctuation may occur The lower the spindle speed is the more frequently the feedrate fluctuation occurs 7 3 Tangential speed control The cutting feed usually controls the speed in the tangential direction of the contour path to make it reach the specified speed value Start point End point End point Linear interpolation Circular interpolation Fig 7 3 1 F The speed along the tangent F3 Fx F F Fx The speed along X axis Fy The speed along Y axis Fz The speed along Z axis 7 4 Keys for feedrate override The feedrate in MANUAL mode and AUTO mode can be overridden by the override keys on the operator panel The override ranges from 0 200 21 gears with 10 per gear In AUTO mode if the feedrate override is adjusted to zero the feeding is stopped by the system with O cutting override displayed The execution is continued if the override is readjusted 7 5 Auto acceleration deceleration The system enables the motor to perform acceleration deceleration control at the beginning and the end of the movement which thus obtains a stable start and stop In addition the automatic acceleration deceleration can also be applied when the moving speed is changed the speed thus can be changed steadily Ther
223. e page In HELP page press soft key G CODE to enter this page See fig 3 9 4 GOA G01 G82 G83 G04 G10 G11 G12 G13 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G32 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G49 G50 G51 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G62 G61 G63 G64 G65 G68 G69 G73 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G96 G97 G98 G99 e g N e t E Linear interpolation DI PATH 1 MDI LC E Ssmo ow o ESA tr Fig 3 9 4 The definitions of G codes used in system are shown in G code page Move the cursor to the G code to be viewed then its definition is shown at the lower left corner of the page fig 3 9 4 If you INPUT need to know the format and usage of a G code press key on the panel after selecting the G code Press key to return See fig 3 9 5 223 Or JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Rapid positioning Ga Instruction format 690 691 GBB X Y Z Function DH instruction tool traverse via linear interpolation to workpiece coordinate system position specified by absolute or incremental instruction Explanation In absolute programming parameter represents programming final coordinate in incremental programming parameter represents axes moving distance and direction Restriction B codes of GAG G01 DZ or GAS are not allowed in a same block P
224. e subprogram with instruction M99 M99 format as above 2 2 2 Subprogram call The subprogram is called by the call instruction of the main program or subprogram The format Chapter 2 Part Program Configuration of the subprogram is as follows M98 PULIDO LOTTI TO e ff Repetition count Subprogram number Fig 2 2 2 1 e f no repetition count is specified the subprogram is called just once Example M98 P1002L5 It means a subprogram with number 1002 is repeatedly called 5 times e Execution sequence of calling a subprogram from a main program Main program 3 Subprogram NO010 010100 N0020 en N1020 NOO30 M98 P10100L3 N1030 N0040 N1040 N0050 M98 P1010 N1050 NO060 N1060 en M99 Fig 2 2 2 2 A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main program calls a subprogram Note 1 An alarm is given when no subprogram number specified with address P is detected Note 2 Subprograms with number 90000 99999 are the system reserved programs When users call such kind of subprograms the system can execute them but not display them 2 2 3 Program end The program begins with a program name and ends with M02 M30 or M99 see Fig 2 2 2 2 For the end code M02 M30 or M99 detected in program execution If M02 or MO3 is executed in a program the program is terminated and the reset state is entered M30 can be set by bit parameter N0O 33 4 to return to the
225. e used if it is negative F Cutting feedrate G88 G98 G88 G99 Spindle CCW ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Les Les e T Initial level o gi Spindle CCW Point R Point R level Spindle stop emm Point Z Point Z Fig 4 4 17 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R Boring is performed from point R to point Z When boring is completed a dwell is performed then the spindle is stopped The tool is manually retracted from point Z at the hole bottom to point R in G99 or the initial level in G98 and the spindle is rotated CCW Before specifying G88 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G88 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be sto
226. e with unit of ms The min value of the parameter can be set by number parameter P281 and the max value by data parameter P282 It is used for specifying the cutting federate 58 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Parameter Designation NONE Explanation The number of repeats is specified in K which is only effective in the block in which it is specified If it is omitted the default is 1 time The maximum drilling times are 99999 When the value is negative its absolute value is executed When the value is 0 only the mode is changed with no drilling operation executed Restrictions The canned cycle G instructions are modal ones which remain effective till they are cancelled by a G code for cancelling it gt G80 and G codes in group 01 are used for cancelling the canned cycle Once the hole machining data in canned cycle is specified it is retained till the cycle is cancelled All the required hole machining data should be specified at the beginning of the canned cycle and only the updated data needs to be specified in the subsequent canned cycle Note 1 The feedrate specified by F remains effective even if the canned cycle is cancelled Note 2 The scaling for Z axis cutting axis direction is invalid in the canned cycle Note 3 In single block mode the canned cycle uses the 3 stage machining type i e positioning R level initial level Note 4 In the canned cycle when the system bit parame
227. een two lines or a line and an arc can be processed automatically by the system Tool path after tool radius compensation Workpiece If diameters of tools are stored in the CNC tool compensation list in advance the tool can be moved by tool radius apart from the machining part figure by calling different radius compensations according to the program This function is called the tool radius compensation 1 7 Tool movement range stroke The travel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the machine X Y and Z axes respectively If overtravel occurs the moving axis decelerates and stops after it hits the limit switch with the overtravel alarm issued at the same time This function is usually called hardware limit The safe operation range for the tool can also be set by parameters If the tool exceeds the range the system stops all the moving axes with the overtravel alarm given This function is called stroke check namely the software limit e ag p a e yo m e z ya d 400g 3 S g ch fa Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Reference point Fig 1 7 1 10 Chapter 2 Part Program Configuration CHAPTER2 PART PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Program configuration ES S A program consists of many blocks and a block consists of man
228. efore the acceleration deceleration needs not to be considered during programming 159 e ag p a e yo m e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Rapid traverse Pre acceleration deceleration 0 lineartype 1 Stype D Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Cutting feed Pre acceleration deceleration 0 lineartype 1 Stype D Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type MANUAL feed Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Set the common time constant for each axis by parameters Speed after interpolation Speed after acceleration deceleration e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Time Speed m Tr Acceleration deceleration time constant for rapid feed data parameter 105 124 speed Tc Acceleration deceleration time constant for cutting feed and manual feed data parameter 125 128 Cutting feed manual feed Fig 7 5 1 7 6 Acceleration deceleration at the corner in a block Example If a block containing only Y movement is followed by a block containing only X movement the latter X block accelerates as the former Y block decelerates The tool path is as follows 160 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code Y An exact stop instruction 1s inserted here o a Programmed path
229. efore the main program ends They are common to each subprogram 147 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTERS MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE The M codes of this machine available for users are listed as follows Table 5 1 Mcoe X Function The program ends and returns to the program M30 beginning the machining number increases by a The program ends and returns to the program od M02 beginning the machining number increases by 1 control Subprogram calling RK we Subprogram ends and returns execution is m M99 repeated ee Tool search instruction during a new tool ed by SE PLC e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Rigid taping Tool judging on the spindle When a move instruction and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block the instructions are executed in either of the following two ways 148 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code 1 Simultaneous execution of the move instruction and miscellaneous function instruction 2 Executing miscellaneous function instructions on completion of the move instruction execution The selection of execution sequence depends on the machine tool builder s specification Refer to the manual provided by the machine builder for details When a numerical value is specified behind address M code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine The machine uses
230. election a Must be specified in a single block mese G22 G22X YZRILWQVDF K CCW inner circular groove rough milling G23 G23X Y ZRILWQVDFK CW inner circular groove rough milling G24X Y ZRI JDFK CCW fine milling cycle G24 F d within a circle G25 G25 X_Y ZRIJDFK F CW fine milling cycle within a circle G26 X_Y ZRIJDFK CCW outer circle G26 finishing cycle T Reference point return detection Reference point return SE point reference point return ali cycle rough milling rough milling rough milling cycle 22 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Whether high speed and high precision mode is valid true or false 13 hale E menm T3 G40 G42 DYZ Right hand tool radius compensation Tool length G43 T compensation in positive direction HZ Tool length G44 Se compensation in negative direction compensation cancel Group Format Function code CW rectangular groove rough milling cycle CCW rectangular outside groove finishing cycle CW rectangular outside groove finishing cycle Corner offset circular interpolation Tool radius compensation cancel Left hand tool radius compensation G G G ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya A LA cO Q N e 6 4 42 4 4 4 B Ql 0 G50 Scaling cancel G G G G G G51X YZP ocaling Machine coordinate system selection Workpiece coordinate system 1 Workpiece coordinate system 2 Workpiec
231. en it is set to 1 the program graphic is erased automatically at next cycle start up after the program is finished ocale set drawing ratio Graphic center set the coordinates corresponding to the LCD center in workpiece coordinate system The maximum and minimum value The scaling and the graphic center are automatically set when the maximum and minimum value of the axis are set Maximum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics Unit 0 0001 mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of X axis the minimum value along X axis in graphics Unit 0 0001 mm 0 0001inch Maximum value of Y axis the maximum value along Y axis in graphics unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of Y axis the minimum value along Y axis in graphics Unit 0 0001 mm 0 0001inch Maximum value of Z axis the maximum value along Z axis in graphics Unit 0 0001 mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of Z axis the minimum value along Z axis in graphics Unit 0 0001 mm 0 0001inch e e g N e t E e B Setting steps for graphic parameters a Move the cursor to the parameter to be set b Key in the value required INPUT c Press key to confirm it 2 Graphic page Press soft key EJGRAPH to enter this page See Fig 3 5 2 213 Or JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual p3e xm Ya za N188 G G38 X74 295 Y 58 N166 Z38 M3 51500 MG N188 Z8 3 3 N126 X75 425 Y
232. er the program page select the program to be copied using the cursor in DIR subpage CG e ag N e x t E e and press key to enter the program display page c Press address key o and input the new program name d Press soft key COPY to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new program e Return to DIR can view the new copied program name The copy of a program can also be done in the program edit page shown in fig 10 1 1 C 1 Press address key and key in the new program number 2 Press soft key COPY to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new program 3 Return to DIR page to view the new copied program name 10 1 5 Copy and paste of blocks oteps for copying and pasting blocks a Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied 258 Chapter 10 Edit Operation b Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied c Press keys us the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be Copied INSERT d Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press keys _ or soft key PASTE to complete the paste The copy and paste of the blocks can also be done in the program edit page see fig 10 1 1 1 Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied 2 Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied 3 Press soft key COPY to finish copying the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in 4
233. ered The polar coordinate plane is related to the current coordinate plane E g in G91 mode if the current coordinate plane is specified by G17 the components of X axis and Y axis of the current tool position are taken as the origin If the current coordinate plane is specified by G18 the components of Z axis and X axis of the current tool position are taken as the origin Instruction position Instruction Radius position Radius Actual position Actual position When the angle is specified When the angle is specified with an absolute value with an incremental value Fig 4 2 13 3 If the positioning parameter of the first hole cycle instruction behind G16 is not specified the system takes the current tool position as the default positioning parameter of the hole cycle At present the first canned cycle instruction behind the polar coordinate must be complete or the tool movement is incorrect The positioning words of the positioning parameters of the tool movement instructions behind G16 except for the hole cycle are relevant to the actual plane selection mode After the polar coordinate is cancelled with G15 if there is a movement instruction following it the default current tool position is the start point of this movement instruction 43 Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 2 14 Scaling in a plane G51 G50 Format G51X Y Z P X Y Z absolute instruction for the sc
234. erence point the indicator for return completion does not light up In the offset mode the position to be reached by the tool specified with G27 instruction is the position obtained after the offset is added Therefore if the position with the offset added to it is not the reference point the indicator does not light up and an alarm is issued Usually the tool offset should be cancelled before the use of G2 instruction The coordinate position of X Y and Z specified by G27 is the position in the machine coordinate system Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 4 Canned cycle G code The canned cycle uses a single block containing G functions to achieve the machining action which needs to be done with multiple blocks to simply the programming making the programming easier for programmers in this system only the canned cycle in G17 plane is available General process of canned cycle A canned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations as shown in fig 4 4 1 Op Sta Operation 2 3 lt Operation 6 R lt Initial level e es ag p e e go m e 3 z ya Operation 3 Operation 5 VA Rapid traverse Operation 4 Feed Fig 4 4 1 Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y another axis can be included Operation 2 Rapid traverse to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to
235. erference is detected by grammar check function after the program is loaded an alarm is issued Whether the interference check is performed during radius compensation is set by bit parameter NO 41726 Basic conditions for interference 1 The moving distance of the block which establishes tool radius compensation is less than the tool radius 2 The direction of the tool path is different from that of the program path The included angle between the two paths is from 90 to 270 3 Besides the above conditions in arc machining the included angle between the start point and the end point of the tool center path is very different from that between the start point and end point of the program path above 180 The directions of the two paths are quite different 180 Fig 4 5 3 23 122 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Tool center path gt ES ag Programmed path E The directions of the two paths are T quite different 180 E m e Fig 4 5 3 24 z UG 12 Manual operation Refer to Manual Operation section in Operation part for the manual operation during the tool radius offset 13 Precautions for offset a Specifying offset value The offset value number is specified by D code Once specified D code keeps effective till another D code is specified or the offset is cancelled D code is not only used for specifying the offset value for the tool radius compensation
236. es the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R level Q Offset at the hole bottom P Dwell time at the hole bottom with its absolute value used if it is negative F Cutting feedrate K Number of fine boring repeats G76 G98 G76 G99 E r Initial level Spindle CCW Spindle exact stop Tool Point R level Point R Spindle Spindle exact exact stop sto P Point Z P Rapid traverse Rapid traverse CH on gt Shift amount q Fig 4 4 13 1 When the tool reaches the bottom of the hole the spindle stops at a fixed rotation position and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool nose for retraction This ensures that the machined surface is not damaged and enables precise and efficient boring The retraction distance is specified by the parameter Q and the retraction axis and direction are specified by bit parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 respectively The value of Q must be positive If it is a negative value the 83 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual negat
237. evel If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Example M04 S100 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G74 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R 82 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4870 is set to 1 and G74 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G74 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 13 Fine boring cycle G76 Format G76X Y ZQRPFKw Function This cycle is used for boring a hole precisely When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops and the tool is moved away from the machined surface of the workpiece and retracted Prevent the retraction trail from affecting the machined surface smoothness and avoid the tool damage in the operation Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifi
238. exact stop mode the tool movement paths in cutting mode and tapping mode are different See figure 4 6 1 1 127 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 Position check Tool path in exact stop mode 1 Tool path in cutting mode or taping mode Fig 4 6 1 1 Tool path from block 1 to block 2 4 6 2 Automatic override for inner corners G62 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Format G62 Function Once specified this function keeps effective till G63 G61 or G64 is specified When the tool moves along an inner corner during tool radius compensation override is applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress the amount of cutting per unit time In this way a smooth machined surface is produced Explanation 1 When the tool moves along an inner corner and inner arc area during tool radius compensation it is decelerated automatically to reduce the load on the tool and produce a smooth machined surface 2 Whether automatic corner override function is valid or not is set by bit parameter NO 1627 Automatic corner deceleration function is controlled by bit parameter NO 15 2 0 angle control 1 speed difference control 3 When G62 is specified and the tool path with tool radius compensation applied forms an inner corner the feedrate is automatically overridden at both ends of the corner There are four types of inner corners as shown in Fig 4 6 2 1
239. f it is omitted D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is O by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number K Number of repeats Cycle process D Rapid positioning to the start point within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 1 from the start point 5 Perform linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 instruction Instruction path 12 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code G37 CCW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle G38 CW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle Tool center path L Tool center path Rectangular groove border Rectangular groove border Fig 4 4 6 1 Explanation For the rectangle outside fine milling if the interpolation directions of the transition arc and fine milling arc are inconsistent the interpolation direction in the instruction is the one of the fine milling arc Example Performing fine milling outside a rectangle by the canned cycle instruction G37 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G37 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Performing fine milling outside a rectangle at the hole bottom in the canned cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50
240. f which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 7 1 to Fig 3 7 4 Whether the page is switched to alarm page when an alarm occurs can also be set by bit parameter No 24 26 217 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 Alarm page In lt ALARM gt page press soft key ALARM to enter this page as is shown in fig 3 7 1 NO ALARM PATH 1 MDI EN NEN E305 9 Fig 3 7 1 In alarm page the message of current P S alarm number is displayed See details about the alarm in Appendix 2 2 Userpage n ALARM page press soft key USER to enter external alarm page as is shown in fig 3 7 2 CG g N e T E e NOTHING Fig 3 7 2 See GSK218M CNC System Connection and PLC manual for the details about the user alarm Note The external alarm number can be set and edited by users according to the site conditions The edited contents of the alarm are input into the system via a transmission software The external alarm is the A of edit file LadChi txt and the two digits behind it are set by bit parameters 53 0 53 3 The default is 01 i e the file name is LadChi01 txt 3 History page In ALARM page press soft key HISTORY to enter this page See fig 3 7 3 218 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting P 01 01 E PATH 1 vn v REM Fig 3 7 3 In this page the messa
241. ffect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time In feeding per minute the relationship among thread lead and feedrate as well as spindle speed is as follows 80 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Feedrate F tap pitchxspindle speed S For example for the M12x1 5 thread hole on the workpiece the following parameters can be used 500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min For multiple thread F value can be obtained by multiplying the thread number e e Example M29 S100 Spindle starts to rotate keck G90 G99 G74 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P300 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R el Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R k Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R E X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R 3 Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R WC G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91
242. ger If the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is smaller than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Please be careful when handling negative numbers Example Suppose that 2121 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When Z3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When Z3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 9 The abbreviations of the arithmetic and logic instructions ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya When a function is specified in a program the first two characters of the function name can be used to specify the function See table 4 7 4 2 1 Example ROUND RO EIS E 10 Operation sequence Function 2 Multiplication and division operation AND 3 Addition and subtraction operation OR XOR Example 1 2 3 SIN 4 et at FR 2 s 1 and indicate the operation sequence 11 Restrictions Brackets are used to enclose an expression When a divisor of 0 is specified in a division or TAN 90 an alarm is given 2 Transfer and loop 1 Transfer and loop In the program GOTO statement and IF statement are used to change the control flow There are three types of transfer and loop operations 143 e ag p e e UG ka e
243. ges are arranged in chronological order for users convenience d OPERATE page In ALARM page press soft key OPERATE to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 7 4 The OPERATE page displays the modification messages applied to the system parameters and ladders e g content modification and time modification MODIFY BIT PARA NO 0054 1 D e g N e m t E 211 U NU V ALLY P 01 23 PATH 1 MDI mg 5 an um Gu ES Fig 3 7 4 OPERATE page can display 34 pages while HISTORY alarm page can display 9 pages The alarm time alarm numbers alarm messages and page numbers can be viewed using page keys DELETE The records of the HISTORY and OPERATE can be deleted by pressing key system debugging level or above required 219 er JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 3 8 PLC display Press the key to display the PLC page There are 5 subpages including INFO HIPLCGRA HIPLCPAR PLCDGN and HPLCTRA which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 8 1 to Fig 3 8 5 EXT FILE Ladder 1 MT MODEL 850 VERSION MC8 O00 CONTRIVER GSK ladder 155718 4414 117 4297 2011 06 10 15 11 DATA 17 06 25 PATH 1 E g N CG iq m ch e j 8 S Fig 3 8 1 F010 H KOOS e FH e DT F010 KAS ABB 7 K007 5 gogl FH 1 SH H KOOS e PHH 1
244. gin of the workpiece coordinate system directly then press key INPUT for confirmation 3 Method to search a coordinate system 1 In any mode press key to search after inputting a coordinate system e g inputting G56 2 In any mode by inputting P6 or P06 and then pressing key kel the cursor will be located in the additional workpiece coordinate system G54 P00 199 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 3 4 2 2 Auto tool setting Press soft key HAUTO MEAS to enter auto tool setting page the contents of which are shown as follows fig 3 4 2 2 1 MACHINE E d m Y d mm Z d m TOOL LENGTH MEASURE MEASUREMENT MODE LENGTH WRITE MOD TOOL NO OFFSET NO MEASURE FEED wl Er SS nt c3 c p RB Gilet oy oy eil D J e tz i T SETTING GAUGE RELATIVE X REF POINT X 8 op SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT X 9 STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT FEF POINT Y STEP NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO 4 SAFETY HEIGHT R 38 D I Y D mm TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L 8 op STEP3 PRESS ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD Z 8 op Z H mm Z AXIS ORIGIN SET G54 COORD SYS SELECT G54 X H mm MEAS TODL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEPe PRESS MEASURE SET Z REF THE TOOL IS BENCHMARK 1 NON BENCHMARK DATA Pid H mm Pd
245. h PMC signal Explanation 1 Angle unit The angle unit of functions SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and ATAN is degree e g 90 30 indicates an angle of 90 5 2 ARCSIN i ASIN 2j Ranging from 90 to 90 When j is beyond the range from 1 to 1 an alarm occurs 3 ARCCOS i ACOS j Ranging from 180 to 0 When j is beyond the range from 1 to 1 an alarm occurs Variable j can be replaced by constants 4 ARCTAN 4i ATAN 754 Vk Specify the lengths of two sides separated by a slash Ranging from 0 to 360 Example When 1 ATAN 1 1 is executed 1 225 Variable j can be replaced by constants 5 Natural logarithm i LN j When antilog j is O or smaller an alarm occurs Variable j can be replaced by constants 6 Exponential function i EXP j When the operation result exceeds 99997 453535 j is about 11 5129 an overflow occurs and an alarm is issued 142 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 7 ROUND C rounding off function The round function rounds off at the first decimal place Example When 1 ROUND 2 is executed where 2 holds 1 2345 the value of variable 1 is 1 0 8 Rounding up and down to a integer When the value operation is processed by CNC if the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an inte
246. h G92 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 e Format G17 G18 G19 3H Function Select planes for circular interpolation tool radius compensation drilling or boring with m G17 G18 G19 a z Explanation It has no instruction parameter G17 is the default plane at Power On The default E plane at Power On can also be determined by bit parameters NO 31 1 2 and 3 E The relation between instruction and plane is as follows z z G17 XY plane me G18 ZX plane G19 YZ plane The plane keeps unchanged in the block in which G17 G18 or G19 is not specified Example G18 X_Z_ ZX plane GOX Y Plane is unchanged ZX plane In addition the movement instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection For example in the following instruction Y is not on the ZX plane and its movement is irrelevant to the ZX plane G18Y Note Only the canned cycle in G17 plane is supported at present For criterion or astringency it is strongly recommended that the plane be clearly specified in corresponding blocks when programming especially in the case that a system is used by different operators In this way accidents or abnormality caused by program errors can be avoided 4 2 13 Polar coordinate start cancel G16 G15 Format G16 G15 Function G16 Starts the polar coordinate mode of the positioning parameter G15 Cancels the polar coordinate mode of the positioning parameter Explanation W
247. h to program page by pressing panel Edit key 0 Not to switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key SPET 1 Turn to program page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in edit mode 0 Not turn to program page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in edit mode SMDI 1 Turn to MDI page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode 0 Not turn to MDI page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode 1 Turn to current mode page selection automatically by pressing SS PROGRAM in MDI mode 0 Turn to MDI page selection automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode PLC 1 To switch over page by repressing PLC key in PLC page 0 Not switch over page by repressing PLC key in PLC page HELP 1 To switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page 0 Not switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page Standard setting 1100 0001 oystem parameter number 0 2 7 NE9 NE8 NES 1 Editting of subprogram with 80000 89999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with 80000 89999 allowed NE9 1 Editting of subprogram with 90000 99999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with 90000 99999 allowed Standard setting 0001 0001 oystem parameter number 0 218 MCL MKP MKP 1 To clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode 0 Not clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode MCL 1 To delete the progra
248. he hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R Q Cut depth for each cutting feed F Cutting federate K Number of repeats G83 G98 G83 G99 Point Z Fig 4 4 10 1 Q It specifies the cut depth for each cutting feed which must be specified as an incremental value In the second and the subsequent cutting feed the tool rapidly traverses to the position which has a distance d to the end position of the last drilling and then performs the cutting feed again d is set by parameter P271 as is shown in Fig 4 4 10 1 78 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code opecify a positive value for Q and a negative one will be processed as its absolute value Specify Q in a drilling block If it is specified in the block containing no drilling it is stored as modal data Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle before G83 is specified When G83 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning and the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the first hole but not for the other holes Note 1 In the current version MOO M0
249. he M codes themselves to the machine e g the M code to disable the block prereading function Moreover the codes to send the M codes themselves to the machine without performing the internal operation can be specified in the same block 5 2 1 Program end and return M30 M02 When M30 M02 in the program is executed in auto mode the auto mode is cancelled The blocks following them are not executed and the spindle and cooling are stopped Meanwhile the workpiece machined number increases by 1 Whether the control returns to the beginning of the program after M30 is executed is set by bit parameter NO 33724 whether the control returns to the beginning of the program after M02 is executed is set by bit parameter NO 3322 If M02 and M03 are in a subprogram then the control returns to the program calling the subprogram after they are executed and proceeds to the following blocks 5 2 2 Program dwell MOO In Auto running the automatic operation pauses after a block containing MOO is executed Meanwhile the previous modal information will be saved The automatic operation is continued by pressing Cycle Start key which is equivalent to pressing down key Feed Hold 5 2 3 Program optional stop M01 Automatic operation is stopped optionally after a block containing MO1 is executed If the Optional Stop switch is set to ON M01 is equivalent to MOO if the Optional Stop switch is set to OFF M01 is ineffective See OPERATION MANUAL for
250. he axes not in the offset plane are not affected by compensation In simultaneous 3 axis control only the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated The change of the offset plane can only be performed after the compensation is cancelled Table 4 5 2 2 4 G40 G41 and G42 The cancellation and execution of the tool radius compensation vector are specified by G40 G41 G42 They are used in combination with G00 G01 G02 G03 to define a mode to determine the value and the direction of the offset vector Table 4 5 2 3 cancel Tool radius compensation left Tool radius compensation right 5 G53 G28 or G30 instruction in tool radius compensation mode If G53 G28 or G30 instruction is specified in tool radius compensation the offset vector of tool radius offset axis is cancelled after the specified position is reached cancelled at the specified position in G53 cancelled at the reference point in G28 G30 and the other axes except tool radius offset axes are not cancelled When G53 is in the same block with G41 G42 all the axes cancel their radius compensation when the specified position is reached when G28 or G30 is in the same block with G41 G42 all the axes cancel their radius compensation after the reference point is reached The cancelled tool radius compensation vector will be restored in the next buffered block containing a compensation plane 104 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Note in offset
251. he bigger the parameter the lower the optimization the bigger the acceleration and the shorter the machining time The smaller the parameter the higher the optimization and the longer the machining time 0403 Fitting segments of small lines Setting range 0 0020 999 0000 The parameter 403 determines the number of tool location points of the fitting spline curve The parameter should be controlled in a certain range 403 1 10 The bigger the parameter the bigger the calculation amount and the smaller the shape error 314 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List The smaller the parameter the smaller the calculation amount while the bigger the shape error 0404 opline coefficient n1 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 0405 opline coefficient n2 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 0406 Spline coefficient n3 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 LA LA LA An original cubic spline curve is fitted based on spline parameters n1 n2 n3 404 405 406 The bigger the spline coefficient n1 n2 404 405 the bigger the curve error while speed is more smooth and the machine tool is more stable The smaller the coefficient the smaller the curve error while the speed is not smooth and machine tool vibration occurs The spline coefficient n3 406 is opposite 0407 CNC internal parameter 1 0 3000 setting range 0 0020 99 0000 0408 CNC internal parameter 2 0 3000 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 0409 Pre
252. he word search operation is used to search a specific address word or number and it is usually used for editing a program Steps for the search of sequence number word and line number in a program 1 Select mode Edit gt or Auto 2 Look up the target program in DIR page 3 Press key to enter the target program 254 Chapter 10 Edit Operation 4 Key in the word or sequence number to be searched and press key Or D to search for it SEARCH 5 When needing to search a line number in a program press key and input the line number to be searched then press key Note 1 The search function is automatically cancelled when the search for sequence number and word is performed to the end of a program 2 The searching for sequence number word and line number can be performed in either AUTO or EDIT mode but in AUTO mode it can only be performed in the background edit page 10 1 1 4 Location of the cursor PROGRAM Select Edit mode then press key to display the program a Press key to move the cursor upward a line if the column where the cursor is located exceeds the end column of the last line the cursor moves to the end of the last line b Press key to move the cursor downward a line If the column where the cursor is located exceeds the end column of the next line the cursor moves to the end of the next line CG e ag N Gi e t p c c Press key gt to move the
253. head of a block the system will skip the block even if the block skip function is not turned on 251 CG e ag N e x t E e er JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note 3 It is forbidden to switch the control to other mode when the Check function is performed in Auto mode or unexpected results will occur During Check in Auto mode if there is a sign ahead of a block the Check function is performed for this block regardless of whether the skip function is ON 10 1 1 Program creation 10 1 1 1 Sequence number automatic creation oet the AUTO SEQ to 1 according to the method described in Section 3 5 1 See fig 10 1 1 1 1 PAR SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 0 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ 1 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ INC 0 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEG STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE JI 2011 y ez w lg TIME Il _12 H ee M oe s DATA El 08 86 PATH 1 SETTING WORK EDATA PASSWORD Fig 10 1 1 1 1 In this way the sequence number will be automatically inserted into the blocks during program editing The incremental amount of the sequence number is set by its corresponding parameter 10 1 1 2 Program input e 2 EDIT 1 Press key to enter Edit mode 2 Press key to enter program page See fig 10
254. helical path Explanation Tool path x The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate Fig 4 2 3 6 The first two instruction parameters are positioning parameters The parameter words are the names of two axes X Y or Z in the current plane These two positioning parameters specify the position which the tool is to go to The parameter word of the third instruction parameter is a linear axis except the circular interpolation axis and its value is the helical height The meanings and restrictions for other instruction parameters are identical with those of circular interpolation If the circle can not be machined according to the specified instruction parameter the system will give error message After the execution the system changes the current tool moving mode for G02 G03 mode The federate along the circumference of two circular interpolation axes is specified The specification method is to simply add a moving axis which is not a circular interpolation axis The 3l e g p a e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual federate along a circular arc is specified by F instruction Thus the feedrate of the linear axis is as follows Length of liner axis Fc F Length of circular arc Determine the federate to make the linear axis federate not exceed any limit Restrictio
255. hole 1 then return to point R Z 150 R 100 Q5 Orient at the bottom of the hole then shift by 5mm P1000 F120 Stop at the bottom of the hole for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 4870 is set to 1 and G76 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G76 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 14 Boring cycle G85 Format Gab5X Y Z RER Function This cycle is used for boring a hole Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 84 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code G85 G98 G85 G99 os n Q Initial level e SED Point R Point R Point R level
256. ig 4 3 1 1 of the return from the reference point all of which can be expressed by absolute or incremental instruction The instruction specifies the incremental value departed from the intermediate point in incremental programming If the value is not specified for an axis it means the axis has no movement relative to the intermediate point The G29 instruction followed by only one axis means the single axis return with no action performed to other axes Example G90 GO X10 Y 10 G91 G28 X20 Y20 Reference point return via the intermediate point 30 30 G29 X30 Return to 60 30 from the reference point via the intermediate point 30 30 Note that the component in X axis should be 60 in incremental programming The values of the intermediate point specified by G29 are assigned by G28 or G30 See the explanation of instruction G28 for the definition specification and system default of the intermediate point 4 3 4 Reference point return check G27 Format G27 X Y Z Function G27 performs the reference point return check with the reference point specified by X Y Explanation 1 56 G27 instruction positions the tool at the rapid traverse speed If the tool reaches the reference point the indicator for reference point return lights up However if the position the tool reaches is not the reference point an alarm is issued In machine lock mode even if G27 is specified and the tool has automatically returned to the ref
257. igger than Max speed 0081 Subprogram can not be called Lf o 0084 Overtime or short circuit occurs in key MEN 0085 Overflow occurs when data is transmitted to memory by series port Baud NEN rate setting or I O equipment is wrong 0086 Planes can not be shifted in canned cycle mode Alarm NO 0087 0091 are for reference point return unfinished starting point 0087 of reference return is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow 0092 G2 check for reference return instruction can not return to the reference point 0093 Motor type error i 0098 After power on or emergency stop when the program with G28 program restarts without executing reference return NEN On parameter setting screen PWE parameter input is active is set to 1 Ed Restart CNC after setting it to O 10 Memory data disordered after power of please ensure correct locaton 092 Dermor wsmimahONG OOo 0108 Bus communication enor Please check reliability ofthe cae O54 Mahmezeopiisengemr YS 0105 Timeout eror while data is being eened 319 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual eus Drive unitis ot consistent wih gear rato of servo parameter T0107 Drive unit parameter isnot consistent wih servo unit parameter Lom PememetUdk Loro Postion dara exceeds tne alowed range Pease resa 0111 Calculated result exceeds the allowed range 1
258. igin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0022 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0023 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 ATH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0025 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0026 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 295 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0027 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0028 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 3 G56 4TH Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0030 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 X Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0031 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 Y Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0032 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 Z Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0033 Origin offset amount of workpiece coordinate system 0 0000 4 G57 4TH Setting range 9
259. ill M3 or M4 appears in the program Spindle speed rpm The spindle speed almost coincides with the surface speed at approx 160mm radius Surface speed S is 600mm min Radius mm 0 20 40 60 80 100120140 160180 200 220240 260 280300 Fig 6 3 2 Relation between workpiece radius spindle speed and surface speed 154 Chapter 6 Spindle Functions G Codes 5 Surface speed specified in G96 mode G96 mode G97 mode Specify surface speed in mm min inch min G97 instruction Save the speed in mm min inch min Specified Specify the The specified spindle spindle speed speed is used rpm Not specified The surface speed mm min or inch min is converted to the spindle speed rpm Instructions other than G96 G96 instruction Specified The specified surface speed is used Specify the surface speed Not specified The saved surface speed mm min inch min is used If there is no saved surface speed the speed is assumed as 0 Fig 6 3 3 Restrictions 1 Because the response problem in the servo system may not be considered when the spindle speed changes and the constant surface speed is also effective during threading it is recommended to cancel the constant surface speed by G97 before threading 2 In a rapid traverse block specified by GOO the constant surface speed control is not made 155 d Looq d S g ch fa e g p e e UG ka e z
260. in the program directory page program information in fig 10 2 1 10 2 3 Storage capacity The storage capacity can be viewed in the program directory page storage capacity in fig 10 2 1 10 2 4 Viewing of program list One program directory page can display 6 CNC program names at most If there are more than 6 names it is unavailable to display them all in one page Here you can press the PAGE key to display the remaining names on the next page If the Page key is pressed repeatedly all the CNC program names will be displayed circularly on LCD 10 2 5 Program lock The program switch is provided in this system to prevent the user programs from being modified by unauthorized personnel After the program editing turn off the program switch to lock the program thus disabling the program edit See Section 3 4 1 for details 262 Chapter 11 System Communication CHAPTER 11 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION This system can communicate with PC or USB via its own interfaces to realize data transmission and DNC on line machining 11 1 Serial communication Preparation for serial communication 1 Connect the PC serial port and system RS232 interface using a serial line 2 Open GSK Com serial communication software on PC side Note GSK Com serial communication software uses Windows like interfaces It can run in Win98 WinMe WinXP and Win2000 3 Setting for GSK Com serial communication software 1 Select Suitable for GSK218MC
261. indle speed 1000r min Thread lead 1 0mm then Feedrate of Z axis 1000x1 21000mm min GOO X120 Y100 Positioning M29 1000 Rigid mode specification G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 Rigid tapping Restrictions F If the specified F value exceeds the upper limit of the cutting federate the upper limit is used ES e GET kel a e yo e ch 3 ya S If the speed exceeds the maximum speed for a specified gear an alarm is issued The speed gear is set by data parameters P294 296 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G84 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G84 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning Program restart It is invalid during the rigid taping 4 4 24 Peck rigid taping chip removal cycle Format G84 or G74 X Y ZRPQFK Function In peck rigid taping cutting is performed several times until the bottom of the hole is reached Explanation AV Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Minimum dwell time at the bottom of the hole or at
262. ine stroke When bit parameter NO 11 6 0 effective time for a forbidden area after power is switched on and manual reference point return or automatic reference point return by G28 is executed the forbidden area becomes effective When bit parameter NO 11 6 1 after the power is turned on if the reference position is in the forbidden area an alarm occurs only effective in G12 of stored stroke limit 2 Alarm release If the tool enters the forbidden area with an alarm being issued it can only be moved reversely To release the alarm move the tool reversely till it is beyond the forbidden area and resets the system After the alarm is released the tool can be moved forward or backward freely See section 2 5 2 in this manual for details An alarm is issued when G13 is converted to G12 in the forbidden area Whether the stroke check is performed is set by bit parameter NO 10 1 When bit parameter NO 10 1 0 the stroke check is not performed before movement when bit parameter NO 10 1 1 the stroke check is performed before movement Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING 3 1 Position display 3 1 1 Four types of position display Press key to enter position page which consists of REL1 ABS AII and PMONI The four subpages can be viewed using corresponding soft keys as is shown below 1 Relative coordinate It displays the position of th
263. ing 212 Chapter 11 System Communication Note In USB program directory page if the name of a program contains 6 characters or less the beginning of the program can be previewed if the name contains more than 6 characters the beginning cannot be previewed if the name contains 8 characters or more the system displays an abbreviation for it and the beginning cannot be previewed neither 11 2 4 Exiting U disk page 1 Pull out the U disk as its indicator does not blink 2 Press soft key RETURN to return to DATA subpage in SETTING DATA DEAL page e e ag N e x Z e e 273 er JJ Sy FS 4 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual z e ag N i x Z E e 274 APPENDIX Appendix 21D Gr 444 87 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 276 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List APPENDIX GSK218MC SERIES PARAMETER LIST Explanation The parameters are classified into following patterns according to the data type 2 data types and data value range Data type Effective data range Remark Bit The default value is given by the CNC and user can modify the setting by requirement Data opecified according The default value is given by the CNC and to the parameter user can modify the setting by requirement range 1 For bit and axis parameters the data are comprised by 8 bi
264. int absolute incremental 2 The setting and restrictions of instruction G30 are the same as those of instruction G28 See data parameter P50 63 for the 2nd 3rd 4th reference point setting 3 The G30 code can also be used together with G29 code return from reference point of which the setting and restrictions are identical with those of G28 code 55 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 Format G29X Y Z Function G29 performs the operation of returning to the specified point via the intermediate point specified by G28 or G29 from the reference point or the current point Explanation 1 The action of block G29 can be divided as follows refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point point R point B specified by G28 or G30 from the reference point at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to a specified point from the intermediate point point B point C at a traverse speed G29 is a non modal instruction which is only effective in the current block In general the instruction Return from Reference Point should be specified immediately after instruction G28 or G29 The optional parameters X Y and Z in G29 instruction are used for specifying the target point i e point C in F
265. into offset path B 2 Offset value D value The radius offset number is specified by D code The offset value corresponding to the offset number is added to or subtracted from the moving instruction value in the program thus obtains the new moving instruction value The offset number can be specified by DOO D256 as required Whether the radius offset value is set by parameter value or radius value is selected by bit parameter NO 4077 The offset value assigned to the offset number can be saved into the offset memory in advance using LCD MDI panel The range of the offset value is as follows 103 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Table 4 5 2 1 Doo o Rage Offset value D input in mm 999 999mm 999 999mm Offset value D input in inch 99 9998 inch 99 9998 inch Note The default offset value of DOO is 0 that cannot be set or modified by the user The change of the offset plane can only be performed after the offset mode is cancelled If the offset plane is changed without cancelling the offset mode an alarm will be issued 3 Plane selection and vector Compensation calculation is carried out in the plane selected by G17 G18 or G19 This plane is called the offset plane For example if XY plane is selected the compensation and vector calculation are carried out by X Y in the program The coordinates of t
266. ion does not Relative coordinate value change the relative coordinate values The change amount of the machine coordinate value is the displacement amount caused by MPG rotation Machine coordinate value 239 CG e ag N i x Z E e er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note The moving amount of MPG interruption is cleared when the manual reference point return is performed for each axis 6 3 Auxiliary control in MPG mode The auxiliary operation in MPG mode is identical with that in JOG mode See Sections 4 2 and 4 3 for details 6 4 Electronic MPG drive function Operation method Enable the electronic MPG drive function by setting bit parameter NO 59 1 In Auto mode turn on Dry Run press key lt CYCLE START gt and control the execution of the part program by rotating the MPG The execution speed of the program becomes faster as the MPG is rotated faster and vice versa This function is usually used for workpiece trial cutting and machining program detection Note 1 The Dry Run is ineffective after the electronic MPG drive function is enabled Note 2 Single block stop execution is effective in single block mode 240 Chapter 7 Auto Operation CHPATER 7 AUTO OPERATION 7 1 Selection of the auto run programs 1 Program loading in auto mode AUTO a Press key to enter the Auto mode PROGRAM b Press key mon to enter th
267. ion signal MAOB 2 1 Zero type selection for non one revolution signal B 0 Zero type selection for non one revolution signal A Standard setting 0100 0000 oystem parameter number 0 0 7 A4TP ZMI4A ZMiz ZMly ZMIx A4RT A4RT 1 Axis rotates with nearst principle 0 Axis does not rotate with nearest principle ZMIx 1 Direction setting of X axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of X axis reference point return positive ZMly 1 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Y axis reference point return positive ZMlIz 1 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of Z axis reference point return positive ZMIA 1 Direction setting of the 4th axis reference point return negative 0 Direction setting of the 4th axis reference point return positive A4TP 1 Itis a four axis coordinate system 0 It is not a four axis coordinate system Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0108 AXSX PLWX 1 Pulse width of X axis is set to 2 microseconds 0 Pulse width of X axis is set to 1 microsecond PLWY 1 Pulse width of Y axis is set to 2 microseconds 0 Pulse width of Y axis is set to 1 microsecond PLWZ 1 Pulse width of Z axis is set to 2 microseconds 0 Pulse width of Z axis is set to 1 microsecond PLW4 1 Pulse width of the 4 axis is set to 2 microseconds 0 Pulse width of the Al axis is set t
268. ious G28 is used Note the intermediate point is not 20 60 N6 G55 Due to workpiece coordinate system change the intermediate point 40 60 in G54 workpiece coordinate system is changed for 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system N7 G29 X60 Y20 Return to point 60 20 via the intermediate point 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system from the reference point The G28 instruction can automatically cancel the tool compensation but this instruction is only used in automatic tool change mode i e changing the tool at the reference point after reference point return Therefore the tool radius compensation and tool length compensation in principle should be cancelled before the use of this instruction See data parameters P45 P48 for the 1streference point setting 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 There are 4 reference points in machine coordinate system In a system without an absolute position detector the 2nd 3ra 4tn reference point return functions can be used only after the auto reference point return G28 or manual reference point return is performed Format G30 P2X Y Z 2 reference point return P2 can be omitted G30 P3X Y Z 3 reference point return G30 P4X_Y Z 4 reference point return Function G30 performs the operation of returning to the specified reference point via the intermediate point specified by G30 Explanation 1 X Y Z Instruction for specifying the intermediate po
269. ired press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files directly Renaming required press key CANCEL to input the new program number e g O10 or O100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the program files If the program name already exists in the U disk the system prompts Please rename the file Here input the new program number e g O10 or O100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files e e g N e t E e 2 To copy CNC program files to system disk from U disk a Press soft key USB to switch to USB file directory page gt b Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory c Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be copied in the U disk Press soft key COPY then the system prompts COPY TO CNC DISC New Name which is shown in fig 11 2 2 3 271 Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CUR DISK USB DISK FILE NUM 4 FILE DIR O LADDER PLC 000016 txt opp 88 88 14 12 18 000017 txt 256 88 88 14 12 18 PARA PLC 090026 txt 256 88 88 14 12 18 PARAMETER O CUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO YAR OMACRO PRG 9 PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 000027 08 56 05 copy TO CNC DISK New Name PATH 1 Fig 11 2 2 3 d If renaming for CNC program files is not required press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC progr
270. is point If the machining is not in the single block mode the auto run continues If the step is linear no alarm will be issued and the tool cuts correctly However the uncut part will exist lods The end point of a single block Tool center path Programmed path An overcutting occurs if the ST first vector is not ignored Fig 4 5 3 29 Starting tool radius compensation and cutting along Z axis The first vector is ignored It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool radius compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining In the case above if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid feed and cutting feed follow the procedure below If block N3 is divided as follows N1 G91 G00 X500 Y500 H01 N3 Z 250 N5 G01 Z 50 F1 N6 Y100 F2 125 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual N1 G91 GO X500 Y500 H01 N6 Offset mode N3 G01 Z 300 F1 N6 Y100 F2 N6 is entered into the buffer storage when N3 REESEN in Z axis is being executed By the relationship between them the correct offset is performed in the left Va figure N1 Offset start Fig 4 5 3 30 4 5 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Format G39 Function By specifying G39 in offset
271. is deg deg min If INI is set to 1 in inch input the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min CPB 1 Pulse port and Ethernet are used simultaneously 0 Pulse port and Ethernet are not used simultaneously MSP 1 Double spindle control is used 0 Double spindle control is not used SEQ 1 Automatic sequence number insertion 0 Not automatic sequence number insertion 1 High speed and high precision mode 15 0 and 17 0 can not be modified and only X Y Z axes can be used 0 Common mode When the high speed and high precision mode is changed into common mode default setting for 4215 0 is 1 Standard setting 0100 0000 MODE oystem parameter number 0 01 SJZ TMES SPT UDVP DRVT DRVT 1 Bus drive unit is DAHO1 series 0 Bus drive unit is DA98E series UDVP 1 Automatically update parameter of the drive unit 0 Not automatically update parameter of the drive unit SPT 1 I O point control 0 Frequency conversion or others TMES 1 Toolsetting gauge is fixed 0 Toolsetting gauge is not fixed SJZ 1 Reference point memorizing yes 0 Reference point memorizing no Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 02 SIOD SKO STME DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX DECX 1 X axis deceleration signal is high level active 0 X axis deceleration signal is low level active DECY 1 Y axis deceleration signa
272. is input in metric the default speed is 40 mm min Range 10 100mm min when it is input in inch the default speed is 2 0 inch min 0 4 4 0 inch min 4 Whether the tool setting gauge installation is fixed 0 unfixed 1 fixed When it is set to unfixed mode the position of the tool setting gauge on each axis cannot be modified when it is set to fixed mode the position of the tool setting gauge on each axis can only be modified with the authority of debugging level or above CG g N e t E e MEASUREMENT MODE l m LENBTH WRITE woe amp TOOL NO T g H mm OFFSET NO H 4 l MEASURE FEED PE A8 T SETTING GAUGE g X REF POINT X B SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT Weg X STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT Y a STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 38 Y mm TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION L o opp STEP3 PRESS ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD Z a COORD SYS SELECT 654 f MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF H mm Is TOOL SETTING GAUGE INSTALLATION FIXED B N 1 Y DATA 1 59 27 PATH 1 yy EE B cas a es m Fig 3 4 2 2 4 5 Tool setting gauge position X on X axis The X coordinate of the tool setting gauge in the machine coordinate system 6 Tool setting gauge position Y on Y axis The Y coordinate of the t
273. it 0006 MAOB ZPLS xxx xxx xxx xxx ZMOD ZRN d AATP ZMIA Miz ZMIy ZMIx AART xxx 0 1 AXSA AXSZ AXSY AXSX PLW4 PLWZ PLWY DLW 0 0009 xxx APZA APZZ APZY APZX UHSM APC xxx a 0 0 d 1 0010 RCUR MSL xxx xxx RIC ZCL SCBM xxx IE 0 1 LZR d H d f FA Xxx xxx c emm xxx OUT2 d d 0011 BFA H H H H H H 1 INPUT 16 56 10 PATH 1 LE NUMPAR RETURN Fig 3 3 2 1 1 Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details 2 Number parameter page Press soft key NUMPAR to enter this page See fig 3 3 2 1 2 193 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual o TA wee ER 0004 system interpolation period millisecond eo5 83 CNC controlled axis 00080 1 CNC Language Select B CH 1 EN 2 RUS 3 ESP The max error of position Resend times of BUS external workpiece origin point X offset external workpiece origin point Y offset Deeg BITPAR wee RETURN Fig 3 3 2 1 2 Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details 3 3 2 2 Modification and setting for parameter values 1 Select MDI mode SETTING 2 Press key L to enter lt SETTING gt page turn on the parameter switch set the parameter switch to 1 SYSTEM 3 Press key sw then the soft key EMPARA to enter parameter display page 4
274. ith no instruction parameter By setting G16 the coordinate value can be input with polar coordinate radius and angle The positive direction of the angle is the counterclockwise direction of the 1 axis in the selected plane and the negative direction is the clockwise direction Both the radius and angle can use either absolute instruction or incremental instruction G90 or G91 After G16 appears the 17 axis of the positioning parameter of the tool movement instruction is the polar radius in the polar coordinate system and the 2 axis is the polar angle in the polar coordinate system G15 can cancel the polar coordinate mode and thus return the coordinate value to the rectangular coordinate mode 41 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Specifying polar coordinate origin 1 In G90 absolute mode when G16 is specified the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system Instruction position Radius Instruction position ES g ke Radius a e wa m 5 2 Actual position Actual position mio e go When the angle is specified with When the angle is specified with an absolute instruction an incremental instruction Fig 4 2 13 1 2 In G91 absolute mode when G16 is specified the current point is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system Example bole hole circle the zero point
275. ive sign is ignored The hole bottom shift amount of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which must be specified carefully because it is also used as the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G76 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G76 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole for the other holes the M code is not executed Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be canceled before the drilling axis is changed Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other axes boring is not performed Example M3 S500 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G76 X300 Y 250 Positioning bore
276. l center path Block A Block B Programmed path Compensation vector Fig 4 5 3 8 116 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 3 Circular Circular Programme path end point is C not on the arc Center Tool center path Center Fig 4 5 3 9 Civ Normally there is almost no possibility of generating the situation that the length of the tool center path is larger than the circumference of a circle However when G41 and G42 are changed the following situation may occur Circular circular linear circular An alarm occurs when the tool offset direction is changed and an alarm Tool offset cannot be cancelled by arc instruction is issued when the tool number is DO Linear linear The tool offset direction can be changed ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Programmed path G42 N5 G01 G91 X500 Y 700 NG G41 G02 J 500 N7 G42 G01 X500 Y700 Here the tool center path is not an arc of a circle but an arc from P1 to P2 Under some conditions an alarm may occur because of the interference check To move the tool around a full circle the circle must be specified in segments Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 10 6 Temporary offset cancel In offset mode bit parameter NO 40 2 determines whether the offset is canceled at the intermediate point temporarily when G28 G30 is specified Please refer to the description of offset cancel and compensation start for detai
277. l information about this operation a G28 automatic reference point return If G28 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate point and automatically restored after reference point return 117 Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G28 Programmed Tool center path path Fig 4 5 3 11 b G29 automatic return from reference origin point If G29 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored at the next block If it is specified immediately after G28 e ag p e e UG ka e z z ya E Intermediate point G00 G42 G00 Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 12 If it is not specified immediately after G28 G29 Intermediate point Fig 4 5 3 13 7 Tool radius compensation G code in offset mode In offset mode if the tool radius compensation G code G41 G42 is specified a vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block which is irrelative to the machining inner or outer side If this G code is specified in circular instructions the arc will not be correctly generated Refer to 5 when the offset direction is changed using tool radius compensation G G41 G42 118 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Linear Linear Circular Linear z Programmed G42 mode b p
278. l is high level active 0 Y axis deceleration signal is low level active 278 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List DECZ 1 Z axis deceleration signal is high level active 0 Z axis deceleration signal is low level active DEC4 1 The 4TH axis deceleration signal is high level active 0 The 4TH axis deceleration signal is low level active STME 1 Tool length value can be added to reference offset 0 Tool length value can not be added to reference offset SKO 1 Skip signal SKIP is input when it is O 0 Skip signal SKIP is input when it is 1 SIOD 1 Machine zero return deceleration signal with PLC logical operation 0 Machine zero return deceleration signal without PLC logical operation Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 0 3 DIR5 DIRA DIRZ DIRY DIRX INM INM 1 Min moving unit of linear axis Inch 0 Min moving unit of linear axis Metric If INM is set to O in metric output the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INM is set to 1 in inch output the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min DIRX 1 Xaxis feeding direction 0 X axis feeding direction reversing DIRY 1 Y axis feeding direction 0 Y axis feeding direction reversing DIRZ 1 Z axis feeding direction 0 Z axis feeding direction reversing DIR4 1 The 4 axis feeding direction 0 The 4 a
279. lar groove fine rough milling 5 Tool diameter is bigger than J in rectangular groove fine rough milling 6 Tool radius is bigger than U in rectangular groove fine rough milling 7 Radius coefficient of helical infeed is too big or D is too big Modify parameter No 269 or radius compensation value U is too big 1 Twice of U in rectangular groove cycle is bigger than 2 Twice of U in rectangular groove cycle is bigger than J 0189 U is too small U should bigger than or equal to tool radius rel __Vis too smal or tis undefined V shouid be bggerthan Lee Wisto smal oritis undefined W shoud be bggertian 0122 _Gistoo sman oritis undefined Qshouldbebggerthan RENERT Toe SSC defines orig Toes eerst In constant surface cutting speed control specified axis error see parameter 0198 No 254 0199 Macro instruction modification program is not defined BEEN 0200 In rigid tapping illegal S instruction NEN 0201 F value is not found in rigid tapping BEEN 0202 Assigned value of the spindle is too big in rigid tapping NEN 0203 Position of M code M29 or S instruction is wrong in rigid tapping NENNEN 0204 M29 should be specified in G80 mode 0205 G84 or G74 is executed after specifying M code M29 rigid tapping signal mM is not 1 Check ladder diagram to find the reason 0206 Plane shifting is specified in rigid tapping EE 0207 The specified distance in rigid tapping is too long or too short BEE
280. leration deceleration at the corner in a block m HMM nes 160 CHAPTER 8 TOOL FUNCTION nnne nnn nnn nnne nnn nnne nnn nnn nnn 162 8 1 Tool function FaaaEARRRARARARRRRRARAARERARRARARARRRRARRARAARARRERRARARARRRARARRARARRRRARARARERRRARARARSARRRRARARARARRRRRARARARARARRARRRAA 162 BOOK I OPERATION CHAPTER 1 OPERATION PANEL jnre nnn 165 1 1 Panel layout WRRRRRRRARRNRARRKWARRRRARRRRRNARRARRARRRARARARRRRRARAREARRRRRNARRARARREARARRARRRRARARRRRARRRRWANRRARRRESARRARARRRREARRRAA 165 1 2 Explanation for panel functions FRAaRRRAWRARRRSRRRNARRRRRERRARARRARRRRARARRRRRRRANARRRRRARNNARARARRARARRRRARRARARRARRRR RANA 167 1 2 1 LCD display zl lt 167 1 2 2 Editing keyboard Zl 167 1 2 3 Screen operation keys Gegen bad ave Caere dur 169 1 24 Machine control area of GSK218MC seenen 170 1 2 5 Machine control area of GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V m terete 174 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM POWER ON OFF AND SAFETY OPERATIONS 176 2 1 System DOW en LLL LE 176 22 System power off FERARRARAREARARRRRANARARERINSARRRARRRRRARERARARRRRARRRORRRRARARARRRRRRARRERRRRARRARRRARRARRRARRARRRRRARARRRR RAMS 176 2 3 Safety operations FRRARRRRARRRRRRRRRRARRARARRRARRARTRRARRARRARRARSRRRRARARRRRRRARRARRRRARRRRARRRRRRRARARRRARRRRRRARARRRRARARARRRRRAA 177 2 3 1 Reset operation sng Ghee ee E Dee Deeg tee 177 2 3 2 Emergency stop nme 177 2 3 3 Feed belge 178 24 Cycle start and feed hold TELE 178 2 5 Overtravel protection ERRAWRRKRRARARARERAERRRAERARRRRRRARRASRRRRRANARRARRNERAAHRARRRRRARRRARRRRRRRANRRRARRRRARR
281. licious modification the password authority setting is available in this GSK218MC system It is classified into 5 levels which are the 1st level system manufacturer the 2nd level machine builder the 3rd level system debugging the 4th level end user and the 5th level operator in descending sequence The system default level is the lowest one at power on See Fig 3 4 4 1 The 1st and the 2nd level The modifications for state parameters data parameters tool offset data and PLC ladder transfer etc are allowed in these levels The 3rd level The modifications for CNC state parameters data parameters tool offset data etc are allowed in this level The 4th level The modifications for CNC state parameters data parameters tool offset data are allowed in this level The 5th level No password Modifications for offset data macro variables and operations using the machine operator panel are available but the modifications for CNC state parameters and data parameters are unavailable 211 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual SYSTEM PSW MACHINE pen NEM NW AGAIN AGN DEBUG Psw enne NEW NEM AGAIN AGAIN Logout END PATH 1 SETTING WORK DATA Fig 3 4 4 1 1 After entering this page in MDI mode move the cursor to the item to be altere
282. ll not insert the sequence number automatically when the program is input with keyboard in edit mode 1 When the program is input with keyboard in edit mode the system will automatically insert the sequence number The sequence number increment between blocks is set by data parameter P210 7 Sequence number increment Set the increment when inserting sequence number automatically Range 0 1000 8 Stop sequence number This function can be used to stop the program execution at a specified block but it is not effective unless both the program number and block number are specified E g 00060 Cprogram number means program number O00060 00100 sequence number means block number NO0O100 Note When the stop sequence is set to 1 the single block stop is not executed 9 Date and time Users can set the system date and time here d Press key for confirmation 3 4 2 Workpiece coordinate setting page CG e ag N e x t E e 1 Press soft key EIWORK to enter coordinate system setting page the contents of which are shown as follows G54 G55 MACHINE X Q m X 9 9000 m X 000 mm Y mm Y mm Y m Z BQ mm Z mm Z mm EXT G56 G57 X mm X mm X m Y mm Y mm Y mm Z m Z mm Z mm INPUT 10 50 34 PATH 1 HAUTOMEAS INPUT INPUT RETURN Fig 3 4 2 1 Another 50 additional workpiece coordinate
283. lock it will be done by the next moving instruction block by the system G40 G91 e ag p e e UG ka e z ya N6 X100 Y100 N7 G41 XO N8 Y 100 N9 X100 Y 100 Fig 4 5 3 17 b Specified in offset mode If a single block with no tool movement is specified in offset mode the vector and the tool center path are the same as when the block is not specified Refer to item 3 Offset mode This block is executed at the single block stop position N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y200 SE N7 G04 X100 N8 X100 Block N7 is executed here Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 18 However when the block moving amount is 0 the tool movement is the same as that of two or more blocks without moving instructions even if only one block is specified 120 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y200 N8 X100 Block N7 is executed here z ag Programmed path Tool center path E Fig 4 5 3 19 T Note The blocks above are executed in G1 G41 mode The path in GO does not conform to the KR figure Z us c Specified together with offset cancel A vector with a length of offset value and with its direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the previous block is formed when the block specified together with offset cancel contains no tool movement This vector will be cancelled in next moving instruction N6 G91 X100 Y100 N7 G40 N8 X100 YO P
284. lock the T code is executed before tool change instruction If they are not in the same block M06 executes the T code specified by the last program Such as the program below 000010 N10 T2M6 Spindle tool number is T2 N20 M6T3 Spindle tool number is T3 N30 T4 Spindle tool number is T3 N40 M6 Spindle tool number is T4 N50 T5 Spindle tool number is T4 N60 M30 Yo After the tool change the spindle tool number is T4 162 BOOK I OPERATION e e ag N e x t e c 163 er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual z e ag N i x Z E e 164 Chapter 1 Operation Panel CHAPTER 1 OPERATION PANEL 1 1 Panel layout An integrated operator panel is applied to GSK218MC CNC system while separate type structure is adopted for GSK 218MC H and GSK218MC V The layout of the panel consists of LCD area editing keyboard area soft key function area and machine control area See the figures below LCD display area Edit keyboard area SEL Ts BA E ALTER DEET Lg ES T Oe 26 Ga 23 467 3T 833 N S D HH DEES HHA Bee HHO HR D BEE Gan G17 G32 G94 Gel cae G49 Gs Goa G96 Gin G50 GES GBA G987 G12 H E uoneJod z Xooq E BH HEKE IK SEH SAFO 0 001 bute Soft key function area Machine control area Fig 1 1 1 Panel of GSK218MC 165
285. ly or MPG moves in Y direction to EE release it 0514 Hardware overtravel Z release it manually or MPG moves in Z direction to Fc release it 0515 Hardware overtravel Z release it manually or MPG moves in Z direction to release it 0516 Hardware overtravel 4TH release it manually or MPG moves in 4TH direction to release it 0517 Hardware overtravel 4TH release it manually or MPG moves in 4TH direction to release it 0518 Hardware overtravel 5Th release it manually or MPG moves in 5Th direction to release it 0519 Hardware overtravel 5Th release it manually or MPG moves in 5Th direction to release it 1001 Address of relay or coil is not set E 1002 Function code of input code does not exist EE Function instruction COM is not used correctly Corresponding relationship 1003 between COM and COME is wrong or function instruction is used between COM and COME User ladder beyond the maximum permissible linage or step number Reduce 1004 NET number 1005 Incorrect END1 or END2 functional instruction is used EN 1006 Illegal output in NET S 1007 PLC communication failure due to hardware failure or system interruption MEN 1008 Functional instruction is not linked correctly HEN 1009 Network horizontal line is not linked MEN 1010 Editing NET losses due to power off in ladder editting a 1011 Address or data format is not the one specified by this function a 1012 Address or data is wrongly input MEE 1013 Illegal character or data define
286. m Ee opposite Modify the program 0134 5 or more external alarm xcci Occur 5 or more external alarm signals occur Check the ladder diagram the ladder 5 or more external alarm signals occur Check the ladder diagram 0133 The system doos not suppor axis instruction Modiy the program 0194 Rigid tapping can not be used when ONG controled ares exceed 095 MesWondemstun Modify the prosram 0136 iega axis nsructon Modiy the prosram 1S7 Sequence number tobe Wansfered by skip instruction isinloop body 008 Cya statement is wrong or skip instruction enters loop body rose PLC axis change disables YS 320 Appendix l Alarm List 0140 Sequence number does not exist NENNEN 0144 MDI presentation module and DNC mode do not support macro instruction O skip 0142 Illegal scaling beyond 1 999999 is specified SS os in meiden ee TI instruction value ee n1 same one ERR 07 D Or dM M NO 423 AZR 0148 Wegaldataseting data setting 0160 Arc programming only by R in polar system 0161 Reference point plane selection or direction related instructions can not be executed in polar coordinate mode 0163 Reference point or coordinate system related G instructions can not be executed in revolution mode 0164 Reference point or coordinate system related G instructions can not be executed in scaling mode 0165 Please specify revolution scaling or G10 instructions in a single block oo 0166
287. m edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode 0 Not delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 029 IWZ WZO MCV GOF WOF WOF 1 Tool wear offset input by MDI disabled 0 Tool wear offset input by MDI enabled GOF 1 Geometric tool offset input by MDI disabled 0 Geometric tool offset input by MDI enabled MCV 1 Macro variables input by MDI disabled 286 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 0 Macro variables input by MDI enabled WZO 1 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI enabled IWZ 1 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell enabled Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 3 1 G13 G91 G19 G18 G01 G01 1 G01 mode at power on or clearing 0 G00 mode at power on or clearing G18 1 G18 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G01 at power on or clearing G19 1 It depends on parameter No31 1 0 When G19 1 please set G18 to 0 BEEN ee us M 9 3 eme XH c wu eg G19 mode Y Z plane G91 1 To set for G91 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G90 mode at power on or clearing G13 1 To set for G13 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G12 mode at power on or clearing Standard setting 0010 0010 Sya
288. m parameter Z and R is missing when the first drilling is being executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed Q If parameter Q is specified the intermittent feed shown in the figure above is performed Here the system retracts the tool by the retraction d Fig 4 4 1 1 specified by data parameter p270 and the tool performs rapid retraction for distance d intermittently each feeding If G73 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1 hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If the number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the first hole not for the other holes Note 1 In the current version MOO M01 M02 MO6 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Note 2 When the bit parameter NO 43 1 0 no alarm will be issued if there is no cut in value specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 At this moment if the instruction parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 the system performs the hole positioning in XY plane but does not perform the drilling operation When the bit parameter NO 4321 1 an alarm will be issued if no cut in value is specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 i e an alarm 0045 Address Q not found or set to 0 G73 G83 occurs when the instruction parame
289. mode whether the compensation is temporarily cancelled when G28 or G30 moves to the intermittent point is decided by bit parameter No 40722 Tool radius compensation cancel G40 In GOO GO1 mode using the following instruction to perform the linear motion from the old vector of the start point to the end point G40 X Y In GOO mode rapid traverse is performed to the end point along each axis By using this instruction the system switches from tool compensation mode to tool compensation cancel mode If G40 is specified without X Y no operation is performed by the tool Tool radius compensation left G41 1 In G00 G01 mode G41X Y D v It forms a new vector perpendicular to the direction of X Y at the block end point The tool is moved from the tip of the old vector to the tip of the new vector at the start point Tool center path Programmed path Start point Fig 4 5 2 2 When the old vector is zero the tool is switched to tool radius compensation mode from tool offset cancel mode using this instruction Here the offset value is specified by D code 2 In G02 G03 mode G41 G02 G03X_Y_R_ According to the program above the new vector that is located on the line between the circle center and the end point can be created Viewed from the arc advancing direction it points to the left or right The tool center moves along an arc from the old vector tip to the new vector tip on the precondition that the old
290. motor speed of gear shifting 50 setting range 0 1000 r min 0251 Maximum spindle motor speed of shifting 6000 setting range 0 99999 r min 0254 Axis as counting for surface speed control Setting range 0 4 0255 Spindle minimum speed for constant surface speed 100 control G96 Setting range 0 9999 r min Go 08 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 0257 opindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle Setting range 0 5000 r min 0258 Spindle upper limit speed Setting range 0 99999 r min 0261 Spindle encoder lines Setting range 0 9999 0262 Spindle override lower limit Setting range 0 5 1 0266 Limit with vector ignored when moving along outside corner in tool radius compensation C Setting range 0 9999 9999 0267 Maximum value of tool wear compensation setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0268 Maximum error value of tool radius compensation C Setting range 0 0001 0 0100 0269 Helical infeed radius coefficient in groove cycle Setting range 0 0100 3 0000 0270 Retraction amount of high speed peck drilling cycle G73 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0271 Reserved space amount of canned cycle G83 setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0281 Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom Setting range 0 1000 ms 0282 Maximum dwell time at the hole bottom Setting range 1000 9999 ms 0283 Override for retraction in rigid tapping Setting range 0 8000 1 2000 028
291. n If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 MO6 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect If it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling P cannot be stored as modal data Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the taping axis is changed If the taping axis is changed in the rigid mode an alarm No 206 will be issued In feed per minute mode Thread lead feedrate spindle speed Feedrate of Z axis spindle speedxthread lead 94 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code In feed per revolution mode Thread lead federate Federate of Z axis thread lead Example Sp
292. n format is applicable to IF statement A number after DO and a number after END are the identification numbers for specifying the range of execution The identification numbers are 1 2 and 3 If numbers other than 1 2 and 3 are used an alarm occurs Explanation Nestling The identification numbers 1 to 3 in the loop from DO to END can be used repeatedly as required However when a program includes crossing repetition loop overlapped DO ranges an alarm occurs 145 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 The identification numbers 1 to 3 3 DO loops can be nested to 3 levels can be used as many times as required 7 WHILE DO 1 ua E z WHILE DO 2 Program Leg z WHILE DO 3 T END1 A WHILE DO 1 J i END3 i Processing END 2 END 1 END 1 2 The ranges of DO cannot overlap 4 The control can be transferred to the outside of a loop WHILE DO 1 WHILE DO 1 See OIF ES GOTON END 1 Nn omm 5 Transfer cannot enter the loop area END 2 IF GOTO n WHILE DO 1 Nn END 1 Explanation gt Infinite loop When DO is specified without specifying WHILE statement an infinite loop from DO to
293. n is used 2 The helical radius coefficient in the groove cycle must be greater than O The coefficient is set by data parameter P269 Example Rough milling an inner circle groove using the canned cycle instruction G22 as shown in the figure below Initial level Z 50 o Point R level Z Fig 4 4 1 3 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 G00 Rapid positioning G99 G22 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5150 L10 W20 Q10 V10 D1 F800 Groove rough milling within a circle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canned cycle cancel and return from R level M30 Cancel G codes in group 01 G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G22 G23 cannot be specified in the same block or G22 G23 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning 64 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4 4 2 Fine milling cycle within a full circle G24 G25 Format G24 G98 G99 X Y Z R J D F K G25 Function The tool fine mills a full circle within a circle by the specified radius and the specified direction and it returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G24 CCW fine milling inside a circle G25 CW fine milling inside a circle X Y The start point position within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference level in G91 R R reference level which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to start point of this block in G9
294. n machine coordinate system D The offset amount displacement in MPG interruption E Speed component F Remaining distance only displayed in Auto MDI and DNC mode The display is as follows Fig 3 1 1 3 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 H BBO mm 000 wm p ess es PATH 1 me v D ve Fig 3 1 1 3 4 Monitor mode It enters PMONI page by pressing soft key PMONI In this mode the absolute coordinates relative coordinates of the current position as well as the modal message and blocks of the program being executed can be displayed See Fig 3 1 1 4 184 Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting Gu G17 G90 G94 G21 G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 1 727 mm mm 654 207 007 m o m F AF AS S 9 480 mm H mm T M G92 XO YO ZO N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N108 Z2 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 DATA El D I 07 05 PATH 1 Fig 3 1 1 4 Note 1 Whether the modes are displayed in PMONI page can be set by parameter NO 2326 When BIT6 0 the machine coordinates are displayed in the position where the modal instructions are displayed Note 2 In MACHINE ZERO STEP MANUAL and MPG modes the intermediate coordinate system is a relative one while in AUTO lt MDI gt and lt DN
295. n steps are as follows Ca Enter MDI gt mode b Move the cursor to the item to be altered by pressing cursor keys Cc According to the explanation below key in 1 or O or use left and right keys for modification 1 Parameter switch 0 Parameter switch OFF 1 Parameter switch ON When the parameter switch is set to O it is forbidden to modify and set the system parameters meanwhile an alarm 0100 parameter writing valid cancel is issued When the parameter switch is set to 1 an alarm 0100 parameter writing valid is issued Here the SHIFT user can cancel the alarm pressing key key La This operation is only effective in SETTING page 2 Program switch 0 Program switch OFF 1 Program switch ON When the program switch is set to O it is forbidden to edit any program 3 Keyboard selection 0 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC Note In any mode the keyboard selection can be modified if the Emergency Stop button is pressed 4 Input unit oet whether the input unit of the program is metric or inch 0 Metric 1 Inch 5 I O channel 197 e e zn N e t E e Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual It is set by users as required e g if using U disk to perform DNC machining set the channel to 2 0 1 RS232 0 for selecting Xon Xoff protocol 1 for selecting Xmodem protocol 2 USB 6 Automatic sequence number 0 The system wi
296. nate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0050 X coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0051 Y coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0052 Z coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0053 4TH coordinate of the 2nd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0055 X coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0056 Y coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0057 Z coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0058 4TH coordinate of the 3rd reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0060 X coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 297 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0061 Y coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setti
297. ndard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 04 3 QZA QZA 1 To make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling G73 G83 0 Not to make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling G73 683 Standard setting 0000 0010 oystem parameter number 0 4 4 PCP DOV VGR VGR 1 Arbitrary gear ration of the spindle and position encoder enabled 0 Arbitrary gear ration of the spindle and position encoder disabled DOV 1 Override effective during rigid tapping retraction 0 Override ineffective during rigid tapping retraction PCP 1 High speed peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping 0 Standard peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 4 5 OVS OVU TDR NIZ NIZ 1 To perform rigid tapping smoothing 0 Not perform rigid tapping smoothing TDR 1 Touse the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction 0 Not use the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and 290 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List retraction OVU 1 10 retraction override for rigid tapping 0 1 retraction override for rigid tapping OVS 1 In rigid tapping selection and cancel signal for federate override enable 0 In rigid tapping selection and cancel signal for federate override disable Standard setting 0000
298. ndle stop Q Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 3 Spindle sto P Operation 4 Point Z Spindle stop Ges O peration 1 Point R level Spindle C A Spindle stop Point R P Operation 2 Operation 5 opindle CCW Operation 4 Point Z Fig 4 4 19 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed along Z axis to point R level The spindle is rotated CW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G74 instruction When tapping is completed the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped Rapid traverse is then performed to initial level When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Any of the methods below can be used to specify the rigid mode 1 Specify M29 S before a taping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in the block which contains a taping instruction If G74 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next tapping operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 MO6 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes ar
299. ng boxes over 6 layers Never climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy objects on it Do not move or drag the product by the cables connected to it Avoid impact or scratch to the panel and screen Packing box should be protected from dampness insolation and drench E Open package inspection Confirm the product is the one you purchased after opening the package Check whether the product is damaged during transportation Confirm all the elements are complete without damage by referring to the list If there is incorrect product type incomplete accessories or damage please contact us in time B Connection Only qualified personnel can connect and inspect the system The system must be earthed The earth resistance should not be greater than 0 1O and a neutral wire zero wire cannot be used as an earth wire The connection must be correct and secured Otherwise the product may be damaged or unexpected results may occur Connect the surge absorbing diode to the product in the specified direction otherwise the product may be damaged Turn off the power before inserting or unplugging a plug or opening the electric cabinet B Troubleshooting IV Turn off the power supply before troubleshooting or replacing components Overhaul the system when there is a short circuit or overload and do not restart it until the trouble is removed Do not turn ON OFF the product frequently and the ON OFF interval should
300. ng of Z axis Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0334 Dwell time unidirectional positioning Setting range 0 10 S 912 912 912 125 125 125 311 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0335 Direction and overtravel amount of X axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0336 Direction and overtravel amount of Y axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0337 Direction and overtravel amount of Z axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0338 Direction and overtravel amount of 4TH axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0341 ARM interpolation point buffer size 36 Setting range 0 99999 0354 DSP unsuccessful start times Setting range 0 999999 0355 CNC successful start times Setting range 0 999999 0356 Workpiece machined Setting range 0 9999 0357 Total workpiece to be machined Setting range 0 9999 0358 Accumulative time of power on h Setting range 0 99999 0359 Accumulative time of days days Setting range 0 99999 0360 Accumulative time of cutting h Setting range 0 99999 0361 Register parameter of the year Setting range 0 24 0362 Register parameter of the month Setting range 0 12 0363 Register parameter of the day Setting range 0 31 312 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List
301. ng of each diagnosis number 5 Waveform page Press soft key WAVE in DIAGNOSIS page to enter wave page as is 5 shown in fig 3 6 1 216 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting AXIS ALL 1 X z Y SZ 4 A 5 B WAVE TYPE 0 Speed 1 Acc 2 Acc Acc HOR SCALE VER SCALE B DATA 17 04 46 PATH 1 RE steel Fig 3 6 1 5 AXIS select the axis for WAVE diagnosis WAVE select the waveform type HOR SCALE select the graph ratio INPUT Data In any mode input corresponding data and press key D Using key START to monitor signals key STOP to stop monitoring signals e e zn N e t E e 3 6 2 Signal state viewing DIAGNOSIS 1 Press key to select the DIAGNOSE page 2 The respective address explanation and meaning are shown at the lower left corner of the screen when the cursor is moved left or right 3 Move the cursor to the target parameter address or key in the parameter address then press SEARCH key to search 4 In WAVE page the feedrate acceleration and jerk of each axis can be displayed It is easy to debug the system and find the optimum suited parameters for the drive and the motor 3 Alarm display When an alarm is issued ALARM is displayed at the lower left corner of the LCD Press key ALARM wm to display the alarm page There are 4 subpages ALARM USER HISTORY and OPERATE all o
302. ng range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0062 Z coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0063 4TH coordinate of the 4th reference point in machine 0 0000 coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0066 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0067 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0068 Negative Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0069 Positive Y axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0070 Negative Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0071 Positive Z axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0072 Negative 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage 9999 travel detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0073 Positive 4TH axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0076 Negative X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0077 Positive X axis stroke coordinate of storage travel 9999 detection 2 Setting range 9
303. ning for the holes 2 to 6 4 4 8 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 Format Ga1X Y Z RF K_ Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole and then the tool is retracted from the bottom in rapid traverse Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R level F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats if needed G81 G98 G81 G99 D Point R level Point R y b Fig 4 4 8 1 75 e es ag p e e go m e z z ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Z R If either of hole bottom parameter Z and R is missing when the first drilling is executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed After positioning along X axis and Y axis rapid traverse is performed to point R Drilling from point R to point Z is performed the tool is then retracted in the rapid traverse Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle bef
304. nitial level 1 Spindle exact tal stop G O Spindle CCW Spindle exact stop Point Z oin Spindle exact P stop Spindle CW Y lt Shift amount q Fig 4 4 16 1 87 e es ag p e e go m e z z ya e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual After positioning along X and Y axes the tool is stopped after spindle orientation Then the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool nose and positioning rapid traverse is performed to the hole bottom point R The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool nose and the spindle is rotated counterclockwise Boring is performed in the positive direction along Z axis until point Z is reached At point Z the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position after it is oriented again and the tool is retracted in the direction opposite to the tool nose then it is returned to the initial level The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool nose and the spindle is rotated counterclockwise to proceed to the next block operation The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance The retraction direction and retraction axis are set by system parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 respectively Q must be a positive value if it is specified with a negative value the neg
305. nnot be specified in the same block otherwise G84 Cor G74 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning Program restart It is invalid during the rigid taping ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya 4 4 02 Canned cycle cancel G80 Format G80 Function It is used for cancelling the canned cycle Explanation All the canned cycles are cancelled to perform normal operation Point R point Z are also cancelled and the other drilling and boring data is cleared as well Example M3 S100 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to the initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point and cancel the canned cycle M5 Spindle stop Example Explanation for the usage of the canned cycle using the tool length compensation 97 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Reference point Q 350 400 E 2 o A j e a z 4 3 q S S Unit MM qe 1 6 drilling of a 610 hole 7 10 drilling of a 020 hole 11 13
306. not specified by G28 the coordinate values specified by G28 before are used If the current default intermediate point of the system is unknown when G28 is used it is recommended that each axis be specified with one Please take a consideration according to block N5 in the following example 3 eR reference point Fig 4 3 1 1 54 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 1 The action of block G28 can be divided as follows refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point of the specified axis from the current position point A point B at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to the reference point from the intermediate point point B point R at a traverse speed 2 G28 is a non modal instruction which is effective only in the current block 3 Single axis reference point return and multi axis reference point return are available The intermediate point coordinates are saved by the system when the workpiece coordinate system is changed Example N1 G90 G54 X0 Y10 N2 G28 X40 Set the intermediate point of X axis to X40 in G54 workpiece coordinate system and return to reference point via point 40 10 i e X axis returns to the reference point alone N3 G29 X30 Return to point 30 10 via point 40 10 from reference point i e X axis returns to the target point alone N4 G01 X20 N5 G28 Y60 intermediate point is X40 Y60 As its coordinate in X axis is not specified the X40 specified in the prev
307. ns Pay attention to the setting for selecting the coordinate plane when the helical interpolation is being done 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Instruction format G90 G91 Function There are 2 instructions for axis moving including the absolute instruction and the incremental instruction The absolute instruction is a method of programming by the axis moving end point coordinates The end position involves the concept of coordinate system please refer to sections 3 3 1 3 3 4 The incremental instruction is a method of programming by the axis relative moving amount The incremental value is irrelevant with the coordinate system concerned It only requires the moving direction and distance of the end point relative to the start point The absolute instruction and the incremental instruction are G90 and G91 respectively Y Start point AO 100 Fig 4 2 4 1 For the movement from start point to end point in Fig 4 2 4 1 the programming by using absolute instruction G90 and incremental instruction G91 is as follows G90 GO X40 Y70 Or G91 G0 X 60 Y40 The same action can be performed with the two methods users thus can choose either one of them as required 32 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Explanation With no instruction parameter It can be written into the block with other instructions gt G90 and G91 are the modal values in the same group i e if G90 is specified the mode i
308. ns of workpiece coordinate system in a program Explanation 1 With no instruction parameter 2 The system itself is capable of setting 6 workpiece coordinate systems any one of which can be selected by instructions G54 G59 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 3 At Power On the system displays the workpiece coordinate instructions G54 G59 G92 or additional workpiece coordinate system ever executed before Power Off 4 When different workpiece coordinate systems are called in a block the axis to move is positioned to the coordinate of the new coordinate system for the axis not to move its coordinate shifts to the corresponding coordinate in the new coordinate system with its actual position on the machine tool unchanged Example The corresponding machine tool coordinate for G54 coordinate system origin is 10 10 10 The corresponding machine coordinate for G55 coordinate system origin is 30 30 30 When the program is executed in order the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of the end point are displayed as follows Table 4 2 8 1 Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate GO G54 X50 Y50 Z50 50 50 50 60 60 60 G55 X100 Y100 100 100 30 130 130
309. nsfer instruction Custom macro body ends Fig 4 7 1 2 structure of custom macro body 130 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 1 Variable usage With a variable the parameter value in custom macro body can be specified The variable value can be assigned by the main program or set by LCD MDI or be assigned by a computation during the execution of custom macro body Multiple variables can be used in custom macro and they are differentiated by their variable numbers 1 Variable representation The variable is expressed by a sign followed by a variable number the format of which is as follows Isi 2 3 4 example 5 109 1005 2 Variable reference The variable can be used to replace the value of a parameter Example F 103 When 103 15 it is the same as F15 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya G 130 When 103 3 it is the same as G3 Note 1 Variables cannot be referenced by parameter word O and N program number and sequence number e g O 100 and N 120 are not permitted in programming Note 2 Variables exceeding the max limit of the parameter cannot t be used When 30 120 M 30 exceeds the max limit of the instruction Note 3 Display and setting of variable values The values can be displayed on LCD or be set by MDI mode 2 Types of variables Variables are divided into null variables local variables common variables and system variables depending on
310. nt is a fixed point on the machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference point return function There are 3 instructions for the reference point as is shown in Fig 4 3 1 1 The tool can be 53 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual automatically moved to the reference point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G28 or be moved automatically from the reference point to a specified point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G29 y 3 R Reference point g bel e e E 1 Ss Intermediate point r z Start point for reference Target point of return from us point return reference point Fig 4 3 1 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 Format G28X Y Z Function G28 is for the operation of returning to the reference point a specific point on the machine tool via intermediate point Explanation Intermediate point An intermediate point is specified by an instruction parameter in G28 It can be expressed by absolute or incremental instructions During the execution of this block the coordinate values of the intermediate point of the axis specified are stored for the use of G29 instruction returning from the reference point Note The coordinate values of the intermediate point are stored in the CNC system Only the axis coordinate values specified by G28 are stored each time for the other axes
311. nt time cent Lines Bytes Sec Sending File Name Partition sent Pach on the CNC panel to receive data and then press button BEEN on the 5 Press key panel to start the machining Note 1 Do not operate the serial communication software during DNC transmission except for ending the transmission Note 2 M99 is processed as M30 in DNC mode Note 3 Press key to cancel the operation after the machining is completed 11 2 USB communication 11 2 1 Overview and precautions Precautions 1 Set I O channel to 2 in lt SETTING gt page 2 The CNC programs should be stored in the root directory of the U disk with file extension txt nc 269 e e zn N e t E e CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual or CNC or they cannot be read by the system 3 After the USB communication is finished pull out the U disk when its indicator does not flicker or after a moment is waited for to ensure the completion of the data transmission 11 2 2 Operations steps for USB part programs In MDI mode enter the SETTING DATA DEAL page press direction key Or to move the cursor to PART PRGR Press soft key OUTPUT or INPUT to enter the page shown as follows fig 11 2 2 1 CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 13 FILE DIR LADDER PLC oaa 18 11 87 84 11 18 18 11 87 12 8
312. o 1 microsecond 280 AXSX AXSY AXSZ AXS4 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 1 X axis is set as linear axis 0 X axis is set as rotation axis 1 Y axis is set as linear axis 0 Y axis is set as rotation axis 1 Z axis is set as linear axis 0 Z axis is set as rotation axis 1 The 4 axis is set as linear axis 0 The 4 axis is set as rotation axis oystem parameter number 0 0 9 APC UHSM APZX APZY APZZ APZA APZA APZZ APZY APZX UHSM APC 1 Use absolute encoder 0 Not use absolute encoder 1 Machine zero point can be set manually 0 Machine zero point can not be set manually 1 Position of the X axis machine tool are consistent with that of the absolute encoder 0 Position of the X axis machine tool are not consistent with that of the absolute encoder 1 Position of the Y axis machine tool are consistent with that of the absolute encoder 0 Position of the Y axis machine tool are not consistent with that of the absolute encoder 1 Position of the Z axis machine tool are consistent with that of the absolute encoder 0 Position of the Z axis machine tool are not consistent with that of the absolute encoder 1 Position of the 4 axis machine tool are consistent with that of the absolute encoder 0 Position of the 4 axis machine tool are not consistent with that of the absolute encoder Standard setting 0000 0100
313. odification and setting for pitch offset 1 The pitch error offset point for each axis is set by data parameters P221 P224 the pitch error offset interval by data parameters P226 P229 and the pitch error offset multiplier by data parameters P231 P234 2 In MDI mode input the offset value for each point in turn Note Refer to VOLUME 4 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION in GSK218MC CNC System Installation and Connection Manual for the setting of pitch offset 3 4 Setting display 3 4 1 Setting page 1 Entering the page 196 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting SETTING Press key J to enter the SETTING page There are four subpages including SETTING EWORK EIDATA and PASSWORD All of them can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys The contents are shown as follows see Fi PAR SWITCH ol 0 OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 0 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ 0 OFF 1 ON SEQ INC 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE 2011 ez M 12 D TIME wini se dM le INPUT 10 50 13 PATH 1 EWORK EDATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 1 1 2 Explanation for SETTING page Press soft key SETTING to enter the page shown as Fig 3 4 1 1 After entering the page users can view and modify the parameters The operatio
314. of the workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system and X Y plane is selected The zero point in the workpiece system is set as the origin of the coordinate system The XY plane is selected Fig 4 2 13 2 42 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Specifying angles and a radius with absolute value G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate instruction and selecting XY plane setting the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 Y 150 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 3 Y270 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 2H G15 G80 Cancelling the polar coordinate instruction T e Specifying angles with incremental value and a polar radius with absolute value e G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate instruction and selecting XY plane setting the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system 3 G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 Je G91 Y 120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 Y 120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 G15 G80 Cancelling the polar coordinate instruction Moreover when programming by polar coordinate system the current coordinate plane setting should be consid
315. offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning e ag p e e UG ka e z ya 4 4 18 Boring cycle G89 Format G89 X Y ZR RP F K Function This cycle is used for boring a hole Explanation XY Hole positioning data Z Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P Minimum dwell time at the bottom of the hole with its absolute value used if it is negative F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats G89 G98 G89 G99 Q Initial level O Point R level Point Z Point Z Fig 4 4 18 1 90 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code This cycle is almost the same as G85 The difference is that this cycle performs a dwell at the hole bottom Before specifying G89 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G89 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed while the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the
316. ol or machine damage The manual intervention operations are shown in the following figure 229 CG e ag N Gi e t p c CG e ag N i x t E e Or JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 The N1 block cuts a workpiece A Workpiece N1 Block start point 2 The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold key in the middle of the N1 block Manual intervention A Workpiece 4 After automatic return to point A by GOO speed the remaining moving command of block N1 is executed Workpiece Fig 4 1 4 1 4 1 5 Workpiece alignment To ensure the machining precision size shape and position precision and surface quality the alignment positioning must be performed to the workpiece and fixture clamping workpiece The common methods for alignment are alignment by drawing lines alignment by trial cutting etc For GSK218MC system an operation method for alignment using a tool is specially designed Example Using the method for alignment by trial cutting and halving also called halving alignment to position the center in XY plane of a square workpiece Operation steps are as follows 1 Start the spindle at a certain speed 2 Shift the system to relative coordinate display page First perform alignment in X direction Operate each moving axis and position them to X positive direction side of the workpiece in Manual mode move do
317. old contents by the new ones 10 1 1 6 Single block deletion PROGRAM Select EDIT mode then press key m to display the program Locate the cursor to the DELETE beginning of the block to be deleted Press keys EJ to delete the block where the cursor is located Note Regardless of whether there is a sequence number in the block the user can press key S to delete it The cursor should be located at the beginning of the line 256 Chapter 10 Edit Operation 10 1 1 7 Deletion of multiple blocks Blocks deletion from the current displayed word to the block of which the sequence number is specified N100 X100 0 M03 S2000 N2233 S02 N 2300 M30 Cursor current position Area to be deleted Fig 10 1 1 7 1 PROGRAM select EDIT mode press key to display the program Locate the cursor to the beginning of the target position to be deleted as the position of word N100 in the figure above then key in the last word of the multiple blocks to be deleted e g S02 as Fig 10 1 1 7 1 above finally DELETE press key une to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified Note 1 200 000 lines of blocks can be deleted at most Note 2 If the last word to be deleted occurs many times in a program the system will delete the blocks till the word nearest to the cursor location 10 1 2 Deletion of a single program CG e ag N Gi e t p c The steps for deleting a p
318. on Press this key Subpages for relative coordinates absolute coordinates pu to enter and all coordinates of the current point and PLC can be pag position page displayed by switching corresponding soft keys Subpages for programs MDI current mode current time Press this key and program directory can be displayed by switching to enter corresponding soft keys Program names in different pages page program page can be viewed by pressing page keys in directory subpage Settin Press this key Four subpages in total The subpages for setting workpiece S to enter setting coordinate data and password setting can be displayed by pag page switching corresponding soft keys Note The page switch above can also be done by pressing corresponding function keys repeatedly after bit parameters NO 25 0 25 7 NO 26 6 26 7 are set Refer to CHAPTER 3 in this manual for the explanation for each page Pgrogram 1 2 4 Machine control area of GSK218MC CG e ag N e t E e i ye e mm Cen cmm e lb b OBES Drle Im beln lalo Te pls rtlr nn3s X y z 4 mn amo wo IW sre mnf mpc onc sme om ex ev ez ean SG ael e I D D je D D D D D D ShO Hjt OD PCO oe P 9 fol e lv ME x y z USER2 CEW STOF cw Isneercle nee aome ep fone ls ux E oT AW M96 NM RAPID e e e p e e w e Set Jg an D a rpm we esO So Eo esd a fusen if Ys UFO D st
319. on number ranging from 1 256 DO is O by default The current tool diameter value is obtained by the specified sequence number K Number of repeats Cycle process 1 Rapid positioning to the position in XY plane 2 Rapid down to point R level 3 Cut a depth W downward at the cutting speed by helical mode feed to the circle center EN Mill the circle surface with a radius of helically outward from the center by an increment of L each time Return to R reference level along Z axis Axes X and Y rapidly position to the start point Down to the position at which the distance to the end surface to be machined is V along Z axis 8 Cut a depth Q V downward along Z axis 9 Repeat the operations 4 8 till the total depth of circle surface is finished 10 Return to initial level or point R level depending on G98 or G99 oO Ol Noe ES Gi g kel a e yo e ch Z ya N xN Instruction path Fig 4 4 1 1 63 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual LY Note D is the tool diameter value Y Note D is the tool diameter value Ais the helical radius coefficient Ais the helical radius coefficient Tool center path Tool center path Circle groove border e g p z yo m e 3 z ya Fig 4 4 1 2 Note 1 Itis suggested that the NO 12 1 be set to 1 when this instructio
320. ons above are added to the end of the block specifying linear interpolation G01 or circular interpolation GO2 G03 a chamfering or corner rounding is 52 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code added automatically outside the corner during machining Blocks specifying chamfering or corner rounding arc can be specified consecutively Explanation 1 Chamfering after L specify the distance from the virtual corner point to the start and the end points of the corner The virtual corner point is the corner point that exists if chamfering is not performed As the following figure shows 1 G91 G01 X100 L10 2 X100 Y100 ES ag besch Inserted chamfering block T yo a z ya Virtual corner point Fig 4 2 18 1 2 Corner R after R specify the radius for the corner rounding as shown below 1 G91 G01 X100 R10 2 X100 Y100 Center of an arc with radius R Fig 4 2 18 2 Restrictions 1 Chamfering and corner rounding can only be performed in a specified plane and these functions cannot be performed for parallel axes 2 f the inserted chamfering or corner rounding block causes the tool to go beyond the original interpolation move range an alarm is issued Corner rounding cannot be specified in a threading block 4 When the values of chamfering and corner rounding are negative their absolute values are used in the system c2 4 3 Reference point G instruction The reference poi
321. ool magazine Tool magazine Manual mode ob 54 operation keys operation ON OFF T INFEED T RETRACTION Manual tool Manual tool release Manual mode release clamp key clamp ON OFF Machine lock MACHINE switch Chip removal Chip removal switch ON OFF CG e ag N e x t E e 172 Chapter 1 Operation Panel Program restart key Keys Designation Explanation Geer ee ee e Manual tool change key wanda toorenange MANUAL mode T CHANGER An alarm occurs if the hard limit is reached Press SEES Overtravel this key With its indicator MANUAL mode MGP mode OVERTRAVEL release key lighting up to move the machine reversely till the indicator goes off For exiting the running program Auto mode the distance to go is x or restoring to the last machining state before a the straight line distance from the current point to the break PROG e RESTART sudden power loss point e Optional stop ON OFF Weer pereo Auto mode MDI mode DNC o ke stopped after a block meds OPTIONAL y containing MO1 is executed 4 100 e Feedrate override key Rapid traverse ON OFF Any mode WW Woo WAN oan Rapid traverse key Rapid traverse ON OFF Manual mode RAPID For selecting rapid override manual step override and MPG override Rapid Step uro Aves ep Dune and MPG 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 e override keys X Y Z 4 x ev ez gh emu umen wem Manual feeding key X Y Z 4 F
322. ool setting gauge in the machine coordinate system 7 Start point R on Z axis The distance a positive value the tool moves from the tool nose to the tool setting gauge at the measured speed 8 Tool length estimation L The distance a positive value metric mm min inch inch min 202 Chapter 3 Interface Display and Data Modification and Setting from the tool nose to the spindle end face 9 The safe position Z of the tool setting gauge on Z axis The safe position from the spindle end face to the tool setting gauge plane 10 Select lt AUTO gt mode press soft key AUTO MEAS to enable the system to call the tool setting macro program automatically then press key to execute Auto Tool Setting MEASUREMENT MODE LENGTH WRITE MOD TOOL NO OFFSET NO MEASURE FEED T SETTING GAUGE X REF POINT SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE BY JOG T ESTIMATION STEPS PRESS lt ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START Z MIN MT COORD Z 900 mm H mm E T H F A H ag H a DH ag a ag c H mm Z H mm r au eS m3 COORD SYS SELECT G54 X DO mm MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF l D THE MIN COORD OF SP NOSE TO T SETTING GAUGE 12 00 12 DATA CCC PATH 1 pe E
323. opped if an arc is specified a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Circular gt Linear Programmed path Tool center path 113 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Cb Tool movement around the inner side of a corner 90 xa 180 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel type A and type B which are set by bit parameter NO 4020 Linear Linear Circular linear Programmed path SUIMMUUIBISOIg T yoog mear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path L d Int ti I E fc ntersection Programmed path Tool center path Tool center path c Tool movement around an outer side of an corner at an acute angle a 90 There are 2 types of tool paths at offset start or cancel type A and type B which are set by bit parameter NO 4020 Linear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path Tool center Tool center path path 114 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Linear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path eee EJ Tool center path L d Tool movement around an outer side of an corner at an acute angle less than 1 a 1 Linear linear mmm e Tool center path Program med path Fig 4 5 3 5 5 Changing offset direction in offset mode The offset direction is determined by tool radius compensation G code The signs of the offset value are as follows Table
324. or positive negative movement of X Y Zand 4th axes in MANUAL mode and Step mode and the axis moved in positive direction is selected by MPG Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero return MPG mode Step mode Manual mode DNC mode Machine zero return mode Step mode Manual mode MPG mode Channel selection key For machining channel switch The function is unavailable temporarily Any mode Feed hold key Press this key to stop Auto operation Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Cycle start key Press this key to start program Auto operation Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Note A block with more than 1 sign at its beginning is skipped by the system even if the skip function is OFF 173 CG e g N e t e c er JJ Sx GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 2 5 Machine control area of GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V Fig 1 2 5 1 Machine control area of GSK218MC H 4 luser wen esos sos fioo oos B acre 0 001 001 0 1 TE de z ag N e m t E e Fig 1 2 5 2 Machine control area of GSK218MC V The use and function definition of the basic keys for the machine control area of GSK218MC H and GSK218MC V are the same as those for 218MC Therefore only the newly added keys are explained here 174 Chapter 1 Operation Panel Remarks and operation Designation Expl
325. or the relative coordinate and halving function setting the assignment speed is increased and the operation is more convenient DXX DXX Fig 4 1 5 1 Note 1 This system can only set and input the coordinates displayed at the relative position All the places where the offset value is modified can set the positions of the relative coordinates Note 2 Bearing operation function The displayed coordinates can be set after addition or subtraction operation is performed to it 23 CG e ag N Gi e t p c CG e ag N i x t E e Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Note 3 After the coordinate system is set the coordinate system set by G92 will be lost due to mechanical zero return or G54 G59 workpiece coordinate system calling but the one of which the machine coordinates are written to the G54 G59 workpiece coordinate systems by parameters will not be lost It is recommended to use the latter method 4 2 Spindle control 4 2 1 Spindle CCW qn Specifies S speed in MDI mode in Manual MPG Step mode press this key to rotate the spindle counterclockwise 4 2 2 Spindle CW 2 D Specifies S speed in MDI mode in Manual MPG Step mode press this key to rotate the spindle clockwise 4 2 3 Spindle stop Slie STOP in Manual MPG Step mode press this key to stop the spindle 4 2 4 Spindle automatic gear shift
326. ore G81 is specified When G81 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only performed for the first hole For the other holes it is not performed Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with a canned cycle instructioin the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Example M3 S2000 opindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G81 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 10 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drilling hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drilling hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 S
327. ote 1 The signs of parameters P335 P338 are for the direction of single direction ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya positioning and their values for the overrun Note 2 If overrun gt 0 the positioning direction is positive Note 3 If overrun lt 0 the positioning direction is negative Note 4 If overrun 0 no single direction positioning is available 4 2 7 On line modification for system parameters G10 Function It is used to set or modify the values of tool radius length offset external zero offset workpiece zero offset additional workpiece zero offset data parameter bit parameter and so on in a program Format G10L50N PR Setting or modifying bit parameter G10L51N R Setting or modifying data parameter G11 Canceling parameter input mode Parameter definition N Parameter number Sequence number to be modified P Parameter bit number Bit number to be modified R Value Parameter value after being modified The values can also be modified by following instructions Refer to relative sections for details G1012P X Y ZAB Setting or modifying external zero offset or workpiece zero offset G10L10P R Setting or modifying length offset G10L11P R Setting or modifying length wear G10L12P R Setting or modifying radius offset G1OL13P R Setting or modifying radius wear G10 L20 P XYZAB Setting or modifying additional workpiece zero offset Note 1 In parameter input mode no NC statement
328. other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal instruction with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G89 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 return to point R level then stop at the hole bottom for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level
329. ow further edit for the program zz e ei ag N 5 x A files by serial communication software S New Open fe Save Paste d tt P About System GSK 218M Y PI mc Comment Fai Send Fil m pe EE Pol be D ommuni c end File qt ecelve File c jiy et Port Bak 38400 007999 G54G0X0Y020 N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z230M351500M8 N10822 3 N126X75 425Y 48 5512 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 2 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 2 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 2 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 2 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 2 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 7 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 2 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z0 N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 N148 X74 503 Y 48 379 Z 047 N150 X74 445 Y 48 437 Z 052 N152 X73 71 Y 49 17 7 191 Ready Fig 11 1 4 1 ald l IR Communi c 4 DNC transmission Click in the toolbar or pull down menu DNC Communic in menu Operation to send the data When the system I O channel is set to 0 PC sends the files directly in a common way then DNC COMMUNICATION dialog displays the states of file sending including the file name sent bytes sent lines as well as sent time and speed byte s as is shown in fig 11 1 4 2 When the system I O channel is set to 1 PC sends 268 Chapter 11 System Communication the files by pack and the dialog displays the states such as sent pack and retransmission times as is shown in fig 11 1 4 3 DNC Communication State File Hame cent Bytes se
330. peed 15 G97 Constant surface speed G97S T control cancel cutting speed Return to initial plane in G98 canned cycle 10 Written into blocks y Tj TI a 4 4 l i a TE Return to point R Vgl id in canned Vgl id Note 1 If modal instructions and non modal instructions are in the same block the non modal instructions take precedence At the same time the corresponding modes are changed according to the other modal instructions in the same block but not executed Note 2 For the G code with sign when the power is switched on the system is in the state of this G code some G codes are determined by bit parameter NO 3120 7 24 Note 3 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code The G codes of group 00 are all non modal G codes except G10 G11 G92 Note 4 An alarm occurs if G codes not listed in this table are used or G codes that cannot be Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 selected are specified G codes from different groups can be specified in a block but 2 or more G codes from the same group can not be specified in a block by principle If no alarm occurs when two or more G codes in the same group are in a block after parameter setting the latter G code functions If a G code of group 01 is in the same block with a G code of group 09 the G code of group 01 prevails In canned cycle mode if G codes from 01 group are specified the canned cycle will be cancelled automatically and the sy
331. peed r min Constant surface speed controlled axis instruction G96 Pn P1 X axis P2 Y axis P3 Z axis P4 4th axis Clamp of max spindle speed G92 S S specifies the max spindle speed r min 153 e ag p a e yo m e z z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Function The number following S is used to specify the surface speed relative speed between tool and workpiece The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless of the tool position Explanation 1 G96 is a modal instruction After it is specified the program enters the constant surface speed control mode and the specified S value is assumed as a surface speed 2 A G96 instruction must specify the axis along which constant surface speed control is applied It can be cancelled by G9 instruction 3 To execute the constant surface speed control it is necessary to set a workpiece coordinate system then the coordinate value at the center of the rotary axis becomes zero e g p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Fig 6 3 1 Workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control 4 When constant surface speed control is applied if a spindle speed higher than the value specified in G 92 S it is clamped at the maximum spindle speed When the power is switched on and the maximum spindle speed is not yet set the S in G96 is regarded as zero t
332. pensaton shoul be canceled before MO instructor Co O EE 0057 The plane selected by G17 Gia or G19 1s changed in tool compensator C RECHTER Lus Toornose positoning errin toor compensation 0040 Cancel he tooi compensation before changing the workpiece coordinate 0041 __Interrence occurs in 1o01 compensaton C wiled overoutirg Ten blocks with stop tool instruction are specified in tool compensation mode 0042 Modify the program 0043 No authority Change it in password page bc 0044 In canned cycle one of instruction in G27 G28 G29 G30 is specified 0045 In canned cycle Incanned cycle G73 G83 cutting depth Q is notspecifiedoritisO Sale BED Incanned cycle G73 G83 cutting depth Q is not specified or itis0 is not speres or it is O EE P4 is specified _ 0047 Perommachiezerorelumbefre executing instructions G28 630 G5 0 memed eyes plane Zishigherthan pane 00s in canned cyte plane Zis tower nan plane 0050 Moeiwencwngn cmedogemoe 005i Wrong movement or distance is specified after rounding or chamierng 0052 Miror image function can not ve used in grooving canned eye 0055 wrong instruction format for rounding or chanvforng RRE ww wee 0055 mos shali notin the same block wih macro mstructon G65 or Fie input fated Cut ofthe power and rest 0058 in block of rounding or chamfering specified avis is notin the selected pane Program n
333. pindle stops M30 Cancel G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G81 cannot be specified in the same block Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning 4 4 9 Drilling cycle counterboring cycle G82 Format G82 X_Y_Z_ R_P_F_K_ Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole At the bottom a dwell is performed and the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole in rapid traverse Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R 76 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code F Cutting federate P The minimum dwell time at the hole bottom with its absolute value used if it is negative K Number of repeats Ka level Point R level Point R P Point Z Fig 4 4 9 1 After positioning along axes X and Y rapid traverse is performed to point R and drilling is then performed from point R to point Z When the tool reaches the bottom of the hole a dwell is performed and the tool is then retracted in rapid t
334. ping axis in 200 retraction 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0303 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0304 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms Go 10 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List 0320 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 1 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0321 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 2 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0322 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping 3 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0323 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 0324 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0325 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 0326 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 0327 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0328 Spindle instruction frequency dividing coefficient CMD 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 0329 Rotational angle with no rotational angle specified in coordinate rotation Setting range 0 9999 9999 0330 Scaling with no scaling specified setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0331 Scaling of X axis Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0332 Scaling of Y axis Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0333 Scali
335. point R level Operation 6 Rapid traverse to the initial point Positioning is performed in XY plane and hole machining is performed along Z axis It is defined that a canned cycle operation is determined by 3 types which are specified by G codes respectively 1 Daeta type G90 absolute mode G91 incremental mode 2 Return point plane G98 initial level G99 point R level 3 Groove machining type G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 4 Hole machining type G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 Initial point Z level and point R level Initial point Z level It is the absolute position where the tool is located in Z axis before the canned cycle Point R level It is also called safety level It is the position in Z axis which is generally located a certain distance above the workpiece surface to prevent the tool from colliding with the workpiece and ensure an enough distance for deceleration when the rapid traverse is switched to cutting feed in canned cycle G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 specifies all the data of canned cycle hole position data hole 57 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual machining data and number of repeats into a single block Z R f either of hole bottom parameter Z and R is missing when the first hole drilling is executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed The format of hole machining is as follows G17 G X Y Z R
336. point R when a return is made Its absolute value is used if it is negative Q Cut depth for each cutting feed F Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats 95 e g p e e yo m e 3 Z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 d retraction distance d retraction distance High speed peck taping High speed peck taping Initial level Point R level G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 d cutting start distance Standard peck taping d cutting start distance Standard peck taping Initial level un Fig 4 4 21 1 There are two types of peck rigid tapping cycles high speed peck tapping cycle and standard peck tapping cycle both of which are set by bit parameter NO 44325 When bit parameter NO 44375 is 1 the type is high speed peck tapping cycle After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R level The cutting is performed with feed depth Q cutting depth for each cutting feed from point R and then the tool is retracted by a distance d set by number parameter P284 Whether the override is valid in rigid tapping retraction is set by bit parameter NO 44 4 The retraction speed override is set by bit parameter NO 45 3 Whether the same time constant is used for rigid taping feed and retraction is set by bit parameter N
337. ramming and Operation Manual setting macro program automatically then press key to execute the tool setting MEASUREMENT MODE LENGTH WRITE WODE d i ib TOOL NO Tg H mm OFFSET NO H 4 o MEASURE FEED F 48 T SETTING GAUGE SELECT T SETTING GAUGE FIXED POINT POINT NEN STEP1 INPUT THE PARA OF MEASUREMENT Y REF POINT Y 2 STEP2 NONUSE FIXED POINT MOVE T TO Z SAFETY HEIGHT R 58 808 E TOP OF T SETTING GAUGE EY JOG T ESTIMATION L se eee STEPS PRESS ST MEAS THEN CYCLE START z MIN MT COORD Z 38 CODRD SYS SELECT B5 H mm MEAS TOOL BEFORE SET Z REF STEP1 MOVE TOOL TO WORK SURFACE Y mm STEP2 PRESS lt MEASURE gt SET Z REF o an THE LENGTH OF SP NOSE TO THE TOOL TIP 12 00 36 DATA 000000000 E PATH 1 _ dq EBB ere ree ee Fig 3 4 2 2 9 The length difference between a tool and reference tool is set to the tool offset H CG g N e T E e 4 UU 4 000 BUD A 0000 d VU QUU d JUVY d WU d WU lgl 000 JUVE JUVE QUU BUY D d D d 0000 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 0000 X 304 9175 Y 104 9179m Z 3 9340m A H BOBOmn INPUT El 18 85 58 PATH 1 Fig 3 4 2 2 10 Note After changing a tool it is required to perform tool length measurement again Only in this way the correct length can be offset to the machining program 3 Z axis workpiece origin setting Note Before setting the
338. range 0 9999 ms 0202 Width acceptable for M S T completion signal Setting range 0 9999 ms 0203 Output time of reset signal 200 Setting range 50 400 ms 0204 Bits allowable for M codes Setting range 1 2 0205 Bits allowable for S codes Setting range 1 6 0206 Bits allowable for T codes Setting range 1 4 0210 Incremental amount for automatic sequence number 10 insertion Setting range O 1000 0211 Tool offset heading number input by MDI disabled 306 Setting ra 0212 Setting ra 0214 Setting ra 0216 Setting ra 0217 Setting ra 0218 Setting ra 0219 Setting ra 0221 Setting ra 0222 CD D 2 e o 2 GC D B C 0223 Setting ra 0224 Setting ra 0226 Setting ra 0227 Setting ra 0228 Setting ra 0229 Setting ra 0231 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List nge 0 9999 Tool offset numbers input by MDI disabled nge 0 9999 Error limit of arc radius nge 0 0001 0 1000 mm Pitch error compensation number of X axis reference point nge 0 9999 Pitch error compensation number of Y axis reference point nge 0 9999 Pitch error compensation number of Z axis reference point nge 0 9999 Pitch error compensation number of 4TH axis reference point nge 0 9999 Pitch error compensation points of X axis nge 0 1000 Pitch error compensation points of Y axis Pitch error compensation points of Z a
339. ration of program name 11 e ag p e e UG ka e z ga Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 2 1 2 Sequence number and program block A program consists of many instructions and an instruction unit is called a block see Fig 2 1 1 The blocks are separated by the program end code see Fig 2 1 1 In this manual the block end code is represented by character Address N with a four digit sequence number behind it can be used at the beginning of the block see Fig 2 1 1 and the leading zero can be omitted Sequence numbers whether the sequence number is inserted is set by Parameter NO 0 5 or set the number in the setting page directly See Section 3 4 1 in Operation can be specified in a random order and the intervals between them can be unequal set by Data Parameter P210 They can be specified in all blocks or just in some important blocks However the numbers should be arranged in ascending order according to general machining sequence It is for convenience to insert sequence numbers to important parts of the program e g inserting sequence number for tool changing or when the index table moves to a new machining plane Note The N instruction is not processes as a line number when it is in the same block with G10 2 1 3 Word A word is a factor that composes a block It consists of an address and some digits behind it with sign tor
340. raverse Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle before G82 is specified When G82 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning and the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the first hole It is not executed for the other holes Note In the current version MOO M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other instructions in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time P is a modal instruction with its min value set by data parameter P281 and its max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data f it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G82 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning
341. rd authority gege Ida 211 3 5 Graphic display VARRRENRRRRARARRRARRRRRRRRRAARRRRRRRXVARRRAHRRARARARRRARRRRRARRRRRRARRARRARRRRARRAAVARRARRRRASARRARRARRRRRARRRARRRAA 212 3 6 Diagnosis display BRRARRERKNARRRARRERRRERARRRRRRRRARARRERVANSRARERERAANERARRESAAEHANARRERRNESASUSREERENANERSARRERAAERSTARRRRERRRRRRAA 214 3 6 1 Diagnosis data display x Jia a Rn RR UR RR A RN RR RR OR RR C RUN GE OG RURAL DR RO ON RA OR RN RR CR OA RON NR RR LR a DR RR OR 214 3 6 2 Signal state viewing dr EG Rd adie dada Weed baa RA OLDER osa da AG E Maw Ee ee enews M iac a Re HC da tay 217 3 7 Alarm display WARERARRARRRARRNAREZRARRRARAASU7AARWERRNARRRARRERANENARRRRRWAREASARRRRARRRSASRRRRRARESAR E AE A 217 3 8 PLC display WRRRRRARRARRRARRRRARRRARARARARARRRARRRRARRARRRRARAARRRRRRRRRARARRRRRARRARRRAERRRARAARRRRRRARRARRRARRARRARRARRARARARRRARAS 220 3 9 Help display SERRRRRARARARARERRARRRRSERRRAARERSSERERSTNARERARARNRARRZRSRRRARARRSSRRRARARERRRRRRRARARRRRRRRRARRRRRARRRARAARRRARRRRRRRRRAS 222 CHAPTER 4 MANUAL OPERATION mnn nnn nnn 228 4 1 Coordinate axis movement He 228 4 1 1 Manual feed EE EE EE 228 4 1 2 Manual rapid lraVerse e III IIIa 228 4 1 3 Manual feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection 68 228 4 1 4 Manual intervention MM MM MM H M MMMRRRReReeHenReHeHeHemmyInRe m 229 4 1 5 Workpiece alignment E n EIE ETT 230 4 2 Spindle control 7 ee 232 4 2 1 Spindle CCW T 232 4 2 2 Spindle CW anne 232 4 2 3 Spindle stop ETE 232 4 2 4 Spindle automatic gear Shift en 232 4 3 Other
342. rd setting 0000 0001 oystem parameter number 0 1 2 FDR RDR TDR RFO LRP RPD RPD 1 Manual rapid effective before reference point return after power on 0 Manual rapid ineffective before reference point return after power on LRP 1 The positioning GOO interpolation type is linear 0 The positioning GOO interpolation type is non linear RFO 1 Rapid feed stop when override is FO 0 Rapid feed not stop when override is FO TDR 1 Dry run effective during tapping 0 Dry run ineffective during tapping RDR 1 Dry run effective during cutting feeding 0 Dry run ineffective during cutting feeding FDR 1 Dry run effective during rapid positioning 0 Dry run ineffective during rapid positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 1 3 HPC NPC NPC 1 Feed per revolution effective with no position encoder 0 Feed per revolution ineffective with no position encoder HPC 1 Position encoder installed 0 Position encoder not installed Standard setting 0000 0010 oystem parameter number ANE DLF 1 Reference point return by manual feed after reference point is setup and memorized 0 Reference point return by rapid traverse after reference point is setup and DLF 282 Appendix GSK218MC Series Parameter List memorized Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number
343. reading smooth control 2 0000 Setting range 0 0000 30 0000 Prereading smooth control 409 is used to reduce machining slash caused by CAM program errors through prereading the machining shape automatically calculating the whole shape 0 Stop prereading smooth control function 1 Perform smooth processing according to the length 2 Perform smooth processing according to the length and the angle 0410 Precision smooth and balance coefficient 10 0000 Setting range 0 0000 10 0000 To realize high precision control user only needs to set parameter value of precision smooth and balance coefficient The parameter which includes 0 10 11 grades in total can control the grade of machining effect 410 O indicates high precision control In position precision rather than smooth is strictly controlled It is especially beneficial for machining the materials with high requirements for subtle edges and corners such as characters 1 10 Return to high speed and high precision control The lower the grade the better the precision The higher the grade the better the smoothness The parameter can be adjusted to achieve the best results according to the actual machining situation 0411 Spline shape control coefficient 50 0000 315 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 0412 Fitting precision control of small lines 1 0000 Setting range 10 0000 50
344. red as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block which contains no X Y Z or other additional axes boring is not performed 89 Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G88 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G88 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius
345. repeats 93 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G84 G98 G84 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop O 9O Operation 1 O Q Initial level Operation 2 Operation 6 Operation 2 E Operation 1 Point R level Spindle stop Spindle CCW E pne stop Point R P Operation 5 Operation 3 Operation 5 Spindle CW lt P operation4 Point Z P operating Point Z Fig 4 4 20 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R level along Z axis The spindle is rotated CCW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G84 instruction When tapping is completed the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped Rapid traverse to initial level is then performed When taping is being performed the feedrate override and spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode Rigid mode can be specified using any of the following methods 1 Specify M29 S before a tapping instruction 2 Specify M29 S in a block that contains a tapping instruction If G84 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next tapping operatio
346. ries Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 7 2 1 Feed per minute G94 Format G94 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount per minute Unit mm min or inch min Explanation 1 After G94 is specified in feed per minute mode the feed amount of the tool per minute is directly specified by a number after F 2 G94 is a modal code Once specified it remains effective till G95 is specified The default at power on is feed per minute mode 3 An override from 0 to 200 can be applied to feed per minute with the override keys or band switch on the operator panel Feed amount per minute CG ag p ar ei yo p S ount per mir mm min or inch min yo Workpiece Worktable Fig 2 1 1 Feed per minute Restriction Feed per minute mode cannot be applied to some instructions such as threading 7 2 2 Feed per revolution G95 Format G95 E Function Feed amount per revolution Unit mm r or inch r Explanation 1 This function is unavailable until a spindle encoder is installed on the machine 2 After specifying G95 feed per revolution mode the feed amount of the tool per revolution is directly specified by a number after F 3 G95 is a modal code Once specified it keeps effective till G94 is specified The default feedrate per revolution during initialization is O 4 An override from 096 to 20096 can be applied to feed per revolution with the override keys or band switch on th
347. riety of CNC data which are shown as follows S 1 Interface input signal 1000 1015 read signal input to system from PLC by bit i e G signal E 1032 read signal input to system from PLC by byte i e G signal 2 Interface output signal 1100 1115 write signal output to PLC from the system by bit i e F signal F 1132 write signal o to PLC from the system by byte i e F signal To 3 Tool length offset value 1500 1755 readable and writable ZEM 4 Tool length wear offset value 1800 2055 readable and writable z 5 Tool radius offset value 2100 2355 readable and writable 6 Tool radius wear offset value 2400 2655 readable and writable ye 7 Alarm 3000 8 User data list 3500 3755 read only unwritable 9 Modal message 4000 4030 read only unwritable 10 Position message 5001 5030 read only unwritable 11 Workpiece zero offset 5201 5235 readable and writable 12 Additional workpiece coordinate system 7001 7250 readable and writable 3 Explanation for system variables 1 Modal message Table 4 7 1 2 unction number number 4000 X JJcG toG 00 o 4 406 A A 060 4408 G43G44G499 08 G22 G23 G24 G25 626 44009 G32 G33 G34 G35 G306 G37 G38 ER G73 G74 G76 G80 681 682 683 684 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 4022 0 0D l 137 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 4023 0 0 0 0 0H
348. riod is over o the backlash compensation begins Therefore in machining outer circle contour with a large radius in order to make the offset position not to exceed the quadrant it needs to set a smaller precision While in machining a curve surface in order to not to perform backlash compensation in a fixed point of the tool path to form a swollen ridge it needs to set a larger precision to make the clearance compensation to be distributed in a certain width 0190 Backlash compensation amount of X axis 0 0000 Setting range O0 0 5 mm 0191 Backlash compensation amount of Y axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 305 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0192 Backlash compensation amount of Z axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0193 Backlash compensation amount of 4TH axis 0 0000 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0195 Compensation step of X axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0196 Compensation step of Y axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0197 Compensation step of Z axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0198 Compensation step of 4TH axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0200 Time constant of backlash compensation by 20 ascending and descending Setting range 0 400 ms 0201 Delay time of strobe signals MF SF TF Setting
349. rkpiece when the workpiece is being cut is called the cutting feedrate CNC can use the spindle speed to specify it unit MM Rev Example If the tool diameter is 10mm and the cutting linear speed is 8 m min during machining the spindle speed is about 255 according to N21000V TrD so the code is S255 Instructions related to the spindle speed are called the spindle speed function 1 4 Instructions for machine tool operations miscellaneous function In fact at the beginning of machining a workpiece it is necessary to rotate the spindle and supply coolant as required Therefore the user must control the ON OFF operations of spindle motor and cooling pump Spindle rotation L Coolant Tool ON OFF Fig 1 4 1 The function of controlling programs or the ON OFF operations of the machine tool using NC codes in CNC is called the miscellaneous function It is specified by M codes E g if M03 is specified the spindle will rotate counterclockwise at the specified speed e ag p e e UG ka e z ya Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 1 5 Tools used in different machining tool function Suitable tools must be selected when performing drilling taping boring and milling Each tool is assigned a number When different numbers are specified in a program their corresponding tools will be selected Tool number ATC tool magazine Fig 1 5 1
350. rogram in memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter program display page There are two ways to delete a program key in the program name e g for program O0002 key in number E Li press key the corresponding program in 2 Select DIR subpage in program page and select the program name to be deleted by moving the Key in address key Keys memory will be deleted E DELETE cursor then press key see Here Delete the current file is prompted on the system state column press key again then Deletion succeeded is prompted and the program selected is deleted Note If there is only one program file by pressing key Delete its name will be changed to O00001 first and then the contents be deleted in Edit DIR page regardless of whether it is O00001 or not if there are multiple program files the contents of program O00001 as well as its program name are deleted 257 Or JJ Sy Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 10 1 3 Deletion of all programs The steps for deleting all programs in memory are as follows a Select EDIT mode b Enter the o page c Key in MEALS d Key in address keys EN BIEN EN sl E ER sequence DELETE e Press key to delete all the programs saved in memory 10 1 4 Copy of a program oteps for copying the current program and saving it with a new name a Select EDIT mode b Ent
351. rogrammed path Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 20 10 Corner movement If two or more vectors are formed at the end of the block the tool traverses linearly from one vector to another The movement is called corner movement If AVXSAV limit and AVYSAV limit the latter vector is ignored If these vectors do not coincide then a movement around the corner is created This movement belongs to the former block M This move belongs to block N6 thus the feedrate is equal to that in block N6 If block N6 is GOO mode the tool moves at rapid feedrate if block N6 is G01 G02 G03 mode the tool moves at cutting feedrate Fig 4 5 3 21 121 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual However if the path of the next block overpasses the semicircle the function above is not performed The reason is that E S Co N4 G41 G91 X150 Y200 p N5 X150 Y200 N6 G02 J 600 m Tool center path N7 G01 X150 Y 200 a N8 G40 X150 Y 200 E S E Programmed B path ye Fig 4 5 3 22 If the vector is not ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P3 arc P4 P5 P6 P7 If the distance between P2 and P3 is ignored P3 is ignored The tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P4 P6 P7 The arc cutting of the block N6 is ignored 11 Interference check The tool overcutting is called interference The Interference check function checks the tool overcutting in advance If the int
352. rovided in MDI mode The instructions can be input directly using this function The data input parameter and offset modification etc are described in CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING This chapter will describe the MDI operation function in MDI mode 8 1 MDI instruction input The input in MDI mode is classified into two types 1 By MDI type multiple blocks can be input consecutively 2 By CUR MOD type only one bock can be input The input in MDI type is identical with the program input in Edit mode See CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM EDIT in this manual for details The input in CUR MOD type is introduced below Example Inputting a block GOO X50 Y100 in CUR MOD page The steps are KI 1 Press key to enter MDI mode CG e ag N Gi e t p c PROGRAM 2 Press key to enter program page then press soft key CUR MOD to enter CUR MOD page See fig 8 1 1 3 After inputting block GOOX50Y100 in sequence with the keyboard press key for confirmation then the program is displayed on the page As is shown in the figure below Fig 8 1 1 MODAL 300 1500 08 0000 0000 0000 Ie ae cs uy ABSOLUTE X 1 727 m Y 47 897 mm Z 9 480 mm SPRM 06000 SMAX 100000 17 97 27 PATH 1 HIPRG MDI E CUR NXT DIR Fig 8 1 1 247 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ
353. s always G90 default till G91 is specified If G91 specified the mode is always G91 till G90 specified System parameters Whether the default positioning parameter is G90 mode parameter is 0 or G91 mode parameter is 1 at Power On is set by bit parameter NO 3174 4 2 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 X or P__ Function G40 is for dwell operation It delays the specified time before executing the next block In ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya cutting mode G64 it is used for exact stop check The dwell per revolution in Feed per Revolution mode G95 can be specified by bit parameter No 34 0 Table 4 2 5 1 Value range of dwell time instructed with X 0 001 9999 999 S or rev 0 0001 9999 9999 Table 4 2 5 2 Value range of dwell time instructed with P unit No 5 1 0 1 99999 999 0 001s or rev No 5 1 1 1 99999 9999 0 0001s or rev Explanation 1 2 3 4 G04 is non modal instruction which is only effective in the current block If parameters X and P appear simultaneously parameter X is effective An alarm occurs if the values of X and P are negative Dwell is not executed if neither X nor P is specified 4 2 6 Single direction positioning G60 Format G60 A Y Z 33 e g p e e yo m e 3 z ya Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Overrun Dwell Start point O hw Start point
354. s Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual eis axis Tool length offset value of 4 axis 5026 Servo position offset of X axis 5027 Servo position offset of Y axis 5028 Servo position offset of Z axis 5029 Servo position offset of A axis Note 1 ABSIO The end point coordinates of the last block in workpiece coordinate system Note 2 ABSMT The current machine coordinate system position in machine coordinate system Note 3 ABSOT The current coordinate position in workpiece coordinate system Note 4 ABSKP The effective position of the skip signal of block G31 in workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece zero offset value and additional zero offset value Table 4 7 1 4 Variable number 5201 External workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis Function 5204 External workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5206 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5209 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5211 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5214 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5216 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5219 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 522 1 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5224 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5226 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5229 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5231 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5234 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis
355. s specified Example G01 and GOO are modal G codes in the same group ES ag kel a e yo m ch ya GO1X Z 5 G01 effective X 5 G01 effective GOOZ G00 effective It is the normal machining mode when the system bit parameter NO O 7 is set to 0 and the high speed and high precision machining mode when NO O 7 set to 1 Note 1 F indicates the normal machining mode T indicates high speed and high precision machining mode Note 2 Refer to System Parameter List for details Table 4 1 2 G codes and their functions Whether high speed and Group Format nign Function Be precision mode is valid true or E cutting feed clockwise CCW counter clockwise G00 GOO X YZ Positioning rapid traverse 21 Gr hd Zeg Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Whether high speed and Group Format high code precision mode is valid true or false E G04 P_ G04 X PS Dwell exact stop Function G10 L_N_P_R_ F_ Programmable data input G11 Programmable data input cancel x G12X YZ IJK Stored stroke detection G12 ON 16 e G13 F Stored stroke detection OFF G15 Polar coordinate instruction cancel instruction e ag kk a e yo ka e 3 z ya E i XY plane selection Written in blocks used for circular l E interpolation and tool radius compensation j AP Ane Seeron G19 H H YZ plane s
356. set or emergency stop C03 1 Toclear G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop C04 1 To clear G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop C05 1 To clear G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop C06 1 Toclear G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop C07 1 To clear G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 1000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 3 6 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08 C08 1 To clear G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop C09 1 To clear G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop C10 1 Toclear G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop C11 1 Toclear G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop C12 1 To clear G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop 0 Toreserve G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop C13 1 To clear G codes of 13 group at reset or emergen
357. set value is negative the workpiece is machined in the same way as G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the program Therefore the outer cutting for workpiece turns into inner cutting and the inner cutting turns into outer cutting As the usual programming shown in the following figure the offset value is assumed as positive When a tool path is programmed as A if the offset value is negative the tool center moves as in B when a tool path is programmed as B if the offset value is negative the tool center moves as in A 107 e g p e e UG ka e z z ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Tool center path Programmed path A B Fig 4 5 2 8 It is common to see a figure with acute angles figure with sharp angle arc interpolation However if the offset value is negative the inner side of the workpiece cannot be machined When cutting the inner sharp angle at a point insert an arc with a proper radius there and then perform cutting after the smooth transition The compensation for left or right means the compensation direction is at the left side or right side of the tool moving direction relative to the workpiece workpiece assumed as unmovable By G41or G42 the system enters compensation mode and by G40 the compensation mode is cancelled The example for compensation program is as follows The block 1 in which th
358. specified by absolute values Note The setting can be done by bit parameter NO 02776 skip signal SKIP 0 1 1 0 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 Format G20 inch input G21 metric input Function They are used for the inch metric input conversion in a program Explanation After inch metric conversion the units of the following values are changed Feedrate specified by F code position instruction workpiece zero offset value tool compensation value scale unit of MPG and movement distance in incremental feeding The G code status at power on is the same as that held before power off Note 1 When the inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa the tool compensation value must be preset according to the lest input incremental unit 2 After inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa for the first G28 the operation from the intermediate point is the same as that of manual reference point return 3 When the least input incremental unit is different from the least instruction incremental unit the maximum error is half of the least instruction unit and this error is not accumulated 4 Program inch metric input can be set by bit parameter NO 0072 5 Program inch metric output can be set by bit parameter NO 0340 6 G20 or G21 must be specified in a separate block 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner rounding Format L Chamfering gt R Corner rounding Function When the instructi
359. stem turns into G80 state G codes are represented by group numbers respectively based on their types Whether the G codes of each group are cleared after reset or emergency stop is determined by bit parameter NO 3520 7 and NO 3620 7 If the rotation scaling instruction and the instruction of group 01 or that of group 09 share the same block the rotation scaling instruction will be taken and the modes of group 01 or group 09 are changed If the rotation scaling instruction and the instruction of group 00 share the same block an alarm occurs 4 2 Simple G codes 4 2 1 Rapid positioning GOO Code format G00 X_Y Z_ Function GOO instruction moves the tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with the absolute or an incremental instruction at a rapid traverse speed Whether the absolute or incremental instruction is used is set by bit parameter NO 12 1 Select one of the following two tool paths Fig 4 2 1 1 1 Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is the same as linear interpolation GO1 The tool is positioned within the shortest time at a soeed not more than the rapid traverse speed of each axis 2 Nonlinear interpolation positioning The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse speed of each Non linear interpolation Linear interpolation positioning N axis respectively The tool path is usually not straight Start position Start position positioning End position End position Fig
360. te that the width of T1 usually not less n than 25mm must be enough for completing the deceleration Proximity decelerating from the zero return speed to the speed FL set by switch Parameter No 99 the width of T2 should be greater than the measuring diameter of the switch T3 is the zero in position point The proximity switch is PNP normal closed type i e the intervals of T1 and T3 are in OFF state and the intervals of T2 and others The proximity switch signal is input are in ON state with GSK218MC deceleration and zero signals at the same time GSK218MC series machine zero return Type A Fig 9 1 1 249 Or JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Zero return using stepper motor without encoder Type B Machine zero return direction 4 Tongue fixed on the slider ENF NG Explanation Proximity As the system performs machine zero return switch operation the machine slider is moved in the negative direction When the tongue presses down the stroke switch the system decelerates Note that the effective width usually not less than 25 mm must ensure the completion of the deceleration Decelerating from zero return speed to speed FL set by data parameter No 99 When the stroke switch detaches the tongue the system stops immediately and the zero return is completed The proximity switch signal is input with GSK2
361. tem bit parameter NO 31 0 the system default mode at power on can be set to G00 value is 0 or G01 value is 1 4 2 3 Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 A Circular interpolation G02 G03 Prescriptions for G02 and G03 The plane circular interpolation means that the arc path is finished according to the specified rotation direction and radius or circle center from the start point to end point in the specified plane Since the arc path can not be determined only by the start point and the end point other conditions are required gt Arc rotation direction G02 G03 gt Circular interpolation plane G17 G18 G19 gt Circle center coordinate or radius which thus leads to two instruction formats Circle center coordinate J K or radius R programming Only the three points above are all determined could the interpolation operation be done in coordinate system The circular interpolation can be done by the following instructions to make the tool move along an arc as is shown below Arc in XY plane G02 R G17 XY F G03 J Arc in ZX plane G02 R_ G18 XZ F_ G03 IK 27 ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Arc in YZ plane G02 R_ G19 Y Fs G03 JK Table 4 2 3 1 Arc specification on XY plane Plane specification Arc specification on ZX plane Arc specification on YZ plane CW rotation
362. tem parameter number ER AD2 AD2 1 Make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block 0 Do not make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block Standard setting 0100 0000 system parameter number 0 33 M3B M30 M02 M02 1 To return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed M30 1 Toreturn to block beginning when M30 is to be executed 0 Notto return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed M3B 1 At most three M codes allowable in a section of program 0 Only one M code allowable in a section of program Standard setting 1001 0000 287 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual System parameter setting 0 3 4 CFH DWL DWL 1 G04 for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode 0 G04 not for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode CFH 1 Toclear F H D codes at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve F H D codes at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 03 5 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 CO1 C01 1 To clear G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop C02 1 To clear G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 02 group at re
363. ter NO 36711 is 1 if reset or emergency stop is performed both the hole machining data and hole position data will be cleared Examples for data remaining and data clearing above are shown in the following table ES ag kel a e yo m ch 3 ya Table 4 4 2 G00X M3 M3 Data designation Explanation G81 Z R F can all be omitted since the hole machining mode and data are the same as those specified in Drill the hole for the length Y once by G81 Move only in X axis direction relative to the position of hole 3 Perform hole machining by G82 using the hole machining data Z R and F specified in and P in 2D 6 G80X Y Hole machining is not performed Cancel all the hole machining data G85X ZRP Since all the data are cancelled in 5 Z and R need to be re specified F is identical with that in 2 so it can be omitted P is not required in this block and it is saved It is the hole machining identical with that in 6 except for Z value And there is movement only in X axis at the hole position G89X Y Perform G89 hole machining using Z specified in 2 R and P in F in Q as the machining data G01X Y Cancel hole machining mode and clear hole machining data 59 Gr dd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual A Absolute instruction and incremental instruction in canned cycle G90 G91 The change of G90 G91 along drilling
364. ter Q is not specified or it is O If the Q value is negative the system takes its absolute value to perform intermittent feed Note 3 Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with a canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled when the tool is positioned to point R If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Cancel G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G73 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G73 will be cancelled 74 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning Example M3 1500 The spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G73 X0 YO Z 15 R 10 Q5 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 50 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R level Y 80 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X10 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y10 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y75 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Note In the example above the chip removal operation is still performed though Q is omitted during the machi
365. th Intersection Circular Linear Programmed path S L T intersection Tool center path Linear Circular Antersection Programmed path L Tool center path Ee Circular Circular Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 5 3 3 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code 3 Exceptional cases I Without an intersection In the left figure if the tool radius is small the offset value of the arc Alarm occurs and tool is stopped has an intersection if the radius gets larger the intersection may not exist and an alarm Interference When offset value is small gt exist in tool offset C will be issued in the system When offset value is big d SSS Sy d 400g E S g e fa II Arc center coincides with the start point or end point n In the left figure an alarm Radius St 9P tolerance exceeded will be issued a M NT G41 Tool center path g N5 iM 1 X100 N6 G02 X100 IO JO Programmed path N7 G03 Y 100 J 100 Fig 4 5 3 4 4 Tool movement in offset cancel mode In the offset mode when a block that satisfies any of the following conditions is performed the system enters into offset cancel mode The operation of this block is called the offset cancel a Instruction G40 b When the tool radius compensation number is O Arc instruction G03 or G02 cannot be used for cancellation in offset cancel mode An alarm is issued and tool is st
366. the manual for details Format S Explanation 1 Only one S code can be specified in a block 2 The spindle speed is specified directly by address S and a numerical value behind it Unit r min e g For M3 S300 it means the spindle is rotated at a speed of 300 r min 3 If a move instruction and an S code are specified in the same block they are executed simultaneously 4 The spindle speed is controlled by an S code followed by a numerical value 6 2 Spindle switch value control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 1 the spindle speed is controlled by the switch value which consists of an address S and a two digit number behind it Three mechanical gears for the spindle are provided when the spindle speed is controlled by the switch value For the correspondence between S codes and spindle speed as well as the number of spindle gears please see the manual provided by the machine tool builder Format S01 S1 S02 S2 S03 S3 Explanation 1 There are 8 gears in the software at present and 3 gears in the ladder diagram When S codes beyond the codes above are specified the system displays Miscellaneous function being executed 2 If a four digit number is specified behind S the latter two digits are effective 6 3 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 Format Constant surface speed control instruction G96 S Surface speed m min or inch min Constant surface speed control cancel instruction G97 S Spindle s
367. their different applications and characteristics 1 Null variable 0 This variable is always null so no value can be assigned to it 2 Local variables 1 50 They can only be used for data storage in a macro such as the results of operations When the power is turned off or the program ends M30 or MO2 is executed they are cleared automatically whether the local variables are cleared or not after reset is set by bit parameter NO 52 7 When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables 3 Common variables 100 199 500 999 Whether common variables 3100 72199 are cleared or not after reset is set by bit parameter NO 52426 The common variables can be shared among the main program and the custom macros called by the main program Namely the variable l in a custom macro program is the same as those in other macro programs Therefore the common variable l of operation result of a macro program can be used in other macro programs The usage of common variables is not specified in this system users thus can define it freely Table 4 7 1 1 4 100 199 Commen They are cleared at power off and all are variable initialized to null at power on 131 Or JJJ Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 500 999 Data is saved in files and it will not be lost even if the power is turned off 4 System variables They are used for reading and writing a va
368. tion Manual If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern the sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in the memory to simplify the program The subprogram can be called in Auto mode usually by M98 in the main program Besides the subprogram called can also call another subprogram The subprogram called from the main program is called the one level subprogram Up to 4 levels subprogram can be called in a program Fig 2 2 2 The last block of a subprogram is the instruction M99 used for returning to the main program After the return the blocks following the subprogram calling block are executed If the last block of a subprogram is ended with M02 or M03 the system will also return to the main program and proceed to the next block just as ended with M99 When a main program is ended with M99 its execution will be repeated Main program oubprogram oubprogram e ag p e e UG ka e z ya O00001 M98 P10000 One level nesting Two level nesting Fig 2 2 2 Two level subprogram nesting The instruction can be called with a subprogram The same subprogram can be called up to 9999 times consecutively or repeatedly 2 2 1 Subprogram writing Write a subprogram following the format below o LIDILILIL Subprogram number ER Subprogram M99 Subprogram end Fig 2 2 1 1 Write the subprogram number behind the address O at the beginning of the subprogram and end th
369. top MOO After the block containing MOO is executed the auto running pauses and the modal message is saved After key E is pressed the program execution continues 2 Program optional stop MO1 J OPTIONAL If key SIOP is pressed before the program execution the automatic running pauses and the modal message is saved when the block containing MO1 is executed in the program After key 2 is pressed the program execution is continued 3 Pressing key E If key E is pressed during the auto running the machine states are as follows 1 Machine feeding slows down and stops 2 Dwell continues if Dwell G04 instruction is executed 3 The other modal message is saved 4 The program execution continues after key 2 is pressed 4 Pressing key ES See Section 2 3 1 in this manual 5 Pressing Emergency Stop button See Section 2 3 2 in this manual In addition if the control is switched to other mode from Auto mode DNC mode or MDI page of MDI mode in which the program is being executed the machine can also be stopped The steps are as follows 1 If the control is switched to Edit MDI DNC mode the machine stops after the current block is 242 Chapter 7 Auto Operation executed 2 If the control is switched to MANUAL MPG Step mode the machine interruption stops immediately 3 If the control is switched to Machine zero interface the machine slows down to stop 7 4 Auto running from any block This s
370. traight line at the federate mm min specified by parameter F Explanation 1 X Y Z are the coordinates of the end point Since they are related to the coordinate system please see sections 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 The feedrate specified by F keeps effective till a new F value is specified The federate specified by F code is calculated by an interpolation along a straight line If F code is not specified in a program the default F value at system Power On is used see data parameter P87 for details G01 X200 Y100 F200 Note federate of each axis is as follows G01 Xa YB ZyFf Program example Fig 4 2 2 1 End point In this program Start point Feedrate of X axis 26 Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code Feedrate of Y axis Federate of Z axis Ji rur y Fig 4 2 2 1 Note 1 All code parameters are positioning parameters except for F code The upper limit of federate F is set by data parameter P96 If the actual cutting federate after using federate override exceeds the upper limit it is clamped to the upper limit unit mm min The lower limit of the federate F is set by data parameter P97 If the actual cutting federate after using federate override exceeds the lower limit it is clamped to the lower limit unit mm min 2 The tool does not move when no positioning parameter is specified behind G01 and the system only changes the mode of the current tool movement mode for G01 By altering the sys
371. ts with each bit having different meaning 2 The data value range in above table is common effective range The specific parameter value range actually differs See the parameter explanation for details Example 1 Meaning of the bit parameters Data BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO number C25 Meaning of the data parameters 0 2 1 Data number Data Note 1 The blank bits in the parameter explanation and the parameter numbers that are displayed on screen but not in parameter list are reserved for further expansion They must be set to 0 Note 2 If 0 or 1 of the parameter is not specified with a meaning It is assumed that 1 for affirmative 0 for negative Note 3 If INI is set to 0 in metric input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INI is set to 1 in inch input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min ZTI Cr i Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Bit parameter system parameter number Ojojoj jMODE SEQ MSP CPB INI PBUS PBUS 1 Transmission type of the drive unit is bus type 0 Transmission type of the drive unit is pulse type INI 1 Inch input 0 Metric input If INI is set to O in metric input the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis
372. umber is not found in external program retrieving or it is edited in 0059 background Check program number or external signal or stop background editting 0060 Specified sequence number is not found in retrieving Check sequence number 0061 The reference point is not in X axis I 318 Appendix l Alarm List cose Teen Lo memweepotimtnZas Lo ees el TemHwexepantisnetSTHa s Lone Cancel canned cyle mode befor nputing parameter io el oto aos nor supporte setom 0068 Parameter switch is not switched on i 0069 U disk operation page should be closed when machining i 0070 Insufficient memory Delete unneeded programs and try it again i The address is not found 0072 Too many programs 63 basic 125 optional 200 optional or 400 NEN optional Delete unnecessary programs 0073 Program number already in use Change the program number or delete unneeded program 0074 Illegal program number beyond the range 1 99999 Change the program number 0075 To register a protected program number NEED 0076 Address P program name is not specified in block M98 Modify the program 0077 Program nesting exceed 5 layers In blocks M98 G65 program name specified by address P is not found or 0078 macro program called by MOG does not exist 0079 CNC expires the using date Please contact the supplier i Input data is wrong Max speed is smaller than Min speed or Min speed is 0080 b
373. us A Initial angle N Number Parameters above use the following variables 500 X coordinate value of the reference point X0 501 Y coordinate value of the reference point YO 502 Radius R 503 Initial angle A 504 N numbers If NO the rotation is CCW and the number is N If N lt O the rotation is CW and the number is N The variables below are used for the operation in macro 100 For the counting of the hole machining I 101 The final value of the counting N IE 102 The angle of hole 61 103 X coordinate of hole Xi 104 Y coordinate of hole Yi Chapter 4 Preparation Function G Code The custom macro body can be programmed as follows O9010 N100 G65 H01 P4100 QO I 0 G65 H22 P 101 Q 504 IE N N200 G65 H04 P 102 Q 100 R360 G65 H05 P 102 Q 102 R 504 01 4A 4 360 xI N G65 H02 P 102 Q 503 R 102 d G65 H32 P403 Q 502 R 102 X X 1 R COS 6l S G65 H02 P403 Q 500 R 103 G65 H31 P4104 Q 502 R 102 Y I Y 1 R SIN 61 k G65 H02 P 104 Q 501 R 104 G90 G00 X 103 Y 104 Positioning of hole 3 G Hole machining G code go G65 H02 P400 Q 100 R1 I I 1 G65 H84 P200 Q 100 R 101 When I lt IE go to block N 200 drill IE holes M99 Example for a program calling the above custom macro body is as follows O0010 G65 H01 P 500 Q100 X02100MM G65 H01 P 501 Q 200 Yo 200MM G65 H01 P 502 Q100 R 100MM G65 H01 P 503 Q20 A 20 G65 H01 P 504 Q12 N 12 in CCW rot
374. ut Drive unit alarm 07 CCW CW input prohibition OFF OFF Drive unit alarm 08 absolute value of value of position deviation counter 0408 exceeds 230 0409 Drive unit alarm 09 encoder signal error 4 0410 Drive unit alarm 10 control power 15V is too low BEEN 0411 Drive unit alarm 11 IPM intelligent module failures NENNEN 0412 Drive unit alarm 12 motor current is too large EN ERN M NN overheat Wn DWewidamMieeOmdRd ous Drive unt alarm 14 encoder counterfaut om Dre ntaa 20 EEPROM oror Ono Drive unt aarm 30 encoder Z puso ror 91 Drive unit alarm 81 encoder UVW signal eror or it does not match encoder 92 Drive unit alarm 32 UVW with all high tevel or win al low evel 324 Appendix l Alarm List GG Dive unit air 38 communication merap Lon rive unit alarm 34 encoder spoed is abnormal Los Drive unit arar 35 encoder siate ts abnormal Los Drive unit aam 36 encoder counter is abnormal Lor Drive unt ala 37 single ole numberof encoder vertow Los Drive unt alam 36 mul cole number of encoder ovetow Los ___Drve untae 29 encoder batey aem oup O Dre untaian a0 ro vater in encoder HR 0442 Drive unit alarm 42 absolute position data abnormal alarm 0443 Drive unit alarm 43 encoder EPPROM check alarm 0M9 Ethernet initialization Ethernet initialization failure Please check hardware Please check hardware Ee correct
375. ve function LOPT 1 Use external operator panel lock 0 Not use external operator panel lock LEDT 1 Use external editing lock 0 Not use external editing lock Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number gen SCL SCL 1 Use scaling 0 Not use scaling Standard setting 0000 OOOO oystem parameter number 0 6 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM AALM SSC 293 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual SSC 1 To use constant surface speed control 0 Not use constant surface speed control AALM 1 External user alarm ignored 0 External user alarm not ignored SALM 1 Spindle driver alarm ignored 0 Spindle driver alarm not ignored EALM 1 Emergency stop alarm ignored 0 Emergency stop alarm not ignored LALM 1 Limit alarm ignored 0 Limit alarm not ignored FALM 1 Feed axis driver alarm ignored 0 Feed axis driver alarm not ignored Standard setting 0000 0000 2 Data Parameter Parameter number Definition Default value 0000 UO channel input and output device selection Setting range 0 2 It is set to O or 1 for communication between CNC and PC via RS232 interface and set to 2 when CNC connecting with USB flash disk 0001 Baudrate of communication channel DNC 38400 Setting range 0 115200 unit BPS 0002 Baudrate of communication channel file transfer 115200 Setting range 0 115200 unit BPS
376. vely 2 6 Stroke check By stored stroke check 1 and 2 the system can specify 2 areas where the tool is forbidden to enter l J K 1 Forbidden area is inside 1 Forbidden area is outside Forbidden area for the tool Fig 2 6 1 Stroke check 179 e e N e x t p e er JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual When the tool is moved beyond the stroke an alarm is issued and the machine is decelerated and stopped When the tool enters the forbidden area with an alarm issued move the tool in the reverse direction relative to the one in which the tool enters Explanation 1 Stored stroke check 1 Its boundary is set by data parameters P66 P73 The outside of this area is the forbidden area which is usually set as the machine maximum stroke by the machine builder 2 Stored stroke check 2 Its boundary is set by data parameters P76 P83 or program instructions The inside or outside of this area can be set as a forbidden area by bit parameter NO 11 0 0 inside for forbidden area 1 outside for forbidden area 1 Point A and point B in the following figure must be set when the forbidden area is set by parameters B I J K X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X I gt Least instruction increment unit CG e ag N i x Z E e Y J gt C Least instruction increment unit Z K gt Least instruction
377. wed and modified by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 2 1 1 Program display Press soft key EIPRG to enter program page In this page a page of blocks being executed in the memory can be displayed See Fig 3 2 1 187 CG g N e T E e Gr dd Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual G92 X0 YO ZO N102 GO GO X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N108 Z2 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X79 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M30 09 08 06 DATA ooo O PATH 1 a oe 09 el Fig 3 2 1 By pressing soft key EIPRG again the program EDIT and modification page is entered see Fig 3 2 2 G92 XB YO Z N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 81500 M8 N108 Ze 3 N126 X795 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X795 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X795 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X795 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M30 DATA pd 09 08 19 PATH 1 Fig 3 2 2 Press key gt to enter the next page a mue om mm rem RETURN FE Press key gt
378. wheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0153 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant of handwheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0154 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0155 Maximum clamp speed of step feed Setting range 0 3000 mm min 0156 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 10 I 120 1000 200 50 2000 120 100 1000 100 303 Cr 13x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 0157 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant 120 of axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0158 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel incomplete running Setting range 0 1000 ms 0160 Multiplication coefficient of X axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0161 Multiplication coefficient of Y axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0162 Multiplication coefficient of Z axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0163 Multiplication coefficient of 4TH axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0165 Frequency dividing coefficient of X axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 65536 0166 Frequency dividing coefficient of Y axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 65536 0167 Frequency dividing coefficient of Z axis instruction CMD Setting range 1 65536 0168 Frequency dividing coefficient of 4TH axis instruction
379. wn Z axis to make the tool nose position lower than the workpiece surface and then move the tool towards the negative direction of the workpiece at a low speed 230 Chapter A Manual Operation usually using MPG feed mode stop the tool when it just cuts to the workpiece Here press CANCEL key J on the edit panel area and then press key to set the X coordinate to 0 Use the same method to set X coordinate to other values e g input x20 and press key INPUT X 3 Similarly move the tool to the negative direction side of the workpiece and press key after positioning then press key to complete halving operation Note that halving setting does not change the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates 4 Move the tool to the position where the relative coordinate of the axis is O The position is the center in X direction X 5 In the SETTING page select WORKPIECE COORDINATE subpage press key and then key to finish the zero point setting for X axis 6 At the center i e the positioned point where the relative coordinates of X and Y are 0 on the machine of XY the floating coordinate system can be established by G92 and the XY machine coordinates of this point can also be written to the parameters of G54 G59 workpiece coordinate systems for system use 7 Then the operation using trial cutting and halving method to align the center of the square workpiece is finished With the assignment f
380. wn in figures 3 9 8 3 9 11 SYMBOL MEANING e g N e t E Fans SPL FEED HOLD Fans Sirm Cycle start Fansite SA Servo ready FH DP Auto run Flan AL Alarm F g1 1 RST Reset Fatn1as3 SAR Spindle rev arrive Faai 4 ENB Spindle enable F 01 5 TAP Tapping FOG1 46 DTAP Tapping exe Faol MTAP GES Tapping mode Fage s THRD Threading Fanesa SRNMV Program start Fage 6 CUT Cutt ing P 1 16 Fig 3 9 8 225 CG g N T E e Cr Ia 226 GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System SYMBOL MEANING Bann FIN MST End signal Bananas MFIM Miscellaneous function completion sianal Gaaa 4 SFIN Spindle function completion signal DAD TFIN Tool function completion signal Ban1sdp ESP Emergency stop G88141 SKIPP Skip Donan GR1 Bear input Gages1 GR2 Gear input GaBese GR Gear input KSE GEAR Gear in position input GB883s1 RGTAP Rigid tapping DDT UINT Macroprogram interruption D Ha MI Mirror image Ba1821 MIZ Mirror image P 1 10 PATH 1 MDI d pu rte BS om eee Fig 3 9 9 Programming and Operation Manual SYMBOL MEANING Xgend MT EDIT xp2g 1 MT AUTO xHeuse MT INPUT HOH MT ZERO xHeusa MT SINGLE STEP xmas MT MANLIAL XHeus5 MT HANDWHEEL xBHeasr MT DNC xmne1ls MT SKIP x 21 1 MT SINGLE BLOCK IER MT DRY RUN x021 3 MT MST LOCK IER MT MACHINE LOCK XB2145 MT OPTIONAL HALT P 1 6 P
381. x F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 292 REL 1 Relative position display setting of indexing table within 360 0 Relative position display setting of indexing table beyond 360 G90 1 Indexing instruction absolute instruction 0 Indexing instruction specified by G90 G91 1 Make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in the same block 0 Do not make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in the same block Standard setting 0100 0000 SIM oystem parameter number 0 51 MDLY SBM SBM 1 Single block allowed in macro statement 0 Single block unallowed in macro statement MDLY 1 Delay is allowed in macro statement 0 Delay is unallowed in macro statement Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 5 2 CLV CCV CCV 1 Macro common variables 100 199 clearing after reset 0 Macro common variables 100 199 not clearing after reset CLV 1 Macro local variables 1 50 clearing after reset 0 Macro local variables 1 50 not clearing after reset Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 5 3 jPLCV LAD3 LDA2 LAD1 LADO LADO LAD3 They are binary combination parameters If they are O it uses No O ladder if they are 1 15 it uses 0 15 ladder diagram PLCV 1 Read and display PLC software
382. xecuted To enter manual mode To enter MPG mode To enter DNC mode For a block preceding with T sign i itis on Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode the indicator lights up And the block is indicator Lights up 171 CG e ag N e t e c Gr 449 F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Keys Desianati Remarks and operation y esignation Explanation See mp The indicator lights Auto mode MDI mode Dry run switch up if dry run is DNC mode zai valid M S T function wast M S T lock output is invalid if the Auto mode MDI mode we switch indicator for M S T DNC mode MARE function lock lights Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode The indicator lights up if itis on and the axis moveme nt MANUAL mode DNC output is invalid mode LIGHT light switch light ON OFF aes oll GE lubricant Coolant switch Coolant ON OFF Spindle control Spindle CCW MPG mode step keys Spindle stop mode manual mode aoe ee ee Spindle CW l Spindle speed e Spindle override M t spindi Th pow het keys adjustment spindle Any mode SOVERRDE SOVERRIDE S OVERRIDE speed analog control valid ep Spindle JOG Spindle JOG Manual mode Step JOG switch ON OFF mode MPG mode mode Step Spindle exact Spindle exact stop Manua ai pus key ON OFF mode MPG mode G w DI MAN aa DEES T
383. xis nge 0 1000 Pitch error compensation points of X4TH axis nge 0 1000 Pitch error compensation interval of X axis nge 0 9999 9999 mm Pitch error compensation interval of Y axis nge 0 9999 9999 mm Pitch error compensation interval of Z axis nge 0 9999 9999 mm Pitch error compensation interval of 4TH axis nge 0 9999 9999 mm Pitch error compensation override of X axis D 0 05 256 256 256 256 dh b 0 001 307 Cr i Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual Setting range 0 99 9999 0232 Pitch error compensation override of Y axis 0 001 Setting range 0 99 9999 0233 Pitch error compensation override of Z axis 0 001 Setting range 0 99 9999 0234 Pitch error compensation override of 4TH axis 0 001 Setting range 0 99 9999 0240 Gain adjustment data for spindle analog output Setting range 0 98 1 02 0241 Compensation value of offset voltage for spindle analog output Setting range 0 2 0 2 0242 Spindle speed at spindle orientation or motor speed 50 at spindle gear shift Setting range 0 9999 r min 0243 Maximum setting value to converter 8191 Setting range 4000 8191 0246 Spindle maximum speed to gear 1 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0247 Spindle maximum speed to gear 2 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0248 Spindle maximum speed to gear 3 6000 Setting range 0 99999 r min 0250 Spindle
384. xis feeding direction reversing DIR5 1 The 5 axis feeding direction 0 The 5 axis feeding direction reversing Standard setting 0001 1100 oystem parameter number 0 04 AZR JAX JAX 1 Synchronous controlled axes for manual reference point mode one axis 0 Synchronous controlled axes for manual reference point mode multiple axes AZR 1 For G28 when reference point is not setup alarm 0 For G28 when reference point is not setup use tongue Standard setting 0000 0000 oystem parameter number 0 0 5 IPR ISC ISC 1 Min moving unit of 0 0001mm deg 0 00001inc 0 Min moving unit of 0 001mm deg 0 0001inc 279 Cr i Bx F GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual IPR 1 Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit effective 0 Axes min setting unit is 10 times of min moving unit ineffective Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 06 MAOB ZPLS ZMOD ZRN 1 When the reference point is not specified system alarms if instruction eun other than G28 is specified during auto running 0 When the reference point is not specified system doesn t alarm if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running ZMOD 1 Reference return mode selection in front of the tongue 0 Reference return mode selection behind the tongue ZPLS 1 Zero type selection one revolution signal 0 Zero type selection non one revolut
385. y Run speed x rapid feed override In cutting feed the program speed equals to Dry Run speed x cutting feed override Note 1 The Dry Run speed is set by data parameter P86 Note 2 In rigid taping whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO 12 5 Note 3 In cutting feed whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO 12 6 Note 4 In rapid positioning whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO NO 12 7 243 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sy GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual 7 6 Single block execution Single Block can be selected for checking the execution of a block e Op In Auto DNC or MDI mode press key JA that the indicator on the key lights up means single block execution state is entered In single block execution the system stops after the execution of a single block Press key VES to execute the next block and perform the operation like this repeatedly till the whole program is executed Note In G28 mode the single block stop can be performed at an intermediate point T Machine lock MACHINE In AUTO mode press key HK that the indicator on the key lights up means the current Machine lock state is entered In this mode the axes on the machine do not move but the position along each axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving In addition M S and T functions can
386. y to clear all the data in the page 22 CG e ag N e x t E e Or JJ Sx Tz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual CHAPTER 4 MANUAL OPERATION x Press key EES to enter Manual mode which includes manual feed spindle control and machine panel control etc 4 1 Coordinate axis movement In Manual mode each axis can be moved at MANUAL feedrate or manual rapid traverse speed separately 4 1 4 Manual feed or key and the feedrate can be changed by feedrate override If the key is released the X axis movement is stopped That of the Y and Z axes are the same as X axis The three axes simultaneous moving is not available in this system but the three axes simultaneous zero return is supported by the system Note The manual feedrate of each axis is set by parameter P98 4 1 2 Manual rapid traverse Uu Press key RAPID to enter Rapid Traverse state with its indicator lighting up Then press manual feeding keys to move each axis at the rapid traverse speed Note 1 The manual rapid speeds are set by the parameter P170 P173 Note 2 Whether manual rapid traverse is effective before reference point return is set by the bit parameter NO 12 0 4 1 3 Manual feedrate and manual rapid traverse speed selection The manual feedrate override which can be selected by the band switch is divided into 21 gears 0 200 in MANUAL feed 228 Chapter A Manual Oper
387. y words Blocks are isolated by E block end codes LF for ISO CR for EIA Character indicates the block end code in this manual e e LE RH 000022 6 000016 Program TEES name G92 XO KEE N102G0G90K74 295 295 Word N1 6Z30 Lo N108Z2 3 N128X75 472Y 48 356Z 031 Sequence ss 496Y 48 174Z 933 a Block end code number N132 Y 48 011 N134X75 472Y 47 876Z 031 Block N136X75 425Y 47 776Z 028 N138X75 354Y 47 719Z 023 N140X75 26Y 47 712Z 017 N142X75 142Y 47 764Z 009 N144MS2M4 Program end SN o 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 98 96 12 SEDEN ITT o AM MDI WR WX H as Fig 2 1 1 Program configuration A group of instructions for controlling the CNC machine to finish workpiece machining is called the program After the written program is input to the CNC system the system will move the tool along a straight line or an arc or rotate or stop the spindle Please edit these instructions according to the actual movement sequence of the machine tool in a program The configuration of a program is shown in Fig 2 1 1 2 1 1 Program name In this system the system memory is capable of storing many programs In order to differentiate these programs each program begins with an address O followed by a five digit number as shown in Fig 2 1 1 1 o III Program Number 0 99999 the number can be input with its leading zero omitted Address O Fig 2 1 1 1 Configu
388. ya Gr hd Sy Tzz GSK218MC Series Machining Center CNC System Programming and Operation Manual a Movement along straight line G01 Y__ Ss G b Movement along arc GO3X Y R j X axis motor Y axis motor a Movement along Tool movement straight line b Movement along arc Fig 1 1 3 Note For some machines it is the worktable moves rather than the tool in practice It is assumed that the tool moves relative to the workpiece in this manual Refer to the machine actual movement direction for the actual movement and protect against personal injury and machine damage 1 2 Feed feed function The feed function which controls the tool feed speed is divided into two types 1 Rapid traverse The rapid traverse is used to specify the rapid speed when GOO is used for positioning The rapid traverse speed of each axis is set by parameters so it is unnecessary to specify it in the program 2 Cutting feedrate Moving a tool at a specified speed to cut a workpiece is called feed The feedrate is specified with numerical values E g the program code is F150 when the tool is moved at the speed of 150m min F mm min Tool Workpiece Worktable Fig 1 2 1 Chapter 1 Overview 1 3 Cutting speed and spindle speed function Diameter V m min Cc Workpiece E g p e e UG e e z z ya Fig 1 3 1 The speed of the tool relative to the wo
389. ystem allows the auto run to start from any block of the current program The steps are shown as follows e x 1 Press key MANUAL to enter Manual mode start spindle and other miscellaneous functions 2 Execute the modal values of the program in MDI mode and ensure the modal values are correct e Zi PROGRAM 3 Press key EDIT to enter Edit mode and press key to enter program page then find the program to be machined in DIR 4 Open the program and move the cursor to the block to be executed Q AUTO 5 Press key to enter Auto mode e e ag N e m t c 6 Press key MOESTAT to execute the program automatically Note 1 Before execution confirm the current coordinate point is the end position of the last block confirmation for the current coordinate point is unnecessary if the block to be executed is absolute programming and contains G00 GO1 Note 2 If the block to be executed is for tool change operation etc ensure no interference and collision occur between the current position and workpiece in a bid to prevent machine damage and personnel hurt 7 9 Dry run Before the machining by a program use Dry Run usually in combination with M S T Lock or Machine Lock to check the program E Q u AUTO DRY Press key to enter Auto mode and press key that the indicator on the key lights up means Dry Run state is entered In rapid feed the program speed equals to Dr

This manual describes the various matters concerning the

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents